BID DOCUMENT SPECIFICATIONS
for the
SOUTHERN HIGH SCHOOL FAÇADE RENOVATION & REPAIRS 345 OAKLAND DRIVE OAKLAND, MARYLAND 21550
PSC PROJECT NO. 11.005.21SR GCPS BID No. SH20-01 BFM PROJECT NO. 19071
OWNER GARRETT COUNTY PUBLIC SCHOOLS 40 SOUTH SECOND STREET OAKLAND, MD 21550
BOARD OF EDUCATION OF GARRETT COUNTY Mr. M. Thomas Woods, President Mrs. Monica Rinker, Vice President Mr. Rodney Glotfelty, Associate Member Mr. Matthew A. Paugh, Associate Member Mrs. Charlotte A. Sebold, Associate Member Ms. Katherine J. Catulle, Student Board Member
GARRETT COUNTY SUPERINTENDENT OF SCHOOLS MS. B ARBARA L. B AKER
MD STATE SUPERINTENDENT OF SCHOOLS DR. KAREN B. SALMON
March 13, 2020
PREPARED BY: BUSHEY FEIGHT MORIN ARCHITECTS INC. 473 NORTH POTOMAC STREET HAGERSTOWN, MARYLAND 21740 301-733-5600
DIVISION 0
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
BUSHEY FEIGHT MORIN ARCHITECTS INC. 473 NORTH POTOMAC STREET HAGERSTOWN, MARYLAND 21740 301-733-5600 FAX: 301-733-5612
SECTION 00 01 20
DIRECTORY
DIRECTORY
SOUTHERN HIGH SCHOOL FAÇADE RENOVATIONS & REPAIRS
GARRETT COUNTY PUBLIC SCHOOLS PSC PROJECT NO.: 11.005.21SR BFM No. 19071 OWNER GARRETT COUNTY PUBLIC SCHOOLS FACILITIES & MAINTENANCE DEPARTMENT 770 Dennett Road Oakland, MD 21550
Contact: Richard Wesolowski, Dir. of Facilities, Maintenance & Operations Telephone: 301.334.8906 Fax: 301.334.8916 Email: [email protected]
Contact: Matt Zimmerman, Manager of Operations/ Project Manager Telephone: 301.334.7651 Email: [email protected]
Contact: David Browning, Manager of Facilities & Maintenance Telephone: 301.334.8921 Email: [email protected]
ARCHITECT BUSHEY FEIGHT MORIN ARCHITECTS INC. Contact: Michael Gehr, Principal 473 North Potomac Street Hagerstown, MD 21740 Telephone: 301.733.5600 Fax: 301.733.5612 Email: [email protected]
CIVIL ENGINEER SPECS, Inc. Contact: Ray Rase 105 S. Centre Street Cumberland, MD 21502 Telephone: 301-777-2510 Fax: 301-777-8410 Email: [email protected]
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER MATONAK & ASSOCIATES INC. Contact: Dan Matonak, Principal 931-B Sweeney Drive Hagerstown, MD 21740 Telephone: 301.790.0111 Fax: 301.790.0222 Email: [email protected]
MEP ENGINEER CJL ENGINEERING Contact: Matt Kordish, Assoc. Principal/Electrical 232 Homer Street Johnstown, PA 15902 Telephone: 814.536.1651 Fax: 814.536.5732 Email: [email protected]
SITE Southern High School 345 Oakland Drive Oakland, MD 21550 Contact: Jim Magruder, Building Operations Supervisor
Directory - 1 SECTION 00 10 00
INVITATION TO BIDDERS 00 10 00 INVITATION TO BID
Notice is given hereby that: Garrett County Board of Education will accept bids for the Façade Renovations and Repairs at Southern High School according to Drawings and Specifications prepared by BFM Architects Inc. described in general as:
Removal of existing windows and exterior insulation finish system, metal studs and existing gypsum board. Installation of new brick veneer in front of existing masonry wall, infill of new metal studs, gypsum board, and new windows. Reconditioning of existing exposed steel structure including cleaning, removal of rust, and coat with epoxy paint. Construction of new portico, new sidewalk and fire lane, installation of new flagpole, replacement of a storefront entrance, three (3) new man doors along front of the school. At rear of school a new entrance shall be constructed to enclose an exterior areaway, re-conditioning of existing steel structure and coating with epoxy paint, re-caulking of all exterior windows of the main classroom wing other soft joints. Repair any broken windows.
Sealed bids will be received at the Garrett County Board of Education, Maintenance Facility, 770 Dennett Road, Oakland, MD at 2:00 pm (EST/DST) time on April 7, 2020 at the front reception area. A school board designee will receive and carry all bids to the designated room to be read aloud. Affidavit for the MBE compliance must be submitted with the bid. Contractors must be an approved pre-qualified contractor.
Bids received by the designated time will be opened shortly thereafter at a designated location in the building and read aloud at that time and at that place. Bids received after that time will not be accepted. Interested parties are invited to attend.
No bidder may withdraw his bid for a period of sixty (60) calendar days after the day of the bid opening.
Proposed Contract Documents may be examined at:
GCPS Website
Bushey Feight Morin Architects Inc. 473 North Potomac Street Hagerstown, MD 21740
Facilities Department Garrett County Board of Education 40 S. Second Street Oakland, MD 21550
Bona fide general contract bidders may secure the contract documents electronically from the GCPS website on the following basis:
1. Qualified General Contractors can obtain electronic version of the Contract Documents on GCPS’ website which includes specifications and drawings and any addenda or subsequently issued data during bidding; if hard copies of documents are desired a $35.00 non-refundable fee is due for a CD of the documents, plus any mailing charges via separate check, obtain from BFM Architects with checks payable to Bushey Feight Morin Architects Inc.
2. Contractors must provide with their Bid the completed AIA A305 Contractor’s Statement. This form will be reviewed to determine if the Bidder is an approved Contractor per GCPS. Qualification forms can be submitted prior to the bid date.
Invitation to Bid 00 10 00 -1
The Owner may make such investigations as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and prospective bidders shall be required to furnish to the Architect evidence of performance of similar projects of this magnitude and complication and all such information and data for this purpose as may be requested. The Owner reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by or investigation of, such bidder fails to satisfy the Owner that such bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligation of the Contract and to complete the work contemplated therein.
Bid security by surety bond or certified check in the amount of 5% of the base bid will be required to accompany bids by the General Contractor.
Bona fide General Bidders must be licensed by the State of Maryland and be pre-qualified by the Garrett County Board of Education.
Wage rates will be required due to projected cost of the work; Local MBE goals shall be met.
A Pre-Bid Meeting will be held at the project site, Southern High School, on Tuesday, March 11, 2020 at 9:00 AM, all Contractors are encouraged to attend .
Performance and Payment bonds shall be in accordance with AIA Document A201, Article 11.5 in the amount of 100% of the total Base Bid cost.
The Garrett County Board of Education reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive irregularity in the bids and in the bidding.
By Authority of: Ms. Barbara L. Baker Superintendent of Schools Garrett County Board of Education
END OF INVITATION TO BID
Invitation to Bid 00 10 00 -2
SECTION 00 14 00
AIA DOCUMENT A701 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SECTION 00 20 00
STANDARD FORM OF PROPOSAL 00 20 00 STANDARD FORM OF PROPOSAL (Submit in triplicate on loose forms supplied by Architect.)
TO: Garrett County Board of Education Bid Date: April 7,2020 40 S. Second Street Time: 2:00 PM EST/DST Oakland, MD 21550 GCPS Bid No. SH20-01
PROJECT: GCPS: Southern High School – Façade Renovations and Repairs
Proposal of ______( hereinafter called " Bidder " ),
* a corporation, organized and existing under the laws of the State of ______* a partnership, or and individual doing business as ______.
Gentlemen:
The bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the Mechanical Unit Replacements in the Gymnasium & Metal Shop at Southern High School, has examined the plans and specifications with related documents and the size of the proposed work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the proposed project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, and supplied, and to construct the project in accordance with the Contract Documents and Addenda within the time set forth therein, and at the prices stated below. These prices are to cover all expense incurred in performing the work required under the Contract Documents, of which this proposal is a part.
COMPLETION TIME:
To begin the performance at the time stated in the Notice to Proceed and to complete the work in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents.
The undersigned agrees to substantially complete the entire work by August 24, 2020. Notice to Proceed anticipated by or before May 14, 2020. Work can start approx. June 12, 2020. Subject to the last scheduled day of classes.
Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda: ______
A. BASE BID
To furnish labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to properly complete the work required per BASE BID for the Façade Renovations and Repairs at Southern High School in strict accordance with the aforesaid documents for the following sum:
______(Dollars $ ______). (Written) (Figures)
Above prices to include all labor, materials, overhead, profit, insurance, etc., to cover the finished work required.
______Standard Form of Proposal Sign for Identification 00 20 00-1 *Insert corporation, partnership or individual as applicable. B. ALTERNATES
1. Alternate No. 1 – Parking Lot Seal Coat
______(Dollars $ ______) (Written) (Figures)
2. Alternate No. 2 – Logo Emblem Relocation
______(Dollars $ ______) (Written) (Figures)
Above prices to include all labor, materials, overhead, profit, insurance, etc., to cover the finished work required.
C. UNIT PRICES
Should the undersigned be required to perform work over and above that required by Contract Documents, he will be paid an extra, or shall credit the Owner, as the case may be, on the basis of unit prices quoted herein. Prices quoted shall be the same for “extra” work and for “credit” work and shall be the sum total compensation payable or creditable for such items of work.
Nature of Work Unit Price
1. Unit Price No. 1 – Gypsum Board & Painting; __ sq. ft. $______per sq. ft.
2. Unit Price No. 2 – Re-pointing of Existing Masonry; 10 sq. ft. $______per sq. ft.
3. Unit Price No. 3 – VCT Tile; 1 sq. ft. $______per sq. ft.
4. Unit Price No. 4 - Carpet; 1 sq. yd. $______per sq. yd.
5. Unit Price No. 5 - Base; 1 lin. ft. $______per lin. ft.
6. Unit Price No. 6 – Ceiling Tile & Grid; 1 sq. ft. $______per sq. ft.
7. Unit Price No. 7 – Additional Electrical Outlet;__ ea. $______per each
8. Unit Price No. 8 – Additional Data Jack; __ ea. $______per each
D. SUBCONTRACTORS
The undersigned proposed to use the following subcontractors for the trades indicated. The Owner reserves for right to reject a subcontractor who in its opinion has inadequate experience or has a history of poor performance in the trade, or who is financially unable to properly execute this project. All subcontractors shall have a pre-qualification form on file with the Garrett County Board of Education or
______Standard Form of Proposal Sign for Identification 00 20 00-2 *Insert corporation, partnership or individual as applicable. shall be submitted at the time of bid if listed as a subcontractor. The General Contractor will be prudent to list only those subcontractors that meet the criteria because no extra cost will be paid for changing to a responsible subcontractor. Subcontractors whose portions of work are $100,000 or more shall provide Performance/Payment Bond for their portion of work in addition to the General Contractor. Before Award of Bids, a complete list of all subcontractors shall be submitted for review and approval by the Owner.
Site Work ______Masonry ______Windows ______Carpentry ______Plumbing ______Electrical ______Roofing (Metal Panel) ______Framing/ Gyp. Bd. ______Flooring ______Painting ______Ceilings ______Security ______
Failure to properly and completely fill in all blanks may be cause for rejection of this proposal.
All alternates and unit prices called for in the Contract Document must be submitted herewith.
Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any informalities in the bidding.
The bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of 60 calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. That if the undersigned by notification of acceptance of this proposal within this time period, the firm shall complete the total work within the time from previously stated from the date established for written “Notice to Proceed”. If this work is not completed within the time period specified, the contractor will be liable for Liquidated Damages of $,0500.00 per calendar day.
Bid Security Bonds shall be submitted with each proposal in the amount of 5% of the total of the Base Bid. Bid Bonds, except those of three low bidders will be returned after the bid opening. Other bid bonds will be returned after the related contract has been executed. If no bid has been accepted within sixty days after the bid opening, then any bond may be returned upon demand of the bidder.
Upon receipt of written notice of the acceptance of this bid, bidder will execute the formal contract within 10 days. The Bid Security attached in the sum of:
($______). is to become the property of the Owner in the event the Contract and Bond are not executed within the time above set forth, as liquidated damages for the delay and additional expense to the Owner caused thereby.
Respectfully submitted,
______Standard Form of Proposal Sign for Identification 00 20 00-3 *Insert corporation, partnership or individual as applicable.
By______(Signature)
______(Title)
______(Business Address)
______(Phone Number) (Fax Number)
(SEAL) If bid is by a corporation.
______(Registered MD Contractor No.) (Place of Issuance) (Date Issued)
*Enclose copy of current license to operate in State of Maryland.
The bidder represents, and it is a precedent to acceptance of this bid, that the bidder has not been a party to any agreement to bid a fixed or uniform price.
______Signature of Officer & Title (SEAL)
SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN to before me, a Notary Public in the State of
______, County of______City of
______this ______day of
______, 20______.
Commission Expires: ______
______Minority Business Enterprise Utilization Affidavit enclosed
______Schedule for Participation of Certified Minority Business Enterprise
______Subcontractor Pre-Qualification forms if not on file with the Garrett County Board of Education
______Bid Bond
______Standard Form of Proposal Sign for Identification 00 20 00-4 *Insert corporation, partnership or individual as applicable. SECTION 00 24 00
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FORM SECTION 00 24 00 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FORM
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF RECEIPT FOR CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR:
GCPS: SOUTHERN HIGH SCHOOL – FAÇADE RENOVATIONS AND REPAIRS
We,______, acknowledge that all drawings that are listed in the specification index has been provided to our firm for bidding purposes. DRAWING INDEX CS -1 Cover Sheet A4.3 Sections Cs-2 Symbols & Abbreviations A4.4 Sections A4.5 Sections CIVIL A4.6 Misc. Details
C0.0 Civil Title Page STRUCTURAL C0.1 List of Symbols & Abbreviations C0.2 Miscellaneous Site Details S0.0 Structural Notes & Key Plan C0.3 Miscellaneous Site Details S1.1 Partial Plans & Details C0.4 Miscellaneous Site Details S4.0 Typical Sections C0.5 Miscellaneous Site Details S5.0 Typical Details C1.0 Existing Site / Demo Plan S5.1 Typical Details C2.0 Proposed Site Plan C2.1 Proposed Paving Plan C3.0 Proposed Grading Plan HVAC C4.0 Sediment and Erosion Control Plan H1.0 HVAC Cover Sheet C4.1 Sediment and Erosion Control Details H1.1 Partial First Floor Plan – HVAC Demo C4.2 Sediment and Erosion Control Details H1.2 Partial Second Floor Plan – HVAC Demo C5.0 Proposed Micro Bio-Retention Area MB#1 H2.1 Partial First Floor Plan – HVAC New Work C5.1 Bio Retention Area Specifications H2.2 Partial Second Floor Plan – HVAC New Work C6.0 Proposed Utility Profiles PLUMBING ARCHITECTURAL P1.1 Partial First Floor Plan – Plumbing Demo D1.1 Demo First Floor Plan P2.1 Partial First Floor Plan – Plumbing New Work D1.2 Demo Second Floor Plan D3.1 Demo Elevations ELECTRICAL D4.1 Demo Wall Sections A1.1 Partial First Floor Plan E0.1 Electrical Cover Sheet A1.2 Enlarged Floor Plans E0.2 Electrical Specifications A1.3 Partial Second Floor Plan E1.1 Partial First Floor Plan - Electrical Demo A2.1 Door Schedule E1.2 Partial Second Floor Plan - Electrical A2.2 Door & Window Details Demo A3.1 Building Elevations E2.1 Partial First Floor Plan - Electrical New Work A3.2 Building Elevations E2.2 Partial Second Floor Plan – Electrical New A4.1 Wall Sections Work A4.2 Wall Sections
______Contractor
______Name Title
______Signature Acknowledgement Form 00 24 00 - 1 SECTION 00 25 00
AIA DOCUMENT A305 CONTRACTOR’S QUALIFICATION FORM
SECTION 00 30 00
AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS TO THE CONTRACT
SECTION 00 35 00
SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS TO A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION 00 35 00 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AIA Document A201-2017
PART 1 – DESCRIPTION
1.1 Description A. The "Supplemental Conditions to the General Conditions" contain changes and additions to the "General Conditions". Where no part of the General Conditions is modified as bound by the Supplemental Conditions, the unaltered provisions shall remain in effect.
PART 2 – ARTICLES
2.1 TABLE of ARTICLES ( GENERAL CONDITIONS) A. Articles in General Conditions: Article 1 through 15 (See AIA Document A201-2017).
2.2 ARTICLES - AMENDED IN SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Specifications & Execution & Interpretation B. Contractor C. Administration of the Contract D. Changes in the Work E. Time F. Payments and Completion G. Insurance and Bonds H. Uncovering and Correction of Work
PART 3 – AMENDMENTS
3.1 ARTICLE 1 of GENERAL CONDITIONS: GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Paragraph 1.1.6 (The Specifications) – Modify by Adding to the end of the paragraph: 1. “ related services”…including performing all operations in connection with the fabrication and installation of all items, complete, as shown on the drawings and/or specified, subject to the GENERAL CONDITIONS and SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS (if any) and terms of the CONTRACT. Where SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS or SPECIAL CONDITIONS conflict with GENERAL CONDITIONS, the former shall govern. B. Paragraph 1.1.6 (The Specifications) – ADD the following subparagraphs: 1. 1.1.6.1 For convenience of reference and to facilitate letter of subcontracts, specifications are separated into titled sections: such separation shall not, however, make the Architect an arbiter to establish limits to the contracts between General Contractor and Subcontractors. 2. 1.1.6.2 The General Contractor only shall be recognized as a part of this Contract and it shall be his responsibility to turn over to the Owner a project complete in all respects and in accordance with Contract Documents.
Supplemental General Conditions 00 35 00-1 3. 1.1.6.3 The General Contractor shall be solely responsible for segregation of the work of various trades. 4. 1.1.6.4 The specifications are written in the form of a directive to the General Contractor, using imperative statements. 5. 1.1.6.7 For brevity and to avoid repetition, such phrases as “The Contractor shall” are intentionally omitted; omitted words or phrases shall be supplied in inference. 6. 1.1.6.8 Insert “conform to” before each reference to a standard specification number (such as ASTM); see Section 03 30 00. C. Paragraph 1.1.9 (Terminology) – ADD the following paragraph and subparagraphs: 1. 1.1.9 Terminology – For the basis of this specification, the following vocabulary shall have the following interpretations as noted. a. 1.1.9.1 “Provide” means "furnish and install". b. 1.1.9.2 “Exposed” means “Showing in any or all parts at completion of work under this Contract”. c. 1.1.9.3 “Where shown”, “As shown", or “Where Indicated” refers to the drawings, details and schedules. d. 1.1.9.4 “Approval”, “Approved”, “Selected”, “Directed” and “Authorized” means by the Architect unless otherwise specified. e. 1.1.9.5 “Excludes” (Headings under SCOPE) means “from this section only”. D. Paragraph 1.2: Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents: ADD the following paragraphs: 1. 1.2.4 The Drawings and Specifications are intended to be used as a complete set. Any Work shown on any of the Drawings or Specifications is intended to be installed complete and operational, unless specifically noted otherwise. 2. 1.2.5 The Contractor shall abide by and comply with the true intent of the Contract Documents and shall not take advantage of any unintentional error or omission but shall fully complete every part as the true intent and meaning of the Work as described in the Contract Documents. 3. 1.2.6 The Contract Document shall be given precedence in the following order in resolving errors, discrepancies or ambiguities: Change Orders, Addenda, Supplemental General Conditions, General Conditions, Specifications and Drawings. E. Paragraph 1.4 Interpretation: ADD the following paragraphs: 1. 1.4.1 Adhere to dimensions though differing from scale measurements; in the absence of dimensions or in case of doubt as to the proper measurements, consult Architect. 2. 1.4.2 Detailed drawings take precedence over those of small scale and specifications take precedence over drawings. 3. 1.4.3 In the event of conflict or inconsistency within the drawings or details, within the specifications, or between drawings and specifications, Architect's decision as to intent of the Contract Documents shall be final. 4. 1.4.4 If conflict or inconsistency is called to the Architect's attention ten (10) days or more before bids are due, correction or clarification will be made by Addendum. 5. 1.4.5 Decisions shall, however, not make the Architect an arbiter to establish responsibilities of Subcontractors to the Contractor(s). 6. 1.4.6 Anything shown on the drawings and not mentioned in the Specifications or vice versa, shall have the same effect as if shown or mentioned in both. 7. 1.4.7 Notify Architect of discrepancies before materials are fabricated or work performed. 8. 1.4.8 Make plural and complete, that work which has been shown singularly or partially indicated, for the purpose of avoiding needless repetition.
Supplemental General Conditions 00 35 00-2 9. 1.4.9 Provide such work and materials as may be necessary for proper and suitable base or support for work shown or specified, whether or not specifically mentioned in specifications or shown on drawings.
3.2 Amendment to Article 3 of the General Conditions: CONTRACTOR A. Paragraph 3.10.4: Contractor’s Construction Schedules - ADD the following: 1. 3.10.4 Acceptance of the construction schedule by the Owner and Architect is advisory only and shall not relieve the Contractor of their responsibility for accomplishing the Work within the specified Contract Time. Errors or omissions in the construction schedule shall not excuse the Contractor for performance less than that required by the Contract. Acceptance by the Owner and Architect shall in no way make the Architect or Owner an insurer of the construction schedule’s success, or liable for any time or cost overruns associated with it. The Owner hereby disclaims any obligation or liability for the construction schedule by reason of acceptance by its agents or representatives. B. Paragraph 3.11: Documents and Samples at the Site - ADD the following: 1. 3.11.1 The Contractor shall show in red ink on a complete set of blue line prints, all changes from original plans made during installation of the work. 2. 3.11.2 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain as-built drawings from mechanical, electrical and any other Subcontractor during the progress of the Work and ensure that they indicate the correct location of piping, major conduits and equipment, the location of all valves, switches, panels, etc. and any other information of a pertinent or useful nature. 3. 3.11.3 All notations shall be made in a neat and legible manner, with any additional explanatory drawings or sketches necessary. During the course of construction, the as-built drawings shall be maintained in the Contractor’s trailer. 4. 3.11.4 At the completion of Work, the Contractor shall submit one set of red-lined prints to the Architect showing all notations of changes from original drawings made during installation of the Work. This submission shall form the record as-built drawings.
3.3 Amendment to Article 4 of the General Conditions: ARCHITECT A. Paragraph 4.2.6: Administration of the Contract - DELETE this paragraph in its entirety and substitute the following: to Architect’s Administration of the Contract: 1. 4.2.6 The Owner and Architect will have authority to reject Work which does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Owner or Architect considers it necessary or advisable for the implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, the Owner or Architect will have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections 13.4.2.4 and 13.4.3, whether or not such Work be then fabricated, installed, or completed. However, neither this authority of the Owner or Architect nor any decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to any duty or responsibility of the Owner or Architect to the Contractor, any Subcontractor, any of their agents or employees, or any other person performing any of the Work.
3.4 Amendment to Article 7 of General Conditions: CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Add Paragraph 7.1.4: General – Add the following subparagraphs: 1. 7.1.4 Only the Owner shall authorize and approve the change. The change will be issued in the form of a written "Change Order Form", signed by the Owner and the Contractor, which authorizes the change in the work, indicates the mutually agreed
Supplemental General Conditions 00 35 00-3 upon price which shall be added or deducted from the contract price, and the extent to which the contract time shall be increased or decreased. 2. 7.1.4.1 The Contractor shall furnish in duplicate to the Owner and the Architect a fully itemized breakdown of the quantities and prices used in computing the value of any change that might be requested. All written requests for a change in the work must include the full explanation and justification for the change regardless of its nature. For all work to be performed by a Subcontractor, the Contractor shall furnish the Subcontractor's itemized proposal which shall contain original signature by an authorized representative of the subcontracting firm. If requested by the Owner or Architect, proposals from suppliers or other supporting data to substantiate the Contractor's or the Subcontractor's cost shall be furnished. All proposals and breakdowns shall be submitted promptly. B. Paragraph 7.2.2: Change Orders – Add the following paragraph and subparagraphs: 1. 7.2.2 When changes, alterations, deductions or additions are so ordered, the value of such work will be determined in the following ways: a. 7.2.2.1 When unit prices are stated in the contract or have been subsequently agreed upon, by application of these units’ prices. b. 7.2.2.2 A lump sum price agreed to by both the Owner and the Contractor. c. 7.2.2.3 If job conditions or the extent of the change prohibit the use of either 7.2.2.1 or 7.2.2.2 a price arrived at by performing the work on a cost plus not to exceed basis. d. 7.2.2.4 If a change involves merely a credit, the contract price will be reduced by the amount it would have cost the Contractor if the omitted item or work had not been eliminated; including overhead and profit, however, the Contractor and the Subcontractor will be allowed to retain a sum not in excess of one percent (1%) for handling. e. 7.2.2.5 If a change involves both an extra and a credit, both sums shall be shown and the two sums balanced to determine the adjusted total cost or credit. No allowance to the Contractor shall be made or allowed for loss of anticipated profits on account of any changes in the work. f. 7.2.2.6 Unless otherwise specified, the allowable mark-up for combined overhead and profit for work performed by the Contractor with his own forces will be based on the monetary value of the work in accordance with the following schedule: Value of Work Combined Overhead and Profit $0 - $10,000 10 % $10,001 and over Negotiated, x ≤ 8 % g. 7.2.2.7 For work performed by a Subcontractor with his own organization the percentages for combined overhead and profit will be as outlined in 7.2.2.6. h. 7.2.2.8 On work partly or solely performed by a Subcontractor or on materials supplied by a supplier or middleman, the Contractor will be allowed five percent (5%) of the total cost of the Subcontractor's or supplier’s labor and material only. No markup shall be allowed on Subcontractors or supplier’s overhead and profit, taxes, equipment rental or other similar non- labor, non-material items. 2. 7.2.3. When the Contractor and the Owner shall fail to agree upon a lump sum price or method as outlined in 7.2.2. the Owner shall have the right to issue an order for the work to be accomplished on a time and material basis and a correct account shall be kept by the Contractor and approved by the Owner and/or the Architect of the actual cost of all labor and materials as directed by the Owner, and/or the Architect to which shall be added percentage allowances for overhead and profit as stated in Paragraph 7.2.2.6. Receipted invoices shall be submitted to the Owner to validate the cost of all
Supplemental General Conditions 00 35 00-4 shop fabricated material and cost of all other materials supplied. Certified payrolls shall be submitted for labor costs. 3. 7.2.5 On all work as defined in Article 1.2, no Contractor will be allowed any expenses, overhead or profit for employment of another Subcontractor to perform work for him. 4. 7.2.6 Further on work covered by Change Order the Contractor will be reimbursed for his expenditures for Workmen's Compensation insurance, Social Security Taxes and Unemployment compensation covering men actually engaged upon the work and the actual increased cost of bond without any percentage added. 5. 7.2.6 The cost of foremen and superintendents may be added only when the Change Order makes necessary the hiring of additional supervisory personnel or makes their employment for time additional to that required by the basic contract. 6. 7.2.7 The Contractor shall be allowed the actual cost for rental or machine power tools or special equipment, including fuel and lubricants which are necessary to execute the work required on the change, but no percentages shall be added to this cost. The rental rate is to be agreed upon by the Owner and the Contractor; the rate generally to be the latest as filed by the Associated Equipment Distributors. 7. 7.2.8 If the Contractor and the Owner cannot agree as to the extent that the contract time shall be increased for extra work or the extent the contract time shall be reduced for work omitted by the Owner, the increase or decrease, as the case may be, shall be in the same proportion of the original contract as the cost of the additional work; including overhead and profit or the amount of the omitted work; including overhead. 8. 7.2.9 No order for change at any time or place shall in any manner or to any extent relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations under the contract. C. Paragraph 7.4: Minor Changes in the Work: MODIFY and AMPLIFY the following to: 1. 7.4 The Architect with the concurrence from the Owner shall have authority to make minor changes in the work not involving extra cost or extensions of contract time, and not inconsistent with the intent of the contract documents. Such minor changes will be effected by written order signed by the Architect and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. Otherwise, except in any emergency endangering life or property, no extra work or change shall be made unless a written order from the Owner and/or the Architect has been received by the Contractor. No claim for addition to the contract sum or time of completion shall be valid unless so ordered.
3.5 Amendment to Article 8 of General Conditions: TIME: A. Paragraph 8: Delete Paragraph 8.3.1 Delays and Extension of Time in its entirety and substitute the following: 1. Article 8.3: “Delays and Extensions of Time: a. 8.3.1 It is hereby understood and mutually agreed, by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and the time for completion as specified in the Contract of the work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract. It is intended that the work shall commence within ten (10) days immediately after the date of Notice to Proceed and that the entire work shall be substantially complete so that the Owner may occupy the work or designated portion thereof for the use for which it is intended. b. 8.3.1.1 Requests for extensions of completion time will be reviewed by the Owner, after written application is made for a time extension to the Architect. Any request for an extension of time is to be made immediately upon occurrence of conditions which in the opinion of the Contractor warrant such an extension with reasons clearly stated and detailed proof given for all delays beyond the Contractor's control, these to be made in writing to the Architect.
Supplemental General Conditions 00 35 00-5 No time extension will be allowed except after written concurrence of the Architect and formal approval thereof by Owner.” c. 8.3.1.2 Final Completion shall be defined as ‘completed in every respect’ as follows: 1) After the Contractor notifies the Architect in writing that work is ready for final inspection, and; 2) A “punch list” of deficiencies is prepared at the time of the final inspection, and; 3) Items on the “punch list” have been corrected by the Contractor and their correction verified by the Architect, and; 4) The Owner & Architect agreed work as required has been performed. 2. Add the following paragraphs to Article 8 a. 8.3.4. If required, in order to complete the work in the specified time, such necessary work shall be done after regular working hours or on holidays without additional cost to the Owner. If, for any reason a bidding Contractor believes that the contract cannot be completed within the specified time, he shall notify the Architect in writing before submitting his bid, and state the total number of calendar days that he believes will be required to complete the contract. Upon receipt of such notice, the Architect may issue an addendum to the specifications revising the time allow for complete of the contract. If no such addendum is issued, it is expressly understood and agreed, by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. b. 8.3.5. If the Contractor shall neglect, fail or refuse to complete the work within the time herein specified, or any proper extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does hereby agree, as part consideration for the awarding of this contract, to pay to the Owner $XXX.00 (amount as stated on the Proposal Form) per calendar day, not as a penalty but as liquidated damages for such breach of contract as hereinafter set forth, for each and every calendar day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated in the contract for completing the work. The said amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because of the impracticability and extreme difficulty of fixing and ascertaining the actual damages the Owner would in such event sustain, and said amount is agreed to be the amount of damages which the Owner would sustain. c. 8.3.5 It is further agreed that where under the contract, an additional time is allowed for the completion of any work, the new time limit fixed by such extension shall be of the essence of this contract; provided, that the Contractor shall not be charged with liquidated damages when the Owner. Determines that the Contractor is without fault and the Contractor’s reasons for the time extensions are acceptable to the Owner; provided, further, that the Contractor shall not be charged with liquidated damages when the delay in completion of the work is due: 1) To any preference, priority or allocation order duly issued by the Government. 2) To unforeseeable cause beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, including but not restricted to changes ordered in the work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in transportation, unavoidable casualties or any cause beyond the Contractor’s control, or by delay authorized by the Owner pending determination, or by any other cause which the Architect (with the Owner’s approval) determines may justify the delay.
Supplemental General Conditions 00 35 00-6 3.6 Amendment to Article 9 of General Conditions: PAYMENTS & COMPLETION A. Paragraph 9.6.1: DELETE this paragraph in its entirety and substitute with the following for Progress Payments: 1. “9.6.1 The Owner shall make progress payments to the Contractor on the basis of a duly certified and approved Application for Payment for Work performed during the preceding calendar month and the Owner shall retain five percent (5%) or the amount as allowed by regulation of the amount of each application until final completion and acceptance of all Work covered by this Contract. The Owner may, however, at any time after seventy percent (70%) of the Work has been completed, make part or all of the remaining progress payments at a lesser percentage or in full if the Owner is satisfied with the quality and progress of the Work. Such action on the part of the Owner to reduce the retainage is strictly voluntary and at the sole discretion of the Owner.”
3.7 Amendment to Article 11 of General Conditions: INSURANCE AND BONDS: A. Paragraph 11.1.1 ADD the following Paragraphs – 11.1 Contractor’s Insurance and Bonds: 1. 11.1.1.1 Worker’s Compensation, including occupational disease and employer’s liability insurance, disability benefit and other similar employer benefit acts that are applicable to the work being performed in the amount and coverage as required by Maryland Worker’s Compensation law 2. 11.1.1.2 The limits of liability for the Commercial General Liability insurance including coverage for direct operations, sublet work, elevators, personnel injury, contractual liability and completed operations with limits not less than: a. Bodily Injury and Personal Injury: 1) $1,000,000 each occurrence 2) $1,000,000 aggregate completed operation, products. b. Property Damage 1) $1,000,000 Each Occurrence 2) $1,000,000 Aggregate Operations 3) $1,000,000 Aggregate Independent Contractor Protective Liability 4) $1,000,000 Aggregate Owner's Protective Liability 5) $1,000,000 Aggregate Complete Operations Products 6) $1,000,000 Aggregate Contractual c. The Owner shall be listed as additional insurer. Regarding property damages, included broad form property damage, remove “XCU” exclusions (explosion, collapse, underground property damage), regarding completed operations liability, continue coverage in force for one (1) year after completion of the Work. 3. 11.1.1.3 Comprehensive automobile liability insurance shall be acquired by the Contractor and maintained throughout the term of this contract, to cover owned automobiles, automobiles under long term lease, hired automobiles, employers non- Ownership liability, medical payments and uninsured motorists. The limits of liability shall be no less than: $1,000,000.00 per accident per occurrence for bodily injury and property damage. 4. 11.1.1.4 Umbrella excess liability insurance shall be provided with a minimum limit of liability of three million dollars ($3,000,000) per occurrence which shall be in excess of the primary limits of insurance as required above. 5. 11.1.1.5 Each insurance policy shall contain a clause to the effect that no modification or change in the policy will be made, nor will such policy be canceled or non-renewed or expired without thirty (30) days written notice, as evidenced by return receipt of registered or certified mail (letter) to the Owner.
Supplemental General Conditions 00 35 00-7 6. 11.1.1.6 If any of these policies are written on a “claims made” form, the “extended reporting endorsement” or ‘tail’ must be purchased with a copy of the endorsement provided to the Owner. 7. 11.1.1.7 Liability insurance may be arranged by Commercial General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability policies for the full limits required, or by a combination of underlying Liability policies for lesser limits with the remaining limits provided by an Excess or Umbrella Liability Policy.
B. Paragraph 11.2 - Owner’s Insurance: ADD the following paragraph 11.2.1.1 Builder's risk and Owner protective liability naming the Owner, Architect, and General Contractor, will be purchased by the Owner.
3.8 Amendments to Article 12: UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK A. Paragraph 12.2.1.1 – Correction of Work: Before or After Substantial Completion - MODIFY and AMPLIFY this subparagraph by ADDING the following: 1. 12.2.1.1 The Contractor further warrants all Work shown on Contract Documents, with any approved modifications as follows: a. Against faulty or imperfect material or workmanship; b. That the Work shall be entirely watertight and leak proof; c. That the mechanical and electrical machines, devices, and equipment shall operate satisfactorily with ordinary care; and shall perform their specified and intended functions; and d. Against damage or undue deterioration resulting from normal use of the building. e. If at any time deficiencies in the Work are discovered which result from a deliberate attempt to defraud the Owner, the Contractor will be held liable for replacement or correction, regardless of the time limit on the guarantee.
3.9 Amendments to Article 15: Claims and Disputes: A. Paragraph 15.1.3.1: Notice of Claims - ADD the following after the last sentence: “An additional claim made after the initial claim has been implemented by Change Order will not be considered.”
END OF SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
Supplemental General Conditions 00 35 00-8 SECTION 00 37 50
MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE FORMS
TO BE UPDATED WHEN PROVIDED BY GCPS
MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE PROCEDURES FOR STATE FUNDED PUBLIC SCHOOL CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS Revised JUNE 2008
Approved by the Garrett County Board of Education in August 2008. (Date)
These procedures supersede the latest procedures which were previously approved prior to August 2008. (Date)
These procedures were approved by the Interagency Committee on School Construction on June 26, 2008 and shall be utilized by each public school system in Maryland as a condition for the receipt of State funds through the Public School Construction Program.
The effective date for implementation for projects in Garrett County is September 1, 2008.
MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE PROCEDURES FOR STATE FUNDED PUBLIC SCHOOL CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT HEADING PAGE
BACKGROUND 1 OVERVIEW 1
1.0 PURPOSE 1 2.0 EFFECTIVE DATE 2 3.0 DEFINITIONS 2 4.0 MBE GOAL SETTING PROCEDURES 4 5.0 IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURES - $50,000 OR LESS 5 6.0 IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURES - OVER $50,000 6 1. ADVERTISEMENTS, SOLICITATIONS AND SOLICITATION DOCUMENTS 6 2. OTHER ADVERTISEMENT AND OUTREACH REQUIREMENTS 7 3. ALL SOLICITATION DOCUMENTS SHALL INCLUDE 7 4. WAIVER PROCEDURES 9 5. ALL CONTRACTS SHALL INCLUDE 10 6. PROJECTS UTILIZING A CONSTRUCTION MANAGER DELIVERY METHOD 12 7. PROJECTS UTILIZING AN INDEFINITE DELIVERY/INDEFINITE QUANTITY (IDIQ) OR JOB ORDER CONTRACT (JOC) DELIVERY METHOD 13 8. PROJECTS UTILIZING THE DESIGN/BUILD DELIVERY METHOD 13 7.0 RECORDS AND REPORTS 14 8.0 MONITORING 15 9.0 MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE LIAISON 16
ATTACHMENTS
ATTACHMENT A - CERTIFIED MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE UTILIZATION AND FAIR SOLICITATION AFFIDAVIT A-1 ATTACHMENT B - MBE PARTICIPATION SCHEDULE B-1 ATTACHMENT C - OUTREACH EFFORTS COMPLIANCE STATEMENT C-1 ATTACHMENT D - MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISES SUBCONTRACTOR PROJECT PARTICIPATION STATEMENT D-1 ATTACHMENT E - MINORITY SUBCONTRACTOR UNAVAILABILITY CERTIFICATE E-1 ATTACHMENT F - MBE WAIVER DOCUMENTATION F-1 ATTACHMENT G - STANDARD MONTHLY CONTRACTOR’S REQUISITION FOR PAYMENT (IAC/PSCP FORM 306.4, PAGE 3 OF 16) G-1 ATTACHMENT H - CLOSE-OUT COST SUMMARY (IAC/PSCP FORM 306.6) H-1
MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE PROCEDURES FOR STATE FUNDED PUBLIC SCHOOL CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS
BACKGROUND
In 1978, the Maryland General Assembly passed legislation, which was signed into law to establish the State’s Minority Business Enterprise Program. This new law set as a goal that at least 10 percent of each unit of State government’s total dollar value of procurement contracts for purchases and/or contracts be awarded to minority business enterprises. This law was subsequently modified and the goal was increased to 14 percent. More recently, in 2001, the goal was increased to 25 percent with subcontracting sub-goals of 7 percent for certified African American-owned businesses and 10 percent for certified women-owned businesses.
In 1979, the Rules, Regulations, and Procedures for the Administration of the School Construction Program were revised by the Board of Public Works to require each local board of education to adopt procedures to attempt to include minority business enterprises in State funded school construction projects. The State law was revised and now states: “The Interagency Committee on School Construction (IAC) shall require each local board of education to adopt procedures consistent with this chapter before obtaining funds for public school construction projects”.
In May 2007, the Rules, Regulations, and Procedures were replaced by regulations. The regulations concerning project procurement (COMAR 23.03.03) indicate that the State’s minority business enterprise goals and procedures apply to all State funded projects, irrespective of procurement method.
OVERVIEW
This Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) procedure document was originally developed in response to a requirement set forth in the Rules, Regulations, and Procedures for the Administration of the School Construction Program. The MBE requirement was originally established under HB 64, which was passed in the 1978 session of the Maryland General Assembly and signed into law as Chapter 575 of the Acts of 1978.
Since the Board adopted its original Minority Business Enterprise Procedures, there have been changes in State statutes, regulations adopted by the Board of Public Works, procedural requirements, project eligibility requirements and the level of State participation in school construction projects. This revised procedure is consistent with current legislation and the changes to the Code of Maryland Regulations (COMAR) requirements, effective November 7, 2005 and May 21, 2007.
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of the Procedures is to fulfill the intent of the law by setting goals for minority business enterprise participation in every contract that includes State funding through the Public School Construction Program. Local Educational Agencies (LEAs) shall attempt to achieve the result that a minimum of 25 percent of the total dollar value of all construction contracts is made directly or indirectly with certified minority business enterprises when State Public School Construction Program (PSCP) funds are utilized, with a minimum of 7 percent from certified African American-owned businesses, a minimum of 10 percent from certified women-owned businesses, and the balance from any certified minority business enterprises. All general contractors, including certified MBE firms, when bidding as general or prime contractors are required to attempt to achieve the MBE subcontracting goals from certified MBE firms.
1 2.0 EFFECTIVE DATE
These procedures have been adopted for use in Garrett County and supersede previously utilized MBE procedures, and will take effect on or after September 1, 2018.
3.0 DEFINITIONS
1. Certification means the determination that a legal entity is a minority business enterprise consistent with the intent of Subtitle 3 of the State Finance and Procurement Article.
2. Certified Minority Business Enterprise means a minority business that holds a certification issued by the Maryland State Department of Transportation (MDOT).
3. Corporation , as defined by MDOT, is an artificial person or legal entity created by or under the authority of the laws of any state of the United States, the District of Columbia or a territory or commonwealth of the United States and formed for the purpose of transacting business in the widest sense of that term, including not only trade and commerce, but also manufacturing, mining, banking, insurance, transportation and other forms of commercial or industry activity where the purpose of the organization is profit. For eligibility for certification, disadvantaged and/or minority individuals must own at least 51 percent of the voting stock and at least 51 percent of the aggregate of all classes of stock that have been issued by the corporation. (Note: stock held in trust is not considered as stock held by the disadvantaged businesspersons when computing the business person(s) ownership.)
4. Managerial Control , as defined by MDOT, means that a disadvantaged or minority owner(s) has the demonstrable ability to make independent and unilateral business decisions needed to guide the future and destiny of a business.
Control may be demonstrated in many ways. For a minority owner to demonstrate control, the following examples are put forth, but are not intended to be all inclusive:
a. Articles of Incorporation, Corporate Bylaws, Partnership Agreements and other agreements shall be free of restrictive language which would dilute the minority owner’s control thereby preventing the minority owner from making those decisions which affect the destiny of a business; b. The minority owner shall be able to show clearly through production of documents the areas of the disadvantaged business owner’s control, such as, but not limited to:
1) Authority to sign payroll checks and letters of credit; 2) Authority to negotiate and sign for insurance and/or bonds; 3) Authority to negotiate for banking services, such as establishing lines of credit; and 4) Authority to negotiate and sign for contracts.
c. Agreements for support services that do not lessen the minority owner’s control of the company are permitted as long as the disadvantaged or minority business owner’s authority to manage the company is not restricted or impaired.
5. Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) means any legal entity, except a joint venture, that is (a) organized to engage in commercial transactions, and (b) at least 51 percent owned and controlled by one or more individuals who are socially and economically disadvantaged including:
African Americans; American Indian/Native Americans; Asians;
2 Hispanics; Physically or mentally disabled individuals; Women; or A non-profit entity organized to promote the interests of physically or mentally disabled individuals.
6. Minority Business Enterprise Liaison means the employee of the school system designated to administer the Minority Business Enterprise Procedures for State funded public school construction projects.
7. Operational Control , as defined by MDOT, means that the disadvantaged or minority owner(s) must possess knowledge necessary to evaluate technical aspects of the business entity. The primary consideration in determining operational control and the extent to which the disadvantaged or minority owner(s) actually operates a business will rest upon the specialties of the industry of which the business is a part. The minority owner should have a working knowledge of the technical requirements needed to operate in his/her industry. Specifically, in the construction industry and especially among small (one to five person firms) contractors, it is reasonable to expect the disadvantaged or minority owner(s) to be knowledgeable of all aspects of the business. Accordingly, in order to clarify the level of operational involvement which a minority owner must have in a business for it to be considered eligible, the following examples are put forth, but are not intended to be all inclusive:
a. The minority owner should have experience in the industry for which certification is being sought; and b. The minority owner should demonstrate that basic decisions pertaining to the daily operations of the business are independently made. This does not necessarily preclude the disadvantaged or minority owner(s) from seeking paid or unpaid advice and assistance. It does mean that the minority owner currently must possess the knowledge to weigh all advice given and to make an independent determination.
8. Ownership , as defined by MDOT, means that:
a. The minority owner(s) of the firm shall not be subject to any formal or informal restrictions, which limit the customary discretion of the owner(s). There shall be no restrictions through, for example, charter requirements, by-law provisions, partnership agreements, franchise or distributor agreements or any other agreements that prevent the minority owner(s), without the cooperation or vote of any non-minority, from making a business decision of the firm. b. This means that the disadvantaged or minority persons, in order to acquire their ownership interests in the firm, have made real and substantial contributions of capital, expertise or other tangible personal assets derived from independently owned holdings without benefit of a transfer of assets, gift or inheritance from non-minority persons. Examples of insufficient contributions include a promise to contribute capital, a note payable to the firm or its owners who are not minority persons or the mere participation as an employee rather than as a manager. If the ownership interest held by a disadvantaged or minority person is subject to formal or informal restrictions, such as options, security interests, agreements, etc., held by a non-minority person or business entity, the options, security interests, agreements, etc., held by the non-minority person or business entity must not significantly impair the disadvantaged or minority person’s ownership interest.
9. Partnership means an unincorporated association of two or more persons to carry on as co- owners of a business for profit. For a partnership to be deemed eligible for certification under the MDOT Program, the disadvantaged or minority person’s interest must be at least 51 percent of the partnership capital.
3
10. Socially and Economically Disadvantaged means a citizen or lawfully admitted permanent resident of the United States who is socially disadvantaged and economically disadvantaged. The law establishes the level of personal net worth at $1,500,000, above which an individual may not be found to be socially and economically disadvantaged.
11. Sole Proprietorship , as defined by MDOT, is a for-profit business owned and operated by a disadvantaged or minority person in his or her individual capacity. For a sole proprietorship to be deemed eligible for certification under the DBE/MBE Program, the disadvantaged or minority person must be the sole proprietor.
4.0 MBE GOAL SETTING PROCEDURES
1. The MBE program requires that all race-neutral measures be considered before making use of race-based measures. Using a combination of race-neutral and race-based measures for each specific school construction project will help ensure that certified MBE firms are afforded the opportunity to submit bids and be utilized to the greatest extent possible.
2. Race-neutral measures include any action taken by the LEA to make it easier for all contractors, including MBEs, to compete successfully for public school construction project contracts.
3. Race-based measures include setting an overall MBE goal and MBE subgoals, if applicable, based upon race, gender, ethnicity, etc., for a specific project.
4. The overall MBE goal and the subgoals, if applicable, should be set for each specific project, considering but not limited to, the following factors:
a. The extent to which the work to be performed can reasonably be segmented to allow for MBEs to participate in the project; b. A determination of the number of certified MBEs that potentially could perform the identified work; c. The geographic location of the project in relationship to the identified certified MBEs; d. Information obtained from other State departments/agencies related to establishing a MBE goal and/or subgoals for similar construction projects or work in the jurisdiction; e. Information obtained from other State departments/agencies related to MBE participation in similar construction projects or work in the jurisdiction; and f. Any other activities or information that may be identified as useful and productive.
5. The LEA staff, including the MBE liaison, procurement personnel, and project staff, as well as the project architect and cost estimator should consider the factors cited in 4 above when establishing the MBE goal and subgoals, if applicable, for each project or segmented piece of a project that are reasonable and attainable.
6. It is recognized that by utilizing the factors cited in 4 above, the MBE goal and/or subgoals, if applicable, for a specific project or portion thereof may be significantly higher than the overall goals of the program (25% overall, with 7% from African American-owned businesses and 10% from women-owned businesses). It is also recognized and possible that there will be MBE goals set that are lower than those stated above or even that no MBE goal and/or subgoals will be set for a specific project or the segmented piece of the project.
7. Assistance in reviewing the factors cited in 4 above and setting a goal and/or subgoals, if applicable, for specific projects or a segmented piece of a project can be obtained by contacting the Public School Construction Program and/or the Governor’s Office of Minority Affairs.
4
8. The basis and rationale for establishing the MBE goal and subgoals, if applicable, should be summarized and recorded and submitted in written form to the PSCP for review at the same time that the Construction Documents are submitted to the State for review.
9. For those projects that do not require a Construction Document submission and are over $50,000, the basis and rationale for establishing the MBE goal and subgoals, if applicable, should be summarized and recorded and submitted in written form to the PSCP for review at the same time that the project is released for bids or proposals are solicited.
5.0 IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURES - $50,000 OR LESS
For construction projects estimated to cost $50,000 or less, the following procedures will be utilized
1. A MBE goal and/or MBE subgoals are not required to be set for contracts that are anticipated to be for $50,000 or less.
2. All advertisements, solicitations, and solicitation documents shall include the following statement:
a. "Certified Minority Business Enterprises are encouraged to respond to this solicitation."
3. To encourage greater MBE participation the staff of the school system should send out notices of potential projects and a specific project to MBEs to solicit bids or proposals directly from minority business enterprise contractors that are certified.
4. A copy of the solicitation notice, preferably electronically, shall be sent to the Governor’s Office of Minority Affairs at the same time the advertisement for the solicitation is released.
5. When a pre-bid or pre-proposal conference or meeting is held, the MBE liaison or designated representative shall explain that all bidders or offerors are encouraged to utilize certified MBEs for this project or segments of the project.
6. Upon request for a specific project, the school system shall provide one set of drawings and specifications (and addenda when issued) to minority business enterprise associations recognized by the Governor’s Office of Minority Affairs. They will be available free of charge to be picked up at a location designated by the LEA. A review of the bid or proposal activity submitted by an association’s members may be initiated to justify continuation of this service.
7. Minority Business Enterprise forms identified in Section 6.0 of this procedure for projects over $50,000, are not required to be submitted for these projects ($50,000 or less).
8. The names of prime contractors obtaining drawings and specifications will be shared with certified MBEs and MBE associations, upon request.
9. At the time of the contract award, the MBE Liaison or a designated person will record any anticipated certified minority business enterprise participation data made available from the successful contractor.
10. A business that presents itself as a minority business may participate in a project but may not be counted toward MBE participation until it is a certified minority business enterprise. If the MBE is not certified at the time of contract award, it may not be counted at that time. Only the funds paid after MDOT certification can be counted as MBE participation in the project. If
5 a certified MBE fails to meet the standards specified in State Finance and Procurement Article14-301 (G) and (I), Annotated Code of Maryland, the payments made to the MBE can be recorded and counted under a contract entered into when the MBE was eligible and certified. Ineligibility of an MBE to participate in the MBE program may not be the sole cause of the termination of the MBE contractual relationship for the remainder of the term of the contract.
11. The contractor will complete the Standard Monthly Contractor’s Requisition for Payment (IAC/PSCP Form 306.4), specifically page 3 of 16, Minority Business Enterprise Participation, with each requisition submitted for payment. If certified MBE firms are known at the time of contract award their names and other appropriate information should be entered on page 3 of the first and all subsequent requisitions for payment. Any MBEs identified during the life of the project should be added as soon as the contractor engages them.
12. Upon completion of the project the contractor will provide a summary of the total of all funds paid to certified MBE firms. This should be within the contractor’s final requisition for payment.
6.0 IMPLEMENTING PROCEDURES - Over $50,000
For construction projects estimated to cost in excess of $50,000, the following procedures will be utilized:
1. All advertisements, solicitations, and solicitation documents shall include the following statements:
a. "Certified Minority Business Enterprises are encouraged to respond to this solicitation notice." b. "The contractor or supplier who provides materials, supplies, equipment and/or services for this construction project shall attempt to achieve the specific overall MBE goal of ____ percent established for this project. All prime contractors, including certified MBE firms, when submitting bids or proposals as general or prime contractors, are required to attempt to achieve this goal from certified MBE firms.” c. If subgoals have been established for this project then one of the following should be included:
1) “The subgoals established for this project are ____ percent from African American- owned businesses and _____ percent from woman–owned businesses.” 2) “The subgoal established for this project is ____ percent from African American- owned businesses.” 3) “The subgoal established for this project is ____ percent from woman–owned businesses.”
d. "The bidder or offeror is required to submit with its bid or proposal a completed Attachment A - Certified MBE Utilization and Fair Solicitation Affidavit and Attachment B - MBE Participation Schedule, as described in the solicitation documents. e. If there is no overall MBE goal or MBE subgoals established for the project, then only 1.A. above is to be included.
6
2. Other Advertisement and Outreach Requirements
a. To encourage greater MBE participation the staff of the school system should send out notices of potential projects to MBEs or solicit bids or proposals directly from minority business enterprise contractors that are certified. b. A copy of the solicitation notice, preferably electronically, shall be sent to the Governor’s Office of Minority Affairs at the same time the advertisement for the solicitation is released. c. Upon request for a specific project, the school system shall provide one set of drawings and specifications (and addenda when issued) to minority business enterprise associations recognized by the Governor’s Office of Minority Affairs. They will be available free of charge to be picked up at a location designated by the LEA. A review of the bid or proposal activity by an association’s members may be initiated to justify continuation of this service. d. When a pre-bid or pre-proposal conference is held, the MBE Liaison or designated representative shall explain the MBE goal and subgoals, if applicable; the MBE provisions of the solicitation; the documentation required at the time of submission; its relationship to the responsiveness of the bidder or offeror; how to complete the required attachments, particularly A, B, and C; and additional information and supporting documentation that may be required after the bid or proposal opening. All contractors who attend the pre-bid or pre-proposal conference should receive a list or information explaining how to obtain a listing of certified MBE firms who could perform the work or have expressed an interest in performing the school construction work required for the specific project in the jurisdiction. e. The names of prime contractors obtaining drawings and specifications will be shared with certified MBEs and MBE associations, upon request. f. The MBE liaison, in conjunction with the procurement officer or project staff, should respond to all applicable questions and concerns relating to the project’s MBE requirements completely and in a timely fashion to ensure that all potential contractors and subcontractors can compete effectively.
3. All Solicitation Documents Shall Include the Following:
a. “Certified Minority Business Enterprises are encouraged to respond to this solicitation notice”. b. “The contractor or supplier who provides materials, supplies, equipment and/or services for this construction project shall attempt to achieve the result that a minimum of __ percent of the total contract value is with certified Minority Business Enterprises, with a minimum of __ percent from certified African American-owned businesses, a minimum of __ percent from certified women-owned businesses, and the balance from any certified Minority Business Enterprises. All contractors, including certified MBE firms, when submitting bids or proposals as prime contractors, are required to attempt to achieve the MBE goal and subgoals, if applicable, from certified MBEs”. Note: see 6.1.C. above for variations that may be required. c. Each bid or offer submitted, including a submittal from a certified MBE in response to this solicitation, shall be accompanied by a completed Attachment A - Certified MBE Utilization and Fair Solicitation Affidavit and a completed Attachment B - MBE Participation Schedule. These two attachments must be accurate and consistent with each other.
1) Attachment A and Attachment B shall be submitted with the sealed bid price or proposal at a place, date, and time specified in the solicitation document. 2) As an alternative, and at the discretion of the school system, Attachment A could be submitted with the sealed bid price or proposal at a place, date, and time specified in the solicitation document. The sealed bids or proposals received by the time
7 specified could be held, unopened for a maximum of 30 minutes. Within that time (30 minutes) each bidder or offeror must submit Attachment B, in a separate sealed envelope. The sealed price envelopes from each bidder or offeror who submits both the sealed bid or proposal and the envelope with Attachment B will then be opened and reviewed and recorded as a viable submission. Any contractor that fails to submit the second envelope, with Attachment B, prior to the specified time allowed (30 minutes) after the submittal of the sealed bid or proposal will be deemed non- responsive and the sealed bid or proposal will not be opened or considered. d. The submittal of a completed and signed Attachment A - Certified MBE Utilization and Fair Solicitation Affidavit and a completed and signed Attachment B - MBE Participation Schedule indicates the bidder’s or offeror’s recognition and commitment to attempt to achieve the MBE goal and/or MBE subgoals, if applicable, for the specific project.
1) The bidder or offeror recognizes that their efforts made to initiate contact, to solicit, and to include MBE firms in this project will be reviewed carefully and evaluated based upon the actions taken by them prior to and up to 10 days before the bid or proposal opening. Follow-up actions taken by the bidder or offeror within the 10 days prior to the bid opening will also be considered. 2) Based upon this review and evaluation it will be determined, by the MBE liaison, procurement officer, or a designated person, if a good faith effort was made by the apparent low bidder or apparent successful offeror. e. The bidder or offeror must check one of the three boxes on Attachment A, which relates to the level of MBE participation achieved for the project. The bidder’s or offeror’s signature indicates that in the event that they did not meet the MBE goal or subgoals, if applicable, that:
1) They are therefore requesting a waiver, and 2) Documentation of their good faith efforts will be provided to the school system staff within 10 days of being notified that they are the apparent low bidder or apparent successful offeror. f. The bidder or offeror must submit Attachment B (as and when described above), which lists and provides information related to each certified MBE firm that the bidder or offeror will utilize on this project. A completed and accurate Attachment B is required. All of the work specified to be performed by each MBE firm, the contact information, MDOT certification number, minority code, the dollar values, and percentages must be correct. g. Attachment B should be completed and submitted with all calculations utilizing the base bid or offer only. A revised Attachment B should be submitted by the successful bidder or offeror once a determination is made as to the acceptance and/or rejection of any alternates. h. If a request for a waiver has been made, the appropriate box on Attachment A has been checked and the attachment signed, then the LEA should obtain and review the apparent low bidder’s or successful offeror’s supporting documentation of the good faith efforts to justify the granting of the waiver, prior to submitting the contract award for approval to the board of education. i. The following documentation shall be considered as part of the contract, and shall be furnished by the apparent low bidder or successful offeror to the MBE Liaison or designated person, within ten (10) working days from notification that the firm is the apparent low bidder or successful offeror:
1) A completed Attachment D - Minority Business Enterprise Subcontractor Project Participation Statement shall be completed and signed by the prime contractor and each MBE firm listed on Attachment B - MBE Participation Schedule and
8 Attachment C - Outreach Efforts Compliance Statement shall be signed and completed by the bidder or offeror. 2) Notification for purposes of this procedure means the earliest of the following methods of communication: orally in person, orally by telephone, orally by a telephone message, a faxed communication, a letter by date received or an electronic communication. 3) The ten (10) working days do not include the day the notification is received, weekends or holidays (State or Federal), but the material submitted must be received by the close of business on the tenth day. 4) The requirement to submit the above-listed documentation within the time frame specified will be considered by the IAC in its review of the request for contract award for the project. Failure to submit the required documentation within the time frame specified may result in a delay of the approval of the award of the contract, or the materials being returned without the approval of the award of the contract.
4. Waiver Procedures
a. If the apparent low bidder or successful offeror has determined that they are unable to meet the overall MBE goal or subgoals, if applicable, for the project at the time of submission of a bid or offer, they must check either of the two boxes on Attachment A. The signature recognizes and acknowledges that a request for a waiver is being made. The apparent low bidder or successful offeror will therefore be required to submit information and substantiating documentation that will be reviewed to justify the granting of a waiver. b. If the apparent low bidder or successful offeror is unable to achieve the overall MBE contract goal and/or the MBE subgoals, if applicable, from certified African American- owned businesses and/or from certified women-owned businesses, the apparent low bidder or successful offeror shall submit, within 10 working days from notification that the firm is the apparent low bidder or successful offeror, a completed Attachment C - Outreach Efforts Compliance Statement, Attachment E - Minority Subcontractors Unavailability Certificate, and Attachment F - MBE Waiver Documentation which shall include the following:
1) A detailed statement of the efforts made by the bidder or offeror to identify and select portions of the work proposed to be performed by subcontractors in order to increase the likelihood of achieving the stated goal; 2) A detailed statement of the efforts made by the bidder or offeror prior to and up to at least ten (10) days before the bid or proposal opening to solicit minority business enterprises through written notices that describe the categories of work for which subcontracting is being solicited, the type of work to be performed and specific instructions on how to submit a bid or proposal; 3) Follow-up actions taken by the bidder or offeror within the 10 days prior to the bid or proposal opening will also be considered. 4) A detailed statement of the bidder’s or offeror’s efforts to make personal contact with MBE firms identified for item (2) above; 5) A record of the name, address, telephone number and dates contacted for each MBE identified under items (2) and (3) above; 6) A description of the information provided to MBEs regarding the drawings, specifications and the anticipated time schedule for portions of the work to be performed; 7) Information on activities to assist minority business enterprises to fulfill bonding requirements or to obtain a waiver of these requirements; 8) Information on activities to publicize contracting opportunities to minority business enterprises, attendance at pre-bid or pre-proposal meetings or other meetings scheduled by the MBE Liaison or designated representative; and
9 9) As to each MBE that placed a subcontract quotation or offer which the apparent low bidder or successful offeror considers not to be acceptable, a detailed statement of reasons for this conclusion.
c. In addition to any waiver documentation the apparent low bidder or successful offeror shall submit one completed Attachment D - Minority Business Enterprise Subcontractor Project Participation statement for each MBE firm that will participate in the project consistent with the information previously provided at the time of the submission of Attachment B or the revised Attachment B. d. A waiver of an MBE contract goal or subgoal, if applicable, may be granted by the school system only upon receipt of Attachment C - Outreach Efforts Compliance Statement, Attachment E - Minority Subcontractors Unavailability Certificate, and Attachment F - MBE Waiver Documentation as described above in items 1) through 9)
1) The MBE Liaison will review and accept or reject the minority business enterprise material that is submitted, and could obtain legal advice or assistance from their attorney. 2) The MBE waiver request may not be considered unless all of the documentation specified above has been submitted in a timely fashion by the apparent low bidder or successful offerer. 3) Assistance in the review of a request for a waiver (the documentation and justifications) may be requested from the Public School Construction Program and/or the Governor’s Office of Minority Affairs. 4) If a determination is made that the apparent low bidder or successful offeror did make a good faith effort, based upon a review of the documentation submitted, then the waiver must be granted. The award of contract shall then be made. The material and information submitted, including the LEA’s review and analysis notes and conclusion shall be retained in the project file. 5) If a determination is made that the apparent low bidder or successful offeror did not make a good faith effort, based upon a review of the documentation submitted, then the waiver should not be granted. The material and information submitted, including the LEA’s review and analysis notes and conclusion, shall be retained in the project file. The award of contract shall then be made to the next lowest bidder or offeror, who meets the contractual requirements, including the MBE requirements. 6) When a waiver is granted, a copy of Attachment F - MBE Waiver Documentation, accepted and signed by a school system representative and with the reasons for the determination, shall be forwarded to the Governor’s Office of Minority Affairs and the Public School Construction Program within ten (10) days after approval of the contract award by the board of education . Failure to submit the required documentation within the time frame specified may result in delayed approval of the award of contract by the IAC.
5. All Contracts Shall Include The Following:
a. “The contractor shall perform the contract in accordance with the representations made in Attachment A - Certified Minority Business Enterprise Utilization and Fair Solicitation Affidavit and Attachment B - MBE Participation Schedule, submitted as part of the bid or proposal”. b. “Failure to perform the contract as specified and presented in the bid or proposal submission without prior written consent of the owner shall constitute a violation of a material term of the contract”.
1) The contractor shall structure his/her operations for the performance of the contract to attempt to achieve the MBE goals as stated in the solicitation document. 2) The contractor agrees to use his/her best efforts to carry out these requirements consistent with the efficient and effective performance of the contract.
10 3) The contractor must ensure that all certified MBEs shall have the maximum practical opportunity to compete for additional subcontract work under the contract, even after the award of the contract. 4) The contractor shall submit monthly to the MBE Liaison or the school system’s designated representative a report listing any unpaid invoices, over 30 days old, received from any certified MBE subcontractor, the amount of each invoice and the reason payment has not been made. 5) The contractor shall included in its agreements with its certified MBE subcontractors, a requirement that those subcontractors submit monthly to the MBE Liaison or appropriate representative a report that identifies the prime contract and lists all payments received from the contractor in the preceding 30 days, as well as any outstanding invoices, and the amount of those invoices. 6) The contractor shall cooperate in any reviews of the contractor’s procedures and practices with respect to minority business enterprises, which the MBE Liaison, the Public School Construction Program, and/or the Governor’s Office of Minority Affairs may, from time to time, conduct. 7) The contractor shall maintain such records as are necessary to confirm compliance with its MBE participation obligations. These records must indicate the identity of certified minority and non-minority subcontractors employed on the contract, the type of work performed by each, and the actual dollar value of work performed. Subcontract agreements documenting the work performed by all MBE participants must be retained by the contractor and furnished to the MBE Liaison and or appropriate representative on request. 8) All records concerning MBE participation must be retained by the contractor for a period of five years after final completion of the contract, and will be available for inspection by the MBE Liaison, representatives from the Public School Construction Program and/or other designated official entities. 9) At the option of the MBE Liaison or appropriate agency representative, upon completion of the contract and before final payment and/or release of retainage, the contractor shall submit a final report in affidavit form and under penalty of perjury, of all payments made to, or withheld from MBE subcontractors. 10) If at any time after submission of a bid or proposal and before execution of a contract, the apparent successful bidder or offeror determines that a certified MBE listed on Attachment B - MBE Participation Schedule has become or will become unavailable, then the apparent successful bidder or offeror shall immediately notify the procurement officer and provide such officer with a reason(s) why the change has occurred. Any desired change in Attachment B - MBE Participation Schedule shall be approved in advance by the procurement officer and shall indicate the contractor’s efforts to substitute another certified MBE subcontractor to perform the work. Desired changes occurring after the date of contract execution may occur only upon written approval by the LEA. 11) A business that presents itself as a minority business may participate in a project but the contract value may not be counted toward the MBE goal or subgoals, if applicable, until the business is certified by MDOT. If it is not certified at the time of contract award it may not be counted toward the goal or subgoals, if applicable, at that time. Only the funds paid after MDOT certification can be counted toward meeting the MBE goal or subgoals, if applicable. If a certified MBE fails to meet the standards specified in State Finance and Procurement Article.14-301, Annotated Code of Maryland, the payments made to the MBE can be recorded and counted under a contract entered into when the MBE was eligible and certified. Ineligibility of an MBE to participate in the MBE program may not be the sole cause of the termination of the MBE contractual relationship for the remainder of the term of the contract. 12) Contractors are encouraged to seek additional MBE participation in their contracts during the life of the project. Any additional MBE participation from certified MBEs
11 should be reported to the MBE liaison and should be included in subsequent monthly requisitions for payment. 13) The contractor shall complete the Standard Monthly Contractor’s Requisition for Payment (IAC/PSCP Form 306.4), specifically page 3 of 16, Minority Business Enterprise Participation , with each requisition submitted for payment. This submittal should accurately reflect the payments to be made that month to MBEs, and the cumulative total for the period specified. Any and all MBE firms that are identified on Attachment B – MBE Participation Schedule should be included on page 3 of the first and all subsequent requisitions for payment. Any MBEs identified during the life of the project should be added as soon as the contractor engages them. 14) At the completion of the project the contractor shall prepare a written summary of the final certified MBE participation in the contract as compared to the proposed participation at the time of contract award. This should include the name of each certified MBE, the amount that was anticipated to be paid at the time of contract award, the amount actually paid, and an explanation of any differences that have occurred. Special attention should be given to any situations where the final payments to any MBE was below the level of commitment at the time of contract award.
6. Projects Utilizing a Construction Manager Delivery Method
This section of the procedure has been prepared based upon the utilization of Construction Manager Agency method of delivery. If another alternative method of project delivery is being considered, then these procedures would need to be adapted in consultation with the PSCP before proceeding.
a. For projects that are being designed and solicited utilizing a Construction Manager Agency delivery method with multiple prime contracts, the school system can structure its procedures to attain the overall MBE goal and subgoals, if applicable, for the project as presented below: b. The MBE liaison and other school system staff should work with the project’s construction manager, cost estimator, and architect, along with any other individuals who could provide assistance, to determine the overall MBE utilization strategy for the work required, appropriate bid packages, and an appropriate overall MBE goal and subgoals, if applicable, for each specific bid or proposal package. c. The overall MBE goal and subgoals, if applicable, for the project shall represent the aggregate of the individual goals and subgoals, if applicable, set for each bid or proposal package. d. In setting the specific goals and subgoals, if applicable, for each solicitation package consideration should be given to the potential for MBE participation to the maximum extent possible. The information and procedures provided in section 4.0 MBE Goal Setting Procedures should be consulted and followed for these types of projects. e. Prior to submitting the construction documents for State review and authorization to solicit bids or proposals, the school system’s representative will prepare a complete list of the individual solicitation packages and indicate the MBE goal and subgoals, if applicable, for each solicitation package. This would include the overall MBE goal and subgoals, if applicable, established in the solicitation documents, the estimated cost for each solicitation package, and the estimated MBE dollar amounts for each solicitation package. A copy of this list should be submitted with the construction documents. The list should be retained as a record by the school system for comparison to the actual contracts awarded with MBE participation, and the final actual MBE participation at the completion of the project. f. Contractors submitting bids or proposals for solicitation packages that do not include a MBE goal and subgoals, if applicable, would not be required to submit any of the MBE attachments that are otherwise required nor would they be required to indicate that they are requesting a waiver. The school system representative would, however, request
12 information from the contractor at the completion of the project to determine if any certified MBE firms had participated in the contract. g. All other submittals of MBE materials and reporting requirements are applicable for the project, including the submittal of attachments a and b as described above in section 6.0. this includes the documentation for a request for a waiver, if applicable and appropriate.
7. Projects Utilizing an Indefinite Delivery/Indefinite Quantity (IDIQ) or Job Order Contracting (JOC) Method of Delivery
a. The solicitation should be prepared and the overall MBE goal and subgoals, if applicable, established based upon the type of work that is anticipated to be specified or performed under the contract and the availability of certified MBEs. This could include an analysis of the percentages of the different types of work, the estimated dollar value in the entire contract, and the availability of MBEs. b. If an overall goal and subgoals, if applicable, are set the bidders or offerors would be required to submit Attachment A - Certified Minority Business Enterprise Utilization and Fair Solicitation Affidavit in which they could indicate their anticipated MBE participation based upon the entire contract amount and the types of work specified. The award of contract can be made based upon their estimate of MBE participation since there is no specific task order or description of work to be performed and subcontractors have not been identified or engaged through any type of commitment or subcontract. c. Since MBE participation is only anticipated in a general sense as an objective and specific contracts to MBEs have not been signed, then the contract award would not be included in any reporting to the PSCP or subsequent reporting to GOMA. d. However, as the contract proceeds and individual task orders and/or purchase orders are issued, the contractor should submit Attachment B - MBE Participation Schedule for any and all projects or work where MBE subcontractors and/or suppliers might reasonably be utilized. Discussions between the contractor or offeror and the LEA as the task orders and/or purchase orders are being developed should address this aspect of the contract requirements. e. Any MBE participation should be recorded by the MBE liaison and reported to the PSCP MBE Liaison as the task orders and/or purchase orders are approved. f. The contractor shall complete the Standard Monthly Contractor’s Requisition for Payment (IAC/PSCP FORM 306.4), specifically page 3 of 16, Minority Business Enterprise Participation , with each requisition submitted for payment. This submittal should accurately reflect the payments to be made that month to MBE S, and the cumulative total for the period specified. Any and all MBE firms that are identified on Attachment B - MBE Participation Schedule should be included on page 3 of the first and all subsequent requisitions for payment. Any MBEs identified during the life of the project should be added as soon as the contractor engages them. g. At the completion of the contract period or the full utilization of the contract’s value a report should be prepared by the LEA MBE Liaison and submitted to the PSCP MBE Liaison summarizing the MBE participation in each and all of the task orders or purchase orders issued under the contract. This should include the anticipated MBE participation prior to the issuance of the solicitation, the MBE participation anticipated at the time of contract award and the actual MBE participation at the completion of the contract.
8. Projects Utilizing the Design/Build Delivery Method
a. The solicitation is for both A/E services and the actual construction of a public school project. The solicitation should be prepared and the MBE goal and subgoals, if applicable, established for the construction work that is anticipated for the project. The goal setting procedures described in Section 4.0 above should be utilized for these types of projects. b. The bidders or offerors should be required to submit Attachment A - Certified Minority Business Enterprise Utilization and Fair Solicitation Affidavit on which they would
13 indicate their anticipated MBE participation based upon the construction work anticipated and their understanding of the MBE goal and subgoals, if applicable, the types of work involved, and the availability of certified MBEs for the project. Since there are no detailed plans or designs for the project and there are no contracts or subcontracts for the actual construction work there is no need to submit any other MBE attachments, at this time. c. If the bidder or offeror, who is to be awarded this contract has indicated that they do not anticipate achieving the overall MBE participation goal and subgoals, if applicable, for this project on Attachment A, then they are in effect requesting a waiver. They will be required to submit documentation at a later date to justify this request. d. As the project proceeds through the design phase and the project is nearing the completion of the construction documents for submission to the State to review, the Design/Build Team (team) in consultation with LEA representatives should discuss the opportunities and potential for certified MBEs to participate in the project. e. The team should begin to identify potential contractors and subcontractors, opportunities to segment the project, and MBEs that could participate in the project. f. At a point in time that is approximately 30 days prior to the anticipated CD submission to the State, the team should complete and submit Attachment B - MBE Participation Schedule to the LEA for their review and approval. g. If the team had indicated on Attachment A that they would meet the goals and the information on Attachment B indicates that they did meet the goals then the team should proceed with the construction of the project. h. If the team had indicated on Attachment A that they did not anticipate meeting the overall MBE goal and subgoals, if applicable, or only a portion of the goal and subgoals, if applicable, then Attachment B should be reviewed by the LEA. The team should, at this time, submit their documentation in support of the waiver requested. i. The proposed MBE participation should be reviewed and a determination made as to whether the team has made a good faith effort to meet the MBE goals and subgoals, if applicable, established for the project and as stated on Attachment A, previously submitted. j. If a request for a waiver is made and approved, Attachment F – MBE Waiver Documentation should be signed by a school system representative and submitted to the PSCP and the Governor’s Office of Minority Affairs. k. Since there was no MBE participation reported at the time of the award of the Design/Build contract, the LEA would submit the entire package of information, including all of the MBE related attachments to the PSCP within ten (10) days of the team being directed to proceed with the actual construction work. l. All other submittals of MBE materials and reporting requirements are applicable for the project, as described above in Section 6.0.
7.0 RECORDS AND REPORTS
1. The MBE Liaison shall maintain such records as are necessary to confirm compliance with its Minority Business Enterprise Procedures and activities. The records shall be maintained until the project is audited by the Public School Construction Program. These records shall include by project:
a. The contractor report submitted at the completion of the project; b. The identity of the minority contractors employed on the project; c. The type of work performed; d. The actual dollar value of the work, services, supplies or equipment; and e. The MBE percentage of the total contract.
2. The MBE Liaison will maintain a record of all waivers approved for each project or solicitation package where the prime contractor was unable to achieve the established overall
14 goal or subgoals, if applicable. The MBE Liaison will, however, report to the PSCP all MBE participation by MDOT certified firms who are prime contractors, subcontractors, suppliers, or otherwise making an economically viable contribution to each project. This information shall be reported to PSCP within ten (10) days after approval of the award of the contract by the board of education.
3. The LEA shall submit the “Certified Minority Business Enterprise Participation Standard Monthly Contractor’s Requisition for Payment” (IAC/PSCP Form 306.4 page 3 of 16, located in the Administrative Procedures Guide), which is Attachment G in this procedure, to the PSCP Director of Fiscal Services as part of the regular monthly request for payment for the project.
4. The LEA shall submit the “Close-Out Cost Summary” (IAC/PSCP Form 306.6 located in the Administrative Procedures Guide), which is Attachment H of this procedure, along with the “Certified Minority Business Enterprise Participation Standard Monthly Contractor’s Requisition for Payment” (IAC/PSCP Form 306.4) to the PSCP Director of Fiscal Services within 180 days of completion of the project.
5. Each fiscal year end, PSCP Fiscal Services will create a report “Payments Made To Contractors during The Fiscal Year” and maintain such records as are necessary to confirm compliance with its minority business enterprise procedures and activities.
6. Each fiscal year end, PSCP Fiscal Services will create a report “Projects Completed During the Fiscal Year” and maintain such records as are necessary to confirm compliance with its Minority Business Enterprise Procedures and activities. This report will compare the overall MBE goal and subgoals, if applicable, for each specific project with the MBE participation anticipated at the time of contract award and the actual MBE participation at the completion of the project.
8.0 MONITORING
1. The LEA’s procurement personnel or project staff shall verify that the certified MBE’s listed in the MBE participation schedule are actually performing the work.
2. The LEA’s procurement personnel shall ensure that MBE subcontractors are receiving compensation as set forth in the MBE participation schedule by ensuring that the contractor submits monthly reports, listing any unpaid invoices over 30 days old received from any certified MBE subcontractor, the amount of each invoice, and the reason payment has not been made.
3. The MBE Liaison and/or the Public School Construction Program will conduct reviews as deemed necessary to confirm compliance with the minority business enterprise participation requirements.
4. The MBE Liaison will maintain appropriate records, and shall assist the Public School Construction Program in on-site or post-audit reviews upon request.
5. Auditors from the Public School Construction Program will have access to and the ability to audit MBE participation for specific projects, information retained by the LEA, and/or submitted to the IAC in reports/forms filed by the LEA as referenced above.
15
9.0 MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE LIAISON
1. The Superintendent shall designate an individual to be identified as the MBE Liaison for the school system.
2. The MBE Liaison will be the contact person who will work with the Public School Construction Program and the Governor’s Office of Minority Affairs to implement the Minority Business Enterprise Program for the school system and the State of Maryland.
3. The Superintendent will immediately notify the Public School Construction Program if there is a change in the MBE Liaison for the school system.
16 APPROVED BY LAC 9/18/08 Attachment A (page 1 of 2)
CERTIFIED MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE UTILIZATION AND FAIR SOLICITATION AFFIDAVIT
NOTE: You must include this document with your bid or offer. If you do not submit the form with your bid or offer, the procurement officer shall deem your bid non-responsive or your offer not reasonably susceptible of being selected for award.
* * * * * * * * * * * * *
Part I. I acknowledge the:
• Overall certified MBE subcontract participation goal of ____ %. and • The subgoals, if applicable, of: • ____ % for certified African American-owned businesses and • ____ % for certified women-owned businesses.
I have made a good-faith effort to achieve this goal. If awarded the contract, I will continue to attempt to increase MBE participation during the project.
Part II. Check ONE Box NOTE: FAILURE TO CHECK ONE OF BOXES 1, 2, or 3 BELOW WILL RENDER A BID NON- RESPONSIVE OR AN OFFER NOT REASONABLY SUSCEPTIBLE OF BEING SELECTED FOR AWARD
NOTE: INCONSISTENCY BETWEEN THE ASSERTIONS ON THIS FORM AND THE INFORMATION PROVIDED ON THE MBE PARTICIPATION SCHEDULE (ATTACHMENT B) MAY RENDER A BID NON-RESPONSIVE OR AN OFFER NOT REASONABLY SUSCEPTIBLE OF BEING SELECTED FOR AWARD
1 I have met the overall MBE goal and MBE subgoals for this project. I submit with this Affidavit [Attachment A] the MBE Participation Schedule [Attachment B], which details how I will reach that goal. or 2 After having made a good-faith effort to achieve the overall MBE goal and MBE subgoals for this project, I can achieve partial success only. I submit with this Affidavit [Attachment A] the MBE Participation Schedule [Attachment B], which details the MBE participation I have achieved.
I request a partial waiver as follows:
• Waiver of overall MBE subcontract participation goal: ____ % • Waiver of MBE subcontract participation subgoals, if applicable: • ____ % for certified African American-owned businesses and • ____ % for certified women-owned businesses.
Within 10 days of being informed that I am the apparent awardee, I will submit MBE Waiver Documentation [Attachment F] (with supporting documentation).
Page 16 of 28 Administrative Procedure 750.1 Revised 05/13/97, 08/14/01, 11/12/02, 5/11/04, 6/13/06, 12/9/08 16 APPROVED BY LAC 9/18/08 Attachment A (page 2 of 2) or
3 After having made a good faith effort to achieve the overall MBE goal and MBE subgoals for this project, I am unable to achieve any portion of the goal or subgoals. I submit with this Affidavit [Attachment A] the MBE Participation Schedule [Attachment B].
I request a full waiver.
Within 10 days of being informed that I am the apparent awardee, I will submit MBE Waiver Documentation [Attachment F] (with supporting documentation).
Part III.
I understand that if I am the apparent awardee or conditional awardee, I must submit within 10 working days after receiving notice of the potential award or within 10 days after the date of conditional award – whichever is earlier – the:
• Outreach Efforts Compliance Statement (Attachment C) • Subcontractor Project Participation Statement (Attachment D) • Minority Subcontractors Unavailability Certificate (Attachment E) (if applicable) • Any other documentation the Procurement Officer requires to ascertain my responsibility in connection with the MBE participation goal and subgoals
I acknowledge that if I fail to timely return complete documents, the Procurement Officer may determine that I am not responsible and therefore not eligible for contract award. If the contract has been awarded, the award is voidable.
I acknowledge that the MBE subcontractors/suppliers listed in the MBE Participation Schedule and any additional MBE subcontractor/suppliers identified in the Subcontractor Project Participation Statement will be used to accomplish the percentage of MBE participation that I intend to achieve.
In the solicitation of subcontract quotations or offers, MBE subcontractors were provided the same information and amount of time to respond as were non-MBE subcontractors.
The solicitation process was conducted in such a manner so as to not place MBE subcontractors at a competitive disadvantage to non-MBE subcontractors.
I solemnly affirm under the penalties of perjury that this Affidavit is true to the best of my knowledge, information, and belief.
______Bidder/Offeror Name Affiant Signature ______Address Printed Name & Title ______Address (continued) Date
September 2008 Page 17 of 28 Administrative Procedure 750.1 Revised 05/13/97, 08/14/01, 11/12/02, 5/11/04, 6/13/06, 12/9/08
17 Attachment B MBE PARTICIPATION SCHEDULE This document must be included with the bid or offer. If the bidder or offeror fails to submit this form with the bid or offer as required, the procurement officer shall deem the bid non-responsive or shall determine that the offer is not reasonably susceptible of being selected for award. 1. Prime Contractor’s Name 2. Prime Contractor’s Address and Telephone Number
3. Project/School Name 4. Project/School Location
5. LEA and PSC No. 6. Base Bid Amount $
7a. Minority Firm Name Minority Firm Address
Minority Firm Telephone Number Minority Group Type (African American ) (Women ) Minority Firm Fax Number (Asian ) (Hispanic) (American Indian) (Disabled) MDOT Certification Number
Work to be Performed and Subcontract Dollar Amount Percent of Total Contract
Minority Firm Address 7b. Minority Firm Name
Minority Firm Telephone Number Minority Group Type (African American ) (Women ) (Asian) (Hispanic) Minority Firm Fax Number (American Indian) (Disabled)
MDOT Certification Number
Subcontract Dollar Amount Percent of Total Contract
7c. Minority Firm Name Minority Firm Address
Minority Firm Telephone Number Minority Group Type (African American ) (Women ) Minority Firm Fax Number (Asian) (Hispanic) (American Indian) (Disabled) MDOT Certification Number
Subcontract Dollar Amount Percent of Total Contract
8. MBE Total Dollar Amount 9. Total MBE Percent of Entire Contract
10. Form Prepared by : 11. Reviewed and Accepted by Board of Education MBE Liaison
Name Name
Title Title
Date Date
Total MBE Participation: ______% $ ______Total African-American MBE Participation: ______% $ ______Total Woman-Owned MBE Participation: ______% $ ______Total Other Participation: ______% $ ______
June 2008 B-1 Page 18 of 28 Administrative Procedure 750.1 Revised 05/13/97, 08/14/01, 11/12/02, 5/11/04, 6/13/06, 12/9/08
18 Attachment C
OUTREACH EFFORTS COMPLIANCE STATEMENT
In conjunction with the bid or offer submitted in response to ______County Public Schools for the ______project, PSC # ______, I state the following: (name)
1) Bidder/Offeror identified opportunities to subcontract in these specific work categories:
2) Attached to this form are copies of written solicitations (with bidding instructions) used to solicit certified MBEs for these subcontract opportunities.
3) Bidder/Offeror made the following attempts to contact personally the solicited MBEs:
4) Bidder/Offeror assisted MBEs to fulfill or to seek waiver of bonding Requirements (Described Efforts)
This project does not involve bonding requirements.
5) Bidder/Offeror did/did not attend the pre-bid conference
No pre-bid conference was held.
______By: ______Bidder/Offeror Name
______Address Name,Title
______Date
June 2008 B-1
Page 19 of 28 Administrative Procedure 750.1 Revised 05/13/97, 08/14/01, 11/12/02, 5/11/04, 6/13/06, 12/9/08
19 Attachment D
MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISES SUBCONTRACTOR PROJECT PARTICIPATION STATEMENT
PROJECT/ SCHOOL NAME:
PROJECT/ SCHOOL LOCATION:
LEA: ______
NAME OF PRIME CONTRACTOR: ______
NAME OF MBE SUBCONTRACTOR:
MDOT Certification Number
1. Work/Services to be performed by MBE Subcontractor:
2. Subcontract Amount: $
3. Bonds - Amount and type required of Subcontractor if any:
4. MBE Anticipated or Actual Commencement Date: Completion Date:
5. This MBE subcontract represents the following percentage of the total contract cost:
6. This is an African American Firm: Yes No
7. This is a Women Owned Business Firm: Yes No
8. This is an Asian, American Indian, Hispanic or Disabled Firm: Yes No (Circle One) ***********************************************************************************************
The undersigned subcontractor and prime contractor will enter into a contract for the work/service indicated above upon the prime contractor’s execution of a contract for the above referenced project with the Board of Education. The undersigned subcontractor is a MDOT certified Minority Business Enterprise. The terms and conditions stated above are consistent with our agreements.
Signature of Subcontractor:
Signature of Subcontractor
Date: ______
The term and conditions stated above are consistent with our agreements.
Signature of Prime Contractor:
Date:
Page 20 of 28 Administrative Procedure 750.1 Revised 05/13/97, 08/14/01, 11/12/02, 5/11/04, 6/13/06, 12/9/08 20 June 2008 D-1
Attachment E
MINORITY SUBCONTRACTOR UNAVAILABILITY CERTIFICATE
1. It is hereby certified that the firm of (Name of Minority firm) located at (Number) (Street)
(City) (State) (Zip)
was offered an opportunity to bid on the school project
in County by (Name of Prime Contractor’s Firm)
*************************************************************************************
2. The (Minority Firm), is either unavailable for the work/service or unable to prepare a bid for this project for the following reason(s):
Signature of Minority Firm’s MBE Representative Title Date
MDOT Certification # Telephone #
3. To be completed by the prime contractor if Section 2 of this form is not completed by the minority firm.
To the best of my knowledge and belief, said Certified Minority Business Enterprise is either unavailable for the work/service for this project, is unable to prepare a bid, or did not respond to a request for a price proposal and has not completed the above portion of this submittal.
Signature of Prime Contractor Title Date
June 2008 E-1
Page 21 of 28 Administrative Procedure 750.1 Revised 05/13/97, 08/14/01, 11/12/02, 5/11/04, 6/13/06, 12/9/08 21 Attachment F
MBE WAIVER DOCUMENTATION
Project Name: PSC No.
Base Contract Amount $
Plus Accepted Alternates
Equals Total Contract Amount $
I have previously requested that a waiver be granted to the overall MBE goal for this project of _____ percent, with a minimum of ____ percent from certified African American-owned businesses, a minimum of ____ percent from certified women-owned businesses, and the balance from all certified minority business enterprises, if applicable. This would include the total dollar value of all materials, supplies, equipment, and services, including construction services directly or indirectly, from Minority Business Enterprises (MBE) which are currently certified by the Maryland Department of Transportation (MDOT).
I , hereby certify that my position is (Name of Company Representative)
, and I am the duly authorized representative of (Position Title)
. (Company Name)
I further certify that I have submitted a Schedule for Participation of Certified Minority Business Enterprises which reflects the percentage and dollar value of certified Minority Business Enterprise participation which my company expects to achieve for this contract. Therefore, the request for the waiver is as follows:
Summary MBE Participation Schedule from Attachment B Minority Group MBE GOAL Actual MBE Request For Waiver Dollar Participation
Percent Dollar Value of Dollar Value Percent of Dollar Value Percent of Total Total Contract* Total of Total Contract Contract Contract a. Sub Goal African American
b. Sub Goal Women
c. Other * in SubGoal group a/b above TOTALS
* with accepted/rejected alternates
June 2008 F-1
Page 22 of 28 Administrative Procedure 750.1 Revised 05/13/97, 08/14/01, 11/12/02, 5/11/04, 6/13/06, 12/9/08 22 To support this request for a waiver, I include the following information as attachments which I certify to be true to the best of my knowledge.
1. A detailed statement of the efforts made by the contractor to identify and select portions of the work proposed to be performed by subcontractors in order to increase the likelihood of achieving the stated goal; 2. A detailed statement of the efforts made by the contractor prior to and up to 10 days before the bid opening to solicit minority business enterprises through written notices that describe the categories of work for which subcontracting is being solicited, the type of work to be performed, and specific instructions on how to submit a bid; 3. A detailed statement of the contractor’s efforts to make personal contact with MBE firms identified for Item 2. above; 4. A record of the name, address, telephone number, and dates contacted for each MBE identified under items 2. and 3. above; 5. A description of the information provided to MBE’s regarding the plans, specifications and the anticipated time schedule for portions of the work to be performed; 6. Information on activities to assist minority business enterprises to fulfill bonding requirements, or to obtain a waiver of these requirements; 7. Information on activities to publicize contracting opportunities to minority business enterprises, attendance at pre-bid meetings, or other meetings scheduled by the MBE Liaison or designated representative; 8. As to each MBE that placed a subcontract quotation or offer which the apparent low bidder or successful offeror considers not to be acceptable, a detailed statement of reasons for this conclusion; and 9. A list of minority subcontractors found to be unavailable. This shall be accompanied by a Minority Subcontractor Unavailability Certificate signed by the minority business enterprise or from the apparent low bidder or successful offeror indicating that the minority business did not provide the written certification.
Signature Date (Company Representative Name)
Sworn and subscribed before me this day. of in the year Notary Public ------
Reviewed and accepted by the County Board of Education MBE Liaison. (County Name)
Signature Date
(County Representative Name)
MBE Request For Waiver Master Form (July 2002)
June 2008
F-2
Page 23 of 28 Administrative Procedure 750.1 Revised 05/13/97, 08/14/01, 11/12/02, 5/11/04, 6/13/06, 12/9/08
23 Attachment G IAC/PSCP Form 306.4 CERTIFIED MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE PAGE 3 of 16 PARTICIPATION STANDARD MONTHLY CONTRACTOR’S REQUISITION FOR PAYMENT
LEA: DATE: PROJECT PSC LOCATION: REQ
MDOT MBE AMOUNT PAID SUB- TO BE PAID SUB- TOTAL JULY 1 CONTRACTOR THIS TOTAL CONTRACTOR MBE to NAME OF MBE CERTIFICATION REQUISITION PAID CLASSIFICATION CONTRACT JUNE 30 SUB-CONTRACTOR # # AMOUNT $ $ TO DATE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TOTAL MDOT Certification # can be located at www.mdot.state.md.us
MBE Classification #:
African American =1 Hispanic American = 2 American Indian = 3 Asian American = 4
Women = 5 Disabled = 6 Non-profit = 7
I certify that the figures and information presented above represent accurate and true statements, hat timely payments have been and will be made to suppliers and subcontractors on the project, as requisitioned payments are received, and in accordance with our contracts. ______Name of Contractor Firm Authorized Signature/Date ______Contractor EFIN/SSN Contractor MBE Classification # (if applicable)
Page 24 of 28 Administrative Procedure 750.1 Revised 05/13/97, 08/14/01, 11/12/02, 5/11/04, 6/13/06, 12/9/08 June 2008 G-1 24 Attachment H CLOSE-OUT SUMMARY IAC/PSCP FORM 306.6
LEA: DATE:
SCHOOL NAME: PSC # :
Public School Construction Local and Other
Allocation:
Cash Disbursements:
Approved Approved Total Contracts Expenditures Balance Contracts Expenditures Expenditures
Construction $0 .
A/E $0 $0
Related Costs $0 $0
Total $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0
I hereby certify that the data shown hereon is correct and request this project be closed.
Signature of LEA Representative
FOR STATE USE ONLY ADJUSTMENTS:
Allocation: Initials
Cash: Date
AUDIT COMMENTS: Initials
Date
Page 25 of 28 Administrative Procedure 750.1 Revised 05/13/97, 08/14/01, 11/12/02, 5/11/04, 6/13/06, 12/9/08
June 2008 H-I 25 MBE GOAL SETTING MODEL ANALYSIS FORM
Date submitted to PSCP: Date submitted to GOMA: SECTION I (to be completed by LEA) LEA Name: PSC #: Anticipated Bid Date: Project Name: Project Type Address of project: Project delivery method Cost estimate for total project (without alternates): Date of cost estimate:
SECTION II (to be completed by LEA)
A. Describe the process and information reviewed and analyzed for this specific project. Attach additional sheets as needed. 1. Identify those portions of the work that could potentially be performed by certified minority firms, including MBE suppliers. 2. Identify geographic factors that were considered. 3. Summarize information that was obtained utilizing the MDOT Directory. 4. Summarize information that was obtained related to similar projects in the jurisdiction where goals were set by a State government department, agency, or another entity. 5. Identify information that was utilized in the jurisdiction for similar past projects for which a State government department, agency, or another entity set MBE goals and subgoals. B. Based upon the above analysis it has been determined that: (Place an “X” in the appropriate box below and complete the appropriate percentage in the blank provided)
1. The overall MBE subcontracting goal for this project will be percent with a subgoal of percent for African American-owned businesses and a subgoal of percent for women-owned businesses. 2. There will not be any MBE subcontracting goal or subgoals for this specific project. Date that MBE Goal Setting Analysis was completed: Provide the names of the individuals who participated in the review and analysis process (Note: This line can be expanded in electronic format):
Section II reviewed by: Print name Signature Date MBE Liaison: Contact telephone #: Contact e-mail address: Procurement Officer
Page 26 of 28 Administrative Procedure 750.1 Revised 05/13/97, 08/14/01, 11/12/02, 5/11/04, 6/13/06, 12/9/08 26 MBE GOAL SETTING MODEL ANALYSIS FORM Contact telephone #: Contact e-mail address:
______
Page 27 of 28 Administrative Procedure 750.1 Revised 05/13/97, 08/14/01, 11/12/02, 5/11/04, 6/13/06, 12/9/08
27 MBE GOAL SETTING MODEL ANALYSIS FORM
SECTION III (to be completed by LEA)
The solicitation and/or bid documents have been reviewed by me, and the overall MBE goal, and subgoals, if applicable, or no MBE goal, as indicated above are shown as specified in the solicitation and/or bid documents. Reviewed by LEA (print name): Signature Date:
SECTION IV (FOR DGS/PSCP REVIEW)
A. This form has been submitted with the CD submission for the project specified above, and review of the project’s CD submission can proceed. B. The MBE subcontracting goal and subgoals, or no MBE goal is consistent with the solicitation or bid documents submitted. C. Although a CD submission is not required, this form has been submitted to the PSCP, as required in the MBE procedures. Reviewed by DGS: (print name) Signature: Date: Date sent to PSCP:
Received and Reviewed by PSCP: Date: Created October 2008
This form, or a form that is substantially similar, should be included and submitted as part of the Construction Document Submission to the Department of General Services (DGS) for State-funded projects that require review of construction documents, to the Maryland State Department of Education for locally funded projects, or to the Public School Construction Program for State-funded projects that do not require review of construction documents (See Minority Business Enterprise Procedures for State Funded Public School Construction Projects Section 4.0, MBE Goal Setting Procedures, as amended). At the same time a copy should be submitted to the Public School Construction Program (PSCP) and The Governor’s Office of Minority Affairs (GOMA) if the project cost is in excess of $200,000.
Page 28 of 28 Administrative Procedure 750.1 Revised 05/13/97, 08/14/01, 11/12/02, 5/11/04, 6/13/06, 12/9/08
28 SECTION 00 40 00
AIA DOCUMENT A101 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR
SECTION 00 60 00
AIA DOCUMENT A312 CONSTRUCTION BONDS FORMS
SECTION 00 70 00
WAGES RATES
INFORMATIONAL WAGE RATES
The wage rates listed below are published by the State of Maryland, Division of Labor and Industry, Prevailing Wage Unit.
The wage rates posted on this site are provided for informational purposes ONLY.
The wage and fringe rates may change between the time of issuance of the wage determinations and the award of the public works contract. Therefore, prior to the award of the public works contract, verification must be made with the public body, to insure that the rates contained in this determination are still prevailing.
These Informational Prevailing Wage Rates may not be substituted for the requirements of pre-advertisement for bids or onsite job posting for a public work contract that exceeds $500,000 in value and either of the following criteria are met: (1) the contracting body is a unit of State government or an instrumentality of the State and there is any State funding for the project; or (2) the contracting body is a political subdivision, agency, person or entity (such as a county) and the State funds 50% or more of the project.
Print Date GARRETT COUNTY BUILDING CONSTRUCTION Feb 26, 2020
MODIFICATION BASIC BORROWED FRINGE CLASSIFICATION REASON HOURLY FROM BENEFIT RATE PAYMENT
BALANCING TECHNICIAN AD $36.60 043 $18.19 BRICKLAYER AD $28.03 001 $22.77 CARPENTER AD $28.25 $19.00 CARPENTER - SHORING SCAFFOLD BUILDER AD $26.66 001 $15.00 CEMENT MASON AD $16.00 $5.83 DRYWALL - SPACKLING, TAPING, & FINISHING AD $28.25 $19.00 ELECTRICIAN AD $33.90 $18.18 ELEVATOR MECHANIC AD $46.88 001 $39.37 GLAZIER AD $23.76 001 $7.98 INSULATION WORKER AD $36.31 001 $25.75 IRONWORKER - FENCE ERECTOR AD $26.88 043 $18.80 IRONWORKER - ORNAMENTAL AD $20.53 043 $17.72 IRONWORKER - REINFORCING AD $27.19 $21.73 IRONWORKER - STRUCTURAL AD $23.08 $5.76 LABORER - AIR TOOL OPERATOR AD $21.19 $20.50 LABORER - ASPHALT PAVER AD $21.19 $20.50 LABORER - ASPHALT RAKER AD $21.01 $20.50 LABORER - BLASTER - DYNAMITE AD $21.19 $20.50 LABORER - BURNER AD $21.19 $20.50 LABORER - COMMON AD $21.01 $20.50 LABORER - CONCRETE PUDDLER AD $21.01 $20.50 LABORER - CONCRETE SURFACER AD $21.19 $20.50 LABORER - CONCRETE TENDER AD $21.01 $20.50 LABORER - CONCRETE VIBRATOR AD $21.01 $20.50 LABORER - DENSITY GAUGE AD $21.01 $20.50 LABORER - FIREPROOFER - MIXER AD $21.01 $20.50 LABORER - FLAGGER AD $21.01 $20.50 LABORER - GRADE CHECKER AD $21.01 $20.50 LABORER - HAND ROLLER AD $21.01 $20.50 LABORER - HAZARDOUS MATERIAL HANDLER AD $21.19 $20.50 LABORER - JACKHAMMER AD $21.01 $20.50
Page 1 of 3 LABORER - LANDSCAPING AD $21.01 $20.50 LABORER - LAYOUT AD $21.01 $20.50 LABORER - LUTEMAN AD $21.01 $20.50 LABORER - MASON TENDER AD $21.19 $20.50 LABORER - MORTAR MIXER AD $21.01 $20.50 LABORER - PIPELAYER AD $21.19 $20.50 LABORER - PLASTERER - HANDLER AD $21.01 $20.50 LABORER - SCAFFOLD BUILDER AD $21.19 $20.50 LABORER - TAMPER AD $21.01 $20.50 MILLWRIGHT AD $24.67 $5.76 PAINTER AD $25.20 001 $10.42 PILEDRIVER AD $24.01 001 $13.51 PLUMBER AD $33.38 $15.03 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR - BACKHOE AD $33.12 $14.60 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR - BULLDOZER AD $33.12 001 $14.60 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR - CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AD $38.21 043 $3.46 a PAN POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR - CONCRETE PUMP AD $35.00 043 $9.36 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR - CRANE AD $33.11 $5.76 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR - DRILL - RIG AD $32.77 001 $13.95 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR - EXCAVATOR AD $33.12 $14.60 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR - LOADER AD $18.00 $5.76 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR - MECHANIC AD $33.12 043 $14.60 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR - OILER AD $26.50 $5.76 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR - PAVER AD $21.60 $3.95 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR - ROLLER - ASPHALT AD $17.30 $3.78 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR - ROLLER - EARTH AD $20.00 $5.88 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR - SCREED AD $20.20 $3.90 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR - SKID STEER (BOBCAT) AD $19.18 $4.70 SHEETMETAL WORKER (INCLUDING METAL ROOFING) AD $26.24 $22.17 SPRINKLERFITTER AD $21.75 043 $6.30 STEAMFITTER/PIPEFITTER AD $33.38 $15.03 STONE MASON AD $38.81 043 $18.29 TILE & TERRAZZO FINISHER AD $24.10 043 $11.24 TILE & TERRAZZO MECHANIC AD $29.12 043 $12.27 TRUCK DRIVER - DUMP AD $17.00 $5.01 TRUCK DRIVER - FLATBED AD $24.67 $5.76 TRUCK DRIVER - TACK/TAR TRUCK AD $16.50 $3.75
FRINGE REFERENCES AS NOTED: a. PAID HOLIDAYS: New Year Day, Memorial Day, July 4th, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day & Christmas Day. b. PAID VACATIONS: Employees with 1 year service - 1 week paid vacation; 2 years service - 2 weeks paid vacation; 10 years service - 3 weeks paid vacation. Incidental Craft Data: Caulker, Man Lift Operator, Rigger, Scaffold Builder, and Welder receive the wage and fringe rates prescribed for the craft performing the operation to which welding, scaffold building, rigging, operating a Man Lift, or caulking is incidental.
Page 2 of 3 These Informational Prevailing Wage Rates may not be substituted for the requirements of pre-advertisement for bids or onsite job posting for a public work contract that exceeds $500,000 in value and either of the following criteria are met: (1) the contracting body is a unit of State government or an instrumentality of the State and there is any State funding for the project; or (2) the contracting body is a political subdivision, agency, person or entity (such as a county) and the State funds 50% or more of the project.
Modification Codes:
(AD) 17-209 Annual Determination from Survey Wage Data Received (CH) 17-211 Commissioners¶Hearing (CR) 17-208 Commissioners¶Review (SR) 17-208 Survey Review by Staff
Each "Borrowed From" county is identified with the FIPS 3-digit county code unique for the specific jurisdiction in Maryland.
For additional information on the FIPS (Federal Information Processing Standard) code, see http://www.census.gov/datamap/fipslist/AllSt.txt
The Prevailing Wage rates appearing on this form were originally derived from Maryland¶s annual Wage Survey. The Commissioner of Labor & Industry encourages all contractors and interested groups to participate in the voluntary Wage Survey, detailing wage rates paid to workers on various types of construction throughout Maryland.
A mail list of both street and email addresses is maintained by the Prevailing Wage Unit to enable up-to-date prevailing wage information, including Wage Survey notices to be sent to contractors and other interested parties. If you would like to be included in the mailing list, please forward (1) your Name, (2) the name of your company (if applicable), (3) your complete postal mailing address, (4) your email address and (5) your telephone number to [email protected]. Requests for inclusion can also be mailed to: Prevailing Wage, 1100 N. Eutaw Street - Room 607, Baltimore MD 21201-2201.
END OF REPORT
Page 3 of 3
SECTION 00 90 00
STATE FUNDED PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN
APPENDIX E CONSTRUCTION SIGN FOR STATE FUNDED SCHOOL CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS Adrienne A. Jones, William C. "Bill" Ferguson IV,
E-1 Revised 03/2015
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
BUSHEY FEIGHT MORIN ARCHITECTS INC. 473 NORTH POTOMAC STREET HAGERSTOWN, MARYLAND 21740 301-733-5600 FAX: 301-733-5612 SECTION 01 10 00 - SUMMARY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Contract description.
B. Work by Owner.
C. Owner supplied products to be installed by Contractor.
D. Contractor's use of site and premises.
E. Work sequence.
F. Owner Occupancy.
G. Description of Base Bid.
H. Subcontractor Bond
I. Wage Rates.
J. Liquidated Damages
K. Project Manager, Superintendent and Assistant Superintendent.
L. Documents.
1.2 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION
A. Work for this Project shall include facade renovation and repairs at the Southern Garrett High School as identified within the Contract Drawings. Work includes: 1. Front – a. Removal of the existing windows, exterior insulation finish system, metal studs and gypsum board. b. Reconditioning of all exposed steel columns. c. installation of new metal suds and gypsum board, d. Installations of new brick veneer in front of existing masonry wall, e. installation of new windows, new single doors at 3 classrooms, new storefront doors at Media entrance f. construction of new portico with metal trusses and metal roofing, g. new sidewalks, curbs, fire lane, and other site improvements for drainage, flagpoles, and terrace area. h. Clean and repoint existing cast stone panels at Media Center and sealing of exterior metal panel joints. i. Existing Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical components to be extended to new finish surface of wall, interior or exterior, installation of new devices as noted. j. Site Work: 1) Install of new sidewalks, fire lane, curbs as shown on plans 2) Installation of new site drainage system and bio-retention area,
GCPS: Southern High School SUMMARY 01 10 00-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs 3) New planter and paving area by gym entrance. 4) Relocation of existing site features 5) Re-striping of parking lot for bus and passenger vehicles 6) Other site work as shown. 2. Eleventh Street Side: a. Replacement of three (3) windows along Media Office/Work Room. 3. Rear: a. Re-condition of all exterior support columns b. Re-sealing of all perimeter joints of existing windows, and any soft joints of the wall. c. Re-pointing of masonry. d. Re-construction of entrance to Media Center including covering of adjacent areaway.
B. Perform Work under fixed lump sum cost contract with Owner in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract for Construction.
1.3 WORK BY OWNER
A. Items noted NIC (Not in Contract), will be furnished and installed by Owner or under other contracts unless noted otherwise.
B. Other work will be occurring on the campus and/or within the facility during the work. 1. Fire alarm installation 2. Mechanical unit replacements 3. Turf field replacements
1.4 OWNER SUPPLIED PRODUCTS TO BE INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR
A. Owner's Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for and deliver Owner-reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples, to Contractor and Architect. 2. Arrange and pay for delivery to site. 3. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor. 4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient items. 5. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections, and service.
B. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Review and coordination of Owner-reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage jointly with Owner. 3. Handle, store, install and finish products as required. 4. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt.
C. Products furnished to site and installed by Owner: 1. None at this time
D. Items furnished by Owner for installation by Contractor: 1. None at this time
01 10 00-2 SUMMARY GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE
A. Limit use of site to allow: 1. Owner occupancy. 2. Work by Others and Work by Owner.
B. Access to Site: Limited to 6:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. Monday through Friday. Saturday and Sunday upon approval by GCPS. 1. GCPS Staff will be working 4 day work weeks (Mon. - Thurs. – 7:00 AM to 5:00 PM)
C. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings.
D. Utility Outages and Shutdown: Provide 72 hour written notice prior to shutdown.
E. Use or possession of alcohol, drugs, tobacco and firearms on site is strictly prohibited.
F. Wearing of “statement clothing” which can be determined to be offensive is strictly prohibited.
G. All persons engaged in the construction of the project, including employees of the general contractor, subcontractors, suppliers and delivery companies working for any of the above, while on the job site, shall conduct themselves in a courteous manner with respect to and when in the presence of staff and students of the School System. Disrespectful, abusive and/or profane language and/or gestures, and/or harassment of students and staff will not be tolerated and shall represent cause for the Owner to direct the Contractor to remove persons committing such acts from the project.
1.6 WORK SEQUENCE
A. All work shall be performed in accordance with the construction schedule to be prepared by the General Contractor which shall reflect milestone completion dates established elsewhere in the specifications.
1.7 OWNER OCCUPANCY
A. The substantial completion and Owner’s Use and Occupancy date for the high school is August 20, 2020.
B. Final completion date for the project is September 30, 2020
C. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate Owner's operations. The Owner will occupy the facility during the course of the project.
D. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy.
1.8 DESCRIPTION OF BASE BIDS
A. General: It is the intent of GCBOE to award one contract to the General Contractor for the complete project as indicated within the contract drawings, specifications and addenda.
GCPS: Southern High School SUMMARY 01 10 00-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs 1.9 SUBCONTRACTOR BOND
A. GCBOE retains the right to request a subcontractor to submit a performance and payment bond in the amount of his Contract to the General Contractor.
B. GCBOE shall reimburse the subcontractor in the amount of the direct cost of the bond without subcontractor or General Contractor markup for overhead, profit or any other associated cost.
1.11 WAGE RATES
A. Prevailing Wage Rates are applicable to this project.
1.12 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
A. In case of failure on the part of the Contractor to complete the work within the time fixed in the contract or any extensions thereof, the Contract shall pay the Owner, as fixed and agreed, liquidated damages in the sum of Five Thousand Dollars ($5,000.00) for each calendar day of delay.
1.13 PROJECT MANAGER, SUPERINTENDENT AND ASST. SUPERINTENDENT
A. The Project Manager, Superintendent and Assistant Superintendent shall be satisfactory to the Owner in all respects, and the Owner shall have the right to require Contractor to dismiss from the project any Project Manger and/or Superintendent with personnel satisfactory to Owner, at no additional cost. The Contractor shall not replace the Project Manager and/or Superintendent without the consent of the Owner except with personnel satisfactory to the Owner in all respects.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
01 10 00-4 SUMMARY GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 01 15 00 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Submission procedures.
B. Documentation of changes to Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Documents Owner/Contractor Agreement Form: Incorporating monetary value of accepted Alternates.
B. Section 00 15 00 - Instructions to Bidders: Requirements for Alternates.
C. Section 00 22 00 - Form of Proposal: Cost of Alternates.
D. Section 01 10 00 - Summary.
E. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions.
1.3 REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Alternates with full description of the proposed Alternate and the affect on adjacent or related components.
B. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner’s option. Accepted Alternates will be identified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement.
C. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each Alternate.
1.4 SELECTION AND AWARD OF ALTERNATIVES
A. Indicate variation of Bid Price for Alternates described below and list in Bid Form Document or any supplement to it, which requests a “difference” in Bid Price by adding to the base bid price.
B. Bid will be evaluated on base bid and accepted alternates determined by the Owner. Alternate shall be taken in order.
1.5 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. ADD Alternate No. 1 – Parking Lot Seal Coat 1. Description:
B. ADD Alternate No. 2 – Logo Emblem Relocation 1. Description
GCPS: Southern High School ALTERNATES 01 15 00-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs PART 2 PRODUCTS
(Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
(Not Used)
END OF SECTION
01 15 00-2 ALTERNATES GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 01 19 00 - CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Schedule of Values.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 00 20 00 - Standard Form of Proposal: Contract sum/price including alternates and unit prices.
B. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Schedule of Values.
C. Section 01 60 00 - Material and Equipment: Product substitutions.
1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Submit typed schedule on AIA Form G702 - Standard Monthly Contractor's Requisition for Payment. Contractor's electronic media printout will be considered.
B. Submit Schedule of Values electronically 10 days after date established in Notice to Proceed.
C. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the major specification Section. Identify site mobilization, bonds and insurance.
D. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application for Payment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
(Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
(Not Used)
END OF SECTION
GCPS: Southern High School CONTRACT CONSIDERATION 01 19 00-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 01 20 50 - PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The types of minimum requirements for procedures and performance or control work of a general nature include but are not necessarily limited to the following categories: 1. Surveys and layout. 2. Trades people and workmanship standards. 3. General installation provisions. 4. Cleaning and protection.
1.3 SURVEYS AND LAYOUT
A. General: The Contractor shall be solely responsible for properly laying out the work and for all lines and measurements for all of the work executed under the Contract Documents. The Owner nor his representative will in no case assume the responsibility for laying out the work.
B. All dimensions and grades shown on Drawings are believed to be correct, but the Contractor shall verify them at the site and notify the Architect in writing of any discrepancies found before proceeding with the work; similarly as to final lines and grades established by official surveys, the Contractor shall check the Drawings against such established lines and grades and notify the Architect in writing of any discrepancies found. In the absence of such notifications, extra work caused by discrepancies shall not entitle the Contractor to additional compensation.
C. Working from lines and levels established by property survey, and as shown in relation to the work, establish and maintain two bench marks near the building and other dependable markers to set lines and levels for the work at each story of construction and elsewhere on site as needed to properly locate each element of entire project. Calculate and measure required dimensions as shown (within recognized tolerances if not otherwise indicated); do not scale drawings to determine dimensions. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the proper location and level of all the work and for the maintenance of the reference lines and benchmarks.
1.4 TRADES PERSONS AND WORKMANSHIP STANDARDS
A. General: Instigate and maintain procedures to ensure that persons performing work at site are skilled and knowledgeable in methods and craftsmanship needed to produce required quality-levels for workmanship in completed work. Remove and replace work which does not comply with workmanship standards as specified and as recognized in the construction industry for applications indicated. Remove and replace other work damaged or deteriorated by faulty workmanship or its replacement.
GCPS: Southern High School PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS 01 20 50-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs 1.5 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS
A. Installer's Inspection of Conditions: Require Installer of each major unit of work to inspect substrate to receive work, and conditions under which work will be performed, and to report, in writing to Contractor, unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Where installations include manufactured products, comply with manufacturer's applicable instructions and recommendations for installation, to extent these are more explicit or more stringent than requirements indicated in Contract Documents.
C. Inspect each item of materials or equipment immediately prior to installation and reject damaged and defective items.
D. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods for securing work properly as it is installed; true to line and level, and within recognized industry tolerances if not otherwise indicted. Allow for expansions and building movements. Provide uniform joint widths in exposed work, organized for best possible visual effect. Refer questionable visual-effect choices to the Architect for final decision.
E. Recheck measurements and dimensions of the work, as an integral step of starting each installation.
F. Install work during conditions of temperature, humidity, exposure, forecasted weather, and status of project completion which will ensure best possible results for each unit of work, in coordination with entire work. Isolate each unit of work from non-compatible work, as required to prevent deterioration.
G. Concealed Work: Coordinate enclosure of work, including backfilling, placing concrete or other work which will conceal mechanical and electrical lines, reinforcing and other items with the Architect and with required inspections and tests, so as to minimize necessity of uncovering work for that purpose. Record exact locations of mechanical, electrical and site utility work on Record Drawings.
H. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount individual units of work at industry-recognized standard mounting heights, or at heights specified by applicable codes, for applications indicated. Refer questionable mounting height choices to the Architect for final decision.
1.6 COORDINATION - MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL
A. Enclose and conceal from view wiring, conduit, ducts, heat piping, sprinkler piping, water piping and other utility lines in habitable rooms and spaces, unless otherwise shown or specified. Do not leave wiring, conduits, pipes, etc., exposed in a habitable space so as to interfere with occupancy of that room. 1. Where not otherwise shown or approved, use adjacent masonry, lath and plaster, gypsum board or other finish construction to form the enclosing chase or furring. 2. Enclose all such utilities with furring, chases or other enclosures as required, whether or not an enclosure is specifically shown.
01 20 50-2 PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs B. Locate sprinkler heads, ceiling diffusers, lighting fixtures, grilles, speakers and other similar items occurring in exposed grid suspended ceiling systems centered in lay-in panels in both directions or to fill a full ceiling grid module.
C. Coordination: Do not fabricate or install ductwork, electric conduit, pull boxes, piping and other mechanical items above suspended ceilings until the Contractor has verified that there will be no interference between trades and that the design requirements shown and specified for room construction, equipment, fixtures and finishes can be maintained. Prior to installation, promptly report to the Architect apparent interference or difficulties anticipated.
1.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. General: During handling and installation of work at project site, clean and protect work in progress and adjoining work on a basis of perpetual maintenance. Apply suitable protective covering on newly installed work where reasonably required to ensure freedom from damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion; otherwise, clean and perform maintenance on newly installed work as frequently as necessary through remainder of construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.
B. Limiting Exposure of Work: To extent possible through reasonable control and protection methods, supervise performance of work in a manner and by means which will ensure that none of the work, whether completed or in progress, will be subjected to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposures during construction period. Such exposures include where applicable (but not by way of limitation) static loading, dynamic loading, internal pressures, external pressures, high or low temperatures, thermal shock, high or low humidity, air contamination or pollution, water, ice, solvents, chemicals, light, radiation, puncture, abrasion, heavy traffic, soiling, bacteria, insect infestation, combustion, electrical current, high speed operation, improper lubrication, unusual wear, misuse, incompatible interface, destructive testing, misalignment, excessive weathering, unprotected storage, improper shipping/handling, theft and vandalism.
1.8 FIRE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
A. General: The following "Fire Safety Requirements" applies as it relates to construction of school facilities and is an integral part of this Section.
B. FIRE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OF SCHOOL FACILITIES UNDER CONSTRUCTION. School Construction: The following requirements are considered to be minimal requirements necessary to the safety of student occupants of new school facilities. It shall be the general requirement that all school facilities be fully completed prior to student occupancy. It is recognized, however, in unusual circumstances it may become necessary to provide for partial occupancy of an educational facility. In these circumstances the following fire safety requirements shall be met prior to student occupancy: 1. All required fire protection equipment and built-in fire safety devices shall be installed, tested by fire officials and approved prior to student occupancy of the facility. Include in this requirement, among others, are the following: a. Automatic sprinkler protection.
b. Complete fire alarm installation including the correct installation of
GCPS: Southern High School PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS 01 20 50-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs the annunciator panel. c. Exit lighting. d. Emergency white lighting. e. All required fire doors. f. All-weather road access to the building. g. Installation of fire extinguishers. 2. Required student egress facilities, including corridors, exit ways and walkways, leading from these required means of egress shall meet the requirements of applicable codes and be fully complete prior to student occupancy. 3. All combustible trash and debris shall be removed from the school facility prior to its occupancy. 4. Required utility services including telephone, electric light service and water service for fire protection shall be permanently installed prior to occupancy. 5. A one-hour fire rated and smoke proof separation shall be provided separating any construction area, or hazardous area, from those areas occupied by students. This fire and smoke barrier shall not have any door openings into student occupied areas. 6. During the time a school facility is occupied by students, no paint spraying, floor finishing or tiling shall be performed if the process involves flammable mastic, dusts or other flammable coatings. The use of open flame torches or welding of any kind shall not be permitted in student occupied areas. No testing or initial start-ups of boilers, furnaces or similar potentially hazardous equipment shall be performed during the time the school is occupied by students. 7. Any construction shed, trailer or storage of combustible material shall be located a minimum of thirty feet away from any school building. 8. Every effort shall be made to see that the final inspection is scheduled between the hours of 8:30 and 5:00 PM on normal County work days to assure at least a twenty-four hour time span prior to opening of the school in order to provide an appropriate time frame for notifying all interested parties involved in the outcome of the inspection. 9. Required ceiling assemblies and corridor partitioning and separation shall be fully completed prior to student occupancy. 10. All electrical wiring in student occupied areas shall be completed in a permanent fashion. There shall be no exposed wiring which could subject students to shock hazards. 11. There shall be present prior to occupancy adequate facilities for handling the trash accumulation associated with school construction. 12. Storage of combustible construction materials shall not be allowed in the school facility unless protected with an automatic sprinkler system and separated from the student area by a minimum of one hour fire separation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
01 20 50-4 PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 01 27 00 - APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of Applications for Payment.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 00 30 00 - General Conditions: Progress Payments and Final Payment.
B. Section 00 40 00 - Owner/Contractor Agreement: Contract Sum/Price and unit prices amounts of Progress Payments and Retainages time schedule for submittals.
C. Section 01 19 00 - Contract Considerations: Schedule of Values.
D. Section 01 28 00 - Change Order Procedures: Procedures for changes to the Work.
E. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal procedures.
F. Section 01 73 00 – Execution Requirements: Final Payment.
1.03 FORMAT
A. AIA Form G702 – Application and Certification for Payment and G703 – Continuation Sheet with IAC/DGS Form 305.4, Page 3 – MBE monthly.
B. For each item, provide a column for listing: Item Number; Description of work; Scheduled Value, Previous Applications: Work in Place and Site Stored Materials under this Application: Authorized Change Orders; Total Completed and Stored to Date of Application; Percentage of Completion; Balance to Finish; and Retainage.
C. Utilize Table of Contents to identify each line item with number and title of the major specification section.
1.04 PREPARATION OF APPLICATIONS
A. Present required information in typewritten form or on approved electronic media printout. Submit a minimum of four (4) copies with original signatures to Architect with Form 306.4, Page 3.
B. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer.
GCPS: Southern High School APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01 27 00-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs C. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed and for site stored products.
D. List each authorized Change Order as an extension on continuation sheet, listing Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of Work.
E. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified in Section 01 73 00.
F. Submit pencil copy in pdf. format electronically to Owner/Architect/Engineer for review and approval prior to submitting formal submission.
1.05 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Submit four (4) copies minimum of each Application for Payment with original signatures for Owner and one (1) for Architect. Submit with IAC/DGS Form 306.4, MBE Monthly Requisition.
B. Submit an updated construction schedule with each Application for Payment.
C. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement.
D. Submit under transmittal letter specified in Section 01 33 00.
1.06 SUBSTANTIATING DATA
A. When Architect/Engineer requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question.
B. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show Application number and date, and line item by number and description.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
(Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
(Not Used)
END OF SECTION
01 27 00-2 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 01 28 00 - CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Submittals.
B. Documentation of change in Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time.
C. Change procedures.
D. Construction Change Authorization Directive.
E. Stipulated Sum change order.
F. Unit price change order.
G. Time and material change order.
H. Execution of change orders.
I. Correlation of Contractor submittals.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 00 30 00 - General Conditions: Governing requirements for changes in the Work, in Contract Sum/Price, and Contract Time.
B. Section 00 35 00 - Supplementary Conditions: Percentage Allowances for Contractor's overhead and profit.
C. Section 00 40 00 Owner/Contractor Agreement Forms: Monetary values of established Unit Prices and percentage allowances for Contractor's overhead and profit.
D. Section 01 19 00 - Contract Considerations: Schedule of Values.
E. Section 01 27 00 - Applications for Payment: Payment applications.
F. Section 01 60 00 - Material and Equipment: Product options and substitutions.
G. Section 01 73 00 - Execution Requirements: Project Record Documents.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit name of the individual authorized to receive change documents and be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ or Subcontractors of changes to the Work.
B. Change Order Forms: A.I.A. Form G701 - Change Order.
GCPS: Southern High School CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01 28 00-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs
1.04 DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGE IN CONTRACT SUM/PRICE AND CONTRACT TIME
A. Maintain detailed records of work done on a time and material basis. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs of changes in the Work.
B. Document each quotation for a change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow evaluation of the quotation.
C. On request, provide additional data to support computations: 1. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment. 2. Taxes, insurance and bonds. 3. Overhead and profit. 4. Justification for any change in Contract Time. 5. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented.
D. Support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on a time and material basis, with additional information: 1. Origin and date of claim. 2. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. 3. Time records and wage rates paid. 4. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented.
1.05 CHANGE PROCEDURES
A. The Architect/Engineer will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time as authorized by AIA A201, 2017 Edition, Paragraph 7.4 by issuing supplemental instructions on AIA Form G710.
B. The Architect/Engineer may issue a Proposal Request which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change with a stipulation of any overtime work required and the period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractor will prepare and submit an estimate within fourteen (14) working days.
C. The Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to the Architect/ Engineer, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01 60 00.
1.06 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE AUTHORIZATION
A. Architect/Engineer may issue a document, signed by the Owner, instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
B. The document will describe changes in the Work and will designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time.
C. Promptly execute the change in Work.
01 28 00-2 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 1.07 STIPULATED SUM CHANGE ORDER
A. Based on Proposal Request and Contractor's fixed price quotation or Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by Architect/Engineer.
1.08 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER
A. For predetermined unit prices and quantities, the Change Order will be executed on a fixed unit price basis.
B. For unit costs or quantities of units of work which are not predetermined, execute Work under a Construction Change Authorization.
C. Changes in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time will be computed as specified for Time and Material Change Order.
1.09 TIME AND MATERIAL CHANGE ORDER
A. Submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. Architect/Engineer will determine the change allowable in Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents.
C. Maintain detailed records of work done on Time and Material basis.
D. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs for changes in the Work.
1.10 EXECUTION OF CHANGE ORDERS
A. Execution of Change Orders: Architect/Engineer will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract.
1.11 CORRELATION OF CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum/Price.
B. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub-schedules to adjust time for other items of work affected by the change and resubmit.
C. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
GCPS: Southern High School CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01 28 00-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 01 29 00 - PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Schedule of values.
B. Applications for payment.
C. Change procedures.
D. Defect assessment.
E. Unit Prices.
F. Alternates.
G. Allowances.
1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Submit printed schedule on IAC/PSCP Form 306.4 Standard Monthly Contractor’s Requisition for Payment and AIA Form G702 - Application and Certifications for Payment with AIA Form G703 - Continuation Sheet.
B. Submit Schedule of Values within ten (10) days after date established in Notice to Proceed in electronic format (pdf.) to Owner/ Architect.
C. Format: Utilize Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of major specification Section. Identify bonds as a separate cost.
D. Include, as a separate line item, the amount of Allowances included in the Contract. For unit cost Allowances, identify quantities taken from Contract Documents multiplied by unit cost to achieve total for each item.
E. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application for Payment.
1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Refer to Section 01 27 00.
B. Submit minimum of four (4) originals of each application on AIA G702 with continuation sheet for the Owner plus one (1) copy for the Architect. Must have original signature on each.
C. Content and Format: Utilize Schedule of Values for listing items in Application for Payment.
D. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement.
GCPS: Southern High School PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 1 Façade Renovations & Repairs E. Substantiating Data: When Architect/Engineer requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question.
F. Submit pencil copy electronically for review to Owner/Architect prior to submitting formal copies of application.
1.4 CHANGE PROCEDURES
A. Submittals: Submit name of individual authorized to receive change documents and be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ or Subcontractors of changes to the Work.
B. The Architect/Engineer will advise of minor changes in the Work by either responding to the Contractor’s Request for Information (RFI) or by the issuance of an Architectural Supplemental Instructions (ASI) on AIA Form G710.
C. The Architect/Engineer may issue a Request for Proposal (RFP) including a detailed description of proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications. Contractor will prepare and submit estimate within fifteen calendar (15) days.
D. Contractor may propose changes by submitting a Change Order Request (COR) to Owner/Architect describing proposed change and its full effect on the Work. Include a statement describing reason for the change, and effect on Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing effect on Work by separate or other Contractors. Document requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01 60 00.
E. Stipulated Sum/Price Change Order: Based on Proposal Request and Contractor's fixed price quotation or Contractor's request for Change Order as approved by Architect/Engineer.
F. Unit Price Change Order: For contract unit prices and quantities, the Change Order will be executed on fixed unit price basis. For unit costs or quantities of units of work which are not pre-determined, execute Work under Field Directive. Changes in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time will be computed as specified for Time and Material Change Order.
G. Field Directive: Architect/Engineer may issue directive, signed by Owner, instructing Contractor to proceed with change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. Document will describe changes in the Work, and designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time. Promptly execute change.
H. Time and Material Change Order: Submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in Conditions of the Contract. Architect/Engineer will determine change allowable in Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time as provided in Contract Documents.
I. Maintain detailed records of work done on Time and Material basis. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs for changes in the Work.
01 29 00 - 2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs J. Document each quotation for change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow evaluation of quotation.
K. Change Order Forms: Change Order Request Proposal attached at the end of this section.
L. Execution of Change Orders: The Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in Conditions of the Contract.
M. Correlation of Contractor Submittals: 1. Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as separate line item and adjust Contract Sum/Price. 2. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents.
1.5 DEFECT ASSESSMENT
A. Replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to specified requirements.
B. If, in the opinion of the Owner/Architect/Engineer, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the Owner/Architect/Engineer will direct appropriate remedy or adjust payment.
C. The defective * Work may remain, but unit sum/price will be adjusted to new sum/price at discretion of Owner/Architect/Engineer. (*At the Owner’s Option)
D. Defective * Work will be partially repaired to instructions of Architect/Engineer, and unit sum/price will be adjusted to new sum/price at discretion of Owner/Architect/Engineer. (*At the Owner’s Option)
E. Individual specification sections may modify these options or may identify specific formula or percentage sum/price reduction.
F. Authority of Owner/Architect/Engineer to assess defects and identify payment adjustments, is final.
G. Non-Payment for Rejected Products: Payment will not be made for rejected products for any of the following: 1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable. 2. Products determined as unacceptable before or after placement. 3. Products not completely unloaded from transporting vehicle. 4. Products placed beyond lines and levels of required Work. 5. Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work. 6. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected products.
1.6 UNIT PRICES
A. Unit Prices shall be used for “Extra Work” and for “Credit” work and shall be identified on the Bid Proposal Form (Refer to Section 00 20 00).
B. Authority: Measurement methods are delineated in individual specification sections.
GCPS: Southern High School PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 3 Façade Renovations & Repairs C. Measurement methods delineated in individual specification sections complement criteria of this section. In event of conflict, requirements of individual specification section govern.
D. Take measurements and compute quantities. Owner’s field representative will verify measurements and quantities. E. Unit Quantities: Actual quantities supplied or placed in the Work shall determine payment.
F. Payment Includes: Full compensation for required labor, products, tools, equipment, plant and facilities, transportation, services and incidentals; erection, application or installation of item of the Work; overhead and profit.
G. Final payment for Work governed by unit prices will be made on basis of actual measurements and quantities accepted by Architect/Engineer multiplied by unit sum/price for Work incorporated in or made necessary by the Work.
H. Measurement of Quantities: 1. Weigh Scales: Inspected, tested and certified by applicable State department. Weights and Measures department within past year. 2. Platform Scales: Of sufficient size and capacity to accommodate conveying vehicle. 3. Metering Devices: Inspected, tested and certified by applicable State department. 4. Measurement by Weight: Concrete reinforcing steel, rolled or formed steel or other metal shapes will be measured by handbook weights. Welded assemblies will be measured by handbook or scale weight. 5. Measurement by Volume: Measured by cubic dimension using mean length, width and height or thickness. 6. Measurement by Area: Measured by square dimension using mean length and width or radius. 7. Linear Measurement: Measured by linear dimension, at item centerline or mean chord. 8. Stipulated Sum/Price Measurement: Items measured by weight, volume, area, or linear means or combination, as appropriate, as completed item or unit of the Work. 9. Costs shall be quoted utilizing both prevailing wage and without prevailing wage.
I. UNIT PRICE SCHEDULE 1. Unit Price No. 1 – Gypsum Board and Painting; Qty: ___ sq. ft. 2. Unit Price No. 2 – Re-pointing of Existing Masonry; Qty: 10 sq. ft. 3. Unit Price No. 3 – VCT Tile; Qty: 1 sq. ft. 4. Unit Price No. 4 – Carpet; Qty: 1 sq. yd. 5. Unit Price No. 5 – Base; Qty:____ lin. ft. 6. Unit Price No. 6 – Ceiling Tile and Grid; Qty: 1 sq. ft. 7. Additional Electrical Outlet; Qty: __ each 8. Additional Data Jack; Qty: ___ each
1.7 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to Section 01 15 00.
01 29 00 - 4 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 1.8 ALLOWANCES
A. SELECTION AND PURCHASE 1. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise the Architect of the date when the final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the work. 2. At the Architect’s request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the work. 3. Purchase products and systems selected by the Architect from the designated supplier.
B. SUBMITTALS 1. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders. 2. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show the actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance.
C. EXAMINATION 1. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly upon delivery for damage or defects.
D. PREPARATION 1. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work.
E. SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES (TBD)
PART 2 PRODUCTS
(Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
(Not Used)
GCPS: Southern High School PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 5 Façade Renovations & Repairs GARRETT COUNTY PUBLIC SCHOOLS SOUTHERN GARRETT HIGH SCHOOL FAÇADE RENOVATIONS & REPAIRS
CHANGE ORDER REQUEST PROPOSAL
Project Name: Date:
Contractor Proposal Number:
Contractor:
Subcontractor:
Sub-Subcontractor:
C.O.R. Item or Work:
I. Direct Payroll Less Fringes, Insurance, Taxes*: II. Fringes, Tax, Insurance Burden of Payroll: III. Total Materials Costs**: IV. Material Sales Tax: V. Equipment Rentals (Attach Copy of Invoice): VI. Contractor-Owned Equipment**: VII. Total All Lines: VIII. Subcontractors Costs (Attach Breakdown): IX. Profit and Overhead on Subcontractors: X. Total Lines VII, VIII and IX:
* Provide Itemization of Labor Hours and Worker Classification ** Provide Itemization.
Change Order Request Form is Required for Each Portion of Change Order Request Submission
END OF SECTION
01 29 00 - 6 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 01 31 00 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Coordination and project conditions.
B. Field engineering.
C. Preconstruction meeting.
D. Site mobilization meeting.
E. Progress meetings.
F. Preinstallation meetings.
1.2 COORDINATION AND PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of various sections of Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements , with provisions for accommodating items installed later.
B. Verify utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, operating equipment.
C. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical Work indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.
D. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
E. Coordinate completion and clean-up of Work of separate sections in preparation for Substantial Completion and for portions of Work designated for Owner's partial occupancy.
F. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.
GCPS: Southern High School ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 31 00 - 1 Façade Renovations & Repairs 1.3 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. The General Contractor shall employ a Land Surveyor registered in the State of Maryland and acceptable to Owner/Architect/Engineer.
B. Locate and protect survey control and reference points. Promptly notify Architect/Engineer of discrepancies discovered.
C. Control datum for survey is that shown on Drawings.
D. Verify set-backs and easements; confirm drawing dimensions and elevations.
E. Provide field engineering services. Establish elevations, lines, and levels, utilizing recognized engineering survey practices.
F. Submit copy of site drawing and certificate signed by Land Surveyor certifying elevations and locations of the Work are in conformance with Contract Documents.
G. Maintain complete and accurate log of control and survey work as Work progresses.
H. On completion of foundation walls and major site improvements, prepare certified survey illustrating dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and site work.
I. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction.
J. Promptly report to General Contractor loss or destruction of reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons.
K. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Architect/Engineer.
1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. The Owner/Architect will schedule meeting after Notice of Award.
B. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect/Engineer, and Contractor.
C. Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of products, schedule of values, and progress schedule. 5. Designation of personnel representing parties in Contract, and Architect/ Engineer.
01 31 00 - 2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 7. Scheduling. 8. Scheduling activities of Geotechnical Engineer.
D. The Architect will record minutes and distribute copies within seven (7) days after meeting to major participants.
1.5 SITE MOBILIZATION MEETING
A. Owner/Architect will schedule meeting at Project site prior to Contractor occupancy.
B. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect/Engineer, Special Consultants, and Contractor, Contractor's Superintendent, and major Subcontractors.
C. Agenda: 1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. 2. Owner's requirements and partial occupancy. 3. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner. 4. Temporary utilities provided by Contractor. 5. Survey and building layout. 6. Security and housekeeping procedures. 7. Schedules. 8. Application for payment procedures. 9. Procedures for testing. 10. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 11. Requirements for start-up of equipment. 12. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period.
D. The Architect will record minutes and distribute copies within seven (7) days after meeting to participants.
1.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. The Owner/Architect will schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at minimum of two (2) week intervals.
B. The General Contractor will make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings.
C. Attendance Required: Contractor, major subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, Architect/Engineer, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.
D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress.
GCPS: Southern High School ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 31 00 - 3 Façade Renovations & Repairs 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems impeding planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to Work.
E. The Architect will record minutes and distribute copies within seven (7) days after meeting to participants.
1.7 PREINSTALLATION MEETING
A. When required in individual specification sections, convene pre-installation meeting at Project site prior to commencing work of specific section.
B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, Work of specific section.
C. Notify Owner/Architect/Engineer seven (7) days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work.
E. The Contractor will record minutes and distribute copies within seven (7) days after meeting to participants.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
(NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
(NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01 31 00 - 4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 01 31 10 - CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included: To assure adequate planning and execution of the Work so that the Work is completed within the number of calendar days allowed in the Contract, and to assist the Architect in appraising the reasonableness of the proposed schedule and in evaluating progress of the Work, prepare and maintain the schedules and reports described in Section.
B. Related Work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 2. Requirements for Progress Schedule: General Conditions. 3. Construction Period: Form of Agreement.
C. Definitions: 1. “Day,” as used throughout the Contract unless otherwise stated, means “calendar day”.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Employ a scheduler who is thoroughly trained and experienced in compiling construction schedule data, and in preparing and issuing periodic reports as required below.
B. Perform data preparation, analysis, charting, and updating in accordance with standards approved by the Architect.
C. Reliance upon the approved schedule: 1. The construction schedule as approved by the Architect will be an integral part of the Contract and will establish interim completion dates for the various activities under the Contract. 2. Should any activity not be completed within 10 days after the stated scheduled date, the Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to expedite completion of the activity by whatever means the Owner deems appropriate and necessary, without additional compensation to the Contractor 3. Should any activity be 15 days or more behind schedule, the Owner shall have the right to perform the activity or have the activity performed by whatever method the Owner deems appropriated. 4. Costs incurred by the Owner and by the Architect in connection with expediting construction activity under this Article shall be reimbursed by the Contractor. 5. It is expressly understood and agreed that failure by the Owner to exercise the option either to order the Contractor to expedite an activity or to expedite the activity by other means shall not be considered to set a precedent for any other activities.
GCPS: Southern High School CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01 31 10 - 1 Façade Renovations & Repairs 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Preliminary Analysis: Within ten (10) calendar days after Contractor has received the Owner’s Notice to Proceed, submit a preliminary construction schedule prepared in accordance with Article 3.1 of this Section electronically in pdf. format to Owner/Architect.
C. Construction Schedule: Within ten (10) calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner’s Notice to Proceed, submit a preliminary construction schedule prepared in accordance with Article 3.2 of this Section electronically in pdf. format to Owner/Architect.
D. Periodic Reports: On the first working day of each month following the submittal described in Paragraph 1.3-C above, submit the construction schedule updated as described in Article 3.3 of this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONSTRUCTION ANALYSIS
A. Graphically show by bar-chart the order and interdependence of all activities necessary to complete the Work, and the sequence in which each activity is to be accomplished, as planned by the Contractor and his project field superintendent in coordination with all subcontractors whose work is shown on the diagram.
B. Include, but do not necessarily limit indicated activities to: 1. Project mobilization; 2. Submittal and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples; 3. Procurement of equipment and critical materials; 4. Fabrication of special material and equipment, and its installation and testing; 5. Final cleanup; 6. Final inspecting and testing; and 7. All activities by the Architect that affect progress, required dates for completion, or both, for all and each part of the Work.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PRELIMINARY ANALYSIS
A. Contents: 1. Show all activities of the Contractor under this Work for the period between receipt of Notice to Proceed and submittal of construction schedule required under Paragraph 1.3-C above;
01 31 10 - 2 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 2. Show the Contractor’s general approach to remainder of the Work; 3. Show cost of all activities scheduled for performance before submittal and approval of the construction schedule.
B. Submit in accordance with Paragraph 1.3-B above.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. As soon as practicable after receipt of Notice to Proceed, complete the construction analysis in preliminary form, meet with the Architect, review contents of the proposed construction schedule, and make revisions agreed upon.
B. Submit in accordance with Paragraph 1.3-C above.
3.3 PERIODIC REPORTS
A. As required under Paragraph 1.3-D above, update the approved construction schedule. 1. Indicate “actual” progress in percent completion for each activity; 2. Provide written narrative summary of revisions causing delay in the program, and an explanation of corrective actions taken or proposed.
3.4 REVISIONS
A. Make only those revisions to approved construction schedule as are approved in advance by the Architect.
END OF SECTION
GCPS: Southern High School CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01 31 10 - 3 Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following: 1. Shop Drawings 2. Product Data 3. Samples 4. Color/Pattern Selection 5. Maintenance/Operation Manuals 6. Warranties/Bonds 7. Other submittals required by the Contract Documents, and re-submittals necessary to establish compliance with the specified requirements. 8. Submittal cover sheet.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. All Bid Documents, including, but not limited to: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Instructions to Bidders, Supplemental Instructions to bidders, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Addenda and Division 1 of these Specifications Sections, apply to this section.
B. Related Sections: Individual requirements for submittals also may be described in pertinent Sections of these Specifications. The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section. 1. Section 01 29 00 - Price and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements 3. Various Sections - Warranties
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Work-related submittals of this section are categorized for convenience as follows, but not limited to: 1. Shop Drawings: Include specially-prepared technical data for this Project, including drawings, diagrams, performance curves, data sheets, schedules, templates, patterns, reports, calculations, instructions, measurements and similar information not in standard print for general application to a range of similar projects. 2. Product Data: Includes standard printed information on materials, products and systems; not specially-prepared for this project, other than the designation of selections from among available choices printed therein. 3. Samples: Includes both fabricated and un-fabricated physical examples of materials, products and units of work; both as complete units and as smaller portions of units of work; either for limited visual inspection or (where indicated) for more detailed testing and analysis.
GCPS: Southern High School SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 1 Façade Renovations & Repairs 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Coordination of Submittals: 1. Prior to each transmittal of a submittal, carefully review, verify and coordinate all aspects of each item being submitted. 2. Verify that each item and the submittal for it conform in all respects with the specified requirements. 3. Each copy of all submittals shall bear the required Contractor’s Certification Stamp indicating that his review, verification and coordination has been performed. 4. Any submittals not bearing said stamp will be returned to the Contractor for re- submission without further consideration, in such event, it will be deemed that the Contractor has not complied with this requirement and that the Contractor shall bear the risk of all delays to the same extent as if no submittal had been made. 5. Identification of Submittals: Place a copy of the submittal cover sheet on each copy of all submittals for identification. On the cover sheet indicate the: a. Project name b. Date c. The name of the Contractor that prepared the submittal d. Specification Section Number, Title and item reference within, if applicable e. Drawing sheet number and detail reference(s), designation(s) f. Any submittals that do not include the required cover sheet shall be returned to the Contractor for resubmission. 6. Submittal Transmittal Requirements: a. Submit original b. Identify items from only one Division of the Contract Documents on each transmittal, i.e. do not list items from Division 8 and 9 on the same transmittal. 7. Resubmittals: a. Reference the original submittal number on your new transmittal, eg. Resubmittal of “23 00 00-001” or “23 00 00-001R”.
1.5 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Contractors responsibilities for compliance with the requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved by Architects/Consulting Engineer’s review of submittals
B. Notify Architect, in writing at time of submittal, of any deviations from requirements of Contract Documents.
C. Begin no work which requires submittals until return of submittals with Architect/Consulting Engineer’s stamp and initials or signature indicating review.
D. After Architect/Consulting Engineer’s review, the General Contractor will distribute submittal copies to involved Contractors. Contractors shall ascertain that they have received all submittal information to properly execute and coordinate their work.
01 33 00 - 2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs E. When a shop drawing or other submittal must be resubmitted by the Contractor, no changes other than those required as a result of the previous submission shall be made without the Architect/Consulting Engineer being made aware of the change. If such changes are made without so advising the Architect/Consulting Engineer, the Contractor will assume all responsibility for the possible consequences.
F. No portion of the work requiring a shop drawing, sample, or catalog data shall be started nor shall any materials be fabricated or installed prior to the review of such item.
1.6 PROCESSING OF SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: 1. The Contractor shall, within fifteen (15) calendar days (or sooner, if required elsewhere in the Contract Documents) after receiving the Owner’s signed Contract, Notice to Proceed, or “Letter of Intent”, forward all submittals to the Architect for review and/or approval. 2. Transmittal of Submittals: a. Transmit each submittal from Contractor to Architect using a transmittal form. b. Record on transmittal form deviations from Contract Documents requirements, including minor variations and limitations. Include the Contractor’s Certificate that the information complies with the Contract Document’s requirements.
1.7 CONTRACTORS “SUBMITTAL STAMP”
A. Representation: By his submittal of any shop drawings, samples, and product data, the Contractor thereby represents that he has determined and verified all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials dimensions, catalog numbers and similar data, or will do so; and that he has checked and coordinated each item with other applicable approved shop drawings and the Contract Documents requirements.
B. The Contractor shall stamp all shop drawings, samples and product date with the following certification:
“I certify that the specification requirements have been met and all dimensions, conditions and quantities are verified as shown and/or corrected on this submittal.”
Signed: (For) Contractor
Date:
C. Submittals received without the above certification will be returned, not reviewed.
GCPS: Southern High School SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 3 Façade Renovations & Repairs 1.8 SUBSTITUTION REJECTION
A. If a non approved substitution is submitted, it will be returned “Submit Specified Item”. Only previously approved substitutions will be reviewed. Refer to Section 01 60 00 for substitution request procedures.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
(Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Before submitting shop drawings for the Architect’s review, the Contractor shall check them for accuracy, shall ascertain that all work contiguous with and having bearing on other work shown on shop drawings is accurately drawn and that the work is in conformity with the Contract Document requirements. 1. The submission of shop drawings or re-submission of corrected shop drawings constitutes evidence that the Contractor accepts and is willing to perform the work as shown, in a workmanlike manner, and in accordance with the best standard practice. 2. Verify: a. Field measurements b. Field construction criteria c. Catalog numbers and similar data
B. Types of prints and copies required: 1. Submit electronic (PDF) files of each required Shop Drawings indicating accurately and in scale sufficiently large enough to show all pertinent aspects of the item and its method of connection to the work. 2. Review comments of the Architect or his Consultant Engineer will be shown on the returned files. The General Contractor will print copies from the electronic for his needs. 3. The Architect/Consulting Engineers distribute the shop drawings for the Owner and their use. 4. Electronic files shall be labeled to match the submittal number.
C. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken in connection with construction.
D. Copies of approved shop drawings shall be maintained on site.
01 33 00 - 4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 3.2 PRODUCT DATA
A. Before submitting product data for Architect’s review, the Contractor shall assemble the Product Data into a single electronic submittal for each element of construction or system, including printed formation such as manufacturer’s installation instructions, catalog cuts, color charts, letter of certification, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams, performance curves, maintenance data, calculations and schedules. 1. Provide three (3) original copies of color charts in addition to electronic copy.
B. Mark copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes information on several products, mark copies to indicate those items being submitted.
C. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has been confirmed.
3.3 SAMPLES
A. Before submitting samples to the Architect for approval, the Contractor shall assure himself that material represented thereby conforms to Contract Requirements and is readily available in the quantity required.
B. Provide samples identical to the precise article proposed to be provided. 1. Identify as described in “Identification of Submittals”. 2. Provide samples of the size required when a specific sample size is noted.
C. Number of samples required: 1. Unless otherwise specified, submit two (2) sets of each sample. 2. By prearrangement in specific cases, a single sample may be submitted for review and, when approved, be installed in the work at a location agreed upon by the Architect.
D. Field samples/mock-ups: Of sufficient size to clearly illustrate functional characteristics of product or material unless otherwise indicated by the projects Architect. 1. Construct each complete, including work of all trades required in finished work.
3.4 COLORS, FINISH AND/OR PATTERN SELECTION
A. Submit the precise color and pattern that is specifically called out in the Contract Documents unless a choice of colors or patterns are requested.
B. Number of Copies Required: 1. Submit three (3) color or pattern samples of each specified item requiring color and/or pattern selection.
GCPS: Southern High School SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 5 Façade Renovations & Repairs 3.5 ELECTRONIC BACKGROUNDS
A. If the Contractor and/or subcontractors require an electronic file of a construction document, only plan backgrounds will be provided at a cost of $35.00 per drawing plus $15.00 architectural handling fee. Total $50.00 per drawing. 1. Backgrounds will be released with no title blocks. 2. Architect’s/Engineer’s drawings that are resubmitted as a shop drawing will be rejected.
B. Request must be made in writing to the Architect by the General Contractor.
C. Electronic files will not be released until a check is submitted made to the order of Bushey Feight Morin Architects.
3.6 CONSULTANT REVIEWS
A. A maximum of two (2) reviews will be provided by the A/E consultants.
B. If a third or more consultant reviews are required, the Contractor will be invoiced on a time and material basis. 1. The cost of additional reviews will be invoiced to the General Contractor with payment due in thirty (30) calendar days from the date of the invoice.
END OF SECTION
01 33 00 - 6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Quality control and control of installation.
B. Tolerances
C. References.
D. Manufacturers' field services.
E. Examination.
F. Preparation.
1.2 QUALITY CONTROL AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
C. When manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.
E. Perform Work by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.
F. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings or as instructed by manufacturer.
G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement.
1.3 TOLERANCES
A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.
B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. When manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.
GCPS: Southern High School QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 1 Façade Renovations & Repairs 1.4 REFERENCES
A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.
B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date for receiving bids, except where specific date is established by code.
C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.
D. When specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
E. Neither contractual relationships, duties, nor responsibilities of parties in Contract nor those of Architect/Engineer shall be altered from Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in reference documents.
1.5 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES
A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.
B. Submit qualifications of observer to Owner/General Contractor/Architect/Engineer 30 days in advance of required observations. Observer subject to approval of Owner.
C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.
D. Refer to Section 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, MANUFACTURERS' FIELD REPORTS article.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
(Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions.
B. Verify existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new Work being applied or attached.
C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.
01 40 00 - 2 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs D. Verify utility services are available, of correct characteristics, and in correct locations.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.
B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.
C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying new material or substance in contact or bond.
END OF SECTION
GCPS: Southern High School QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 3 Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 01 41 00 - PROJECT COORDINATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Project coordination administrator.
B. Construction mobilization.
C. Schedules.
D. Submittals.
E. Coordination drawings.
F. Closeout procedures.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 31 00 – Administrative Requirements: Project meetings and Pre- construction conferences.
B. Section 01 70 00 - Contract Closeout: Contract closeout procedures.
1.03 PROJECT COORDINATION ADMINISTRATOR
A. Project Coordination Administrator: Owner.
1.04 CONSTRUCTION MOBILIZATION
A. Cooperate with the Administrator in allocation of mobilization areas of site; for field offices and sheds, for access, traffic, and parking facilities.
B. During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Administrator.
C. Comply with Administrator's procedures for intra-project communications; submittals, reports and records, schedules, coordination drawings, and recommendations; and resolution of ambiguities and conflicts.
D. Comply with instructions of the Administrator for use of temporary utilities and construction facilities.
E. Coordinate filed engineering and layout work under instructions of the Administrator.
1.05 SCHEDULES
A. Refer to Section 01 31 00.
B. Submit bar chart preliminary progress schedule in electronic format (pdf.).
GCPS: Southern High School PROJECT COORDINATION 01 41 00-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs C. After review, revise and resubmit schedule to comply with revised Project schedule.
D. During progress of Work, revise and resubmit with Applications for Payment.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit preliminary shop drawings, product data and samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 for review and compliance with Contract Documents, for field dimensions and clearances, for relation to available space, and for relation to work of separate contracts. Revise and resubmit as required.
B. Submit Applications for Payment on A.I.A. Form G702 and G703 for review, and for transmittal to Architect/Engineer.
C. Submit requests for interpretation of Contract Documents and obtain instructions through Architect/Engineer.
D. Process requests for substitutions, and change orders, through Administrator.
E. Deliver closeout submittals for review and preliminary inspection reports, for transmittal to Architect/Engineer.
1.07 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Provide information required by Division 23 and 26 for preparation of coordination drawings.
B. Review drawings prior to submission to Architect/Engineer.
1.08 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Notify Administrator when Work is considered ready for Substantial Completion. Accompany Administrator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or correction in Contractor's notice of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with Administrator's instructions to correct items of Work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and for access to Owner occupied areas.
C. Notify Administrator when Work is considered finally complete.
D. Comply with Administrator's instructions for completion of items of Work determined by the Architect/Engineer's final inspection.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
01 41 00-2 PROJECT COORDINATION GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 01 45 00 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of Work.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary of Work: Work by Owner or by separate contractors.
B. Section 01 33 00 - Submittals Procedures.
C. Section 01 60 00 - Materials and Equipment: Product Options and Substitutions.
D. Section 02 41 16 - Demolition.
E. Individual Product Specification Sections: 1. Cutting and patching incidental to work of the Section. 2. Advance notification to other Sections of openings required in work of those Sections. 3. Limitations on cutting structural members. 4. Each specification section of the Work shall be responsible for their own cutting and patching as it relates to their work.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor.
B. Include in request: 1. Identification of Project. 2. Location and description of affected work. 3. Necessity for cutting or alteration. 4. Description of proposed work, and products to be used. 5. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 6. Effect on work of Owner or separate contractor. 7. Written permission of affected separate contractor. 8. Date and time work will be executed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Primary Products: Those required for original installation.
GCPS: Southern High School CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 45 00-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs B. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect existing conditions prior to commencing Work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching.
B. After uncovering existing work, inspect conditions affecting performance of work.
C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary supports to ensure structural integrity of the Work. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage.
B. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering work.
C. Maintain construction free of water.
3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill to complete work.
B. Fit products together, to integrate with other work.
C. Uncover work to install ill-timed work.
D. Remove and replace defective or non-conforming work.
E. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.
F. Provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work.
3.04 PERFORMANCE
A. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing.
B. Employ original installer to perform cutting and patching for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight-exposed surfaces.
C. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval.
D. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
01 45 00-2 CUTTING AND PATCHING GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs E. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.
F. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material to full thickness of the penetrated element.
G. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.
END OF SECTION
GCPS: Southern High School CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 45 00-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Temporary Utilities: 1. Temporary electricity. 2. Temporary lighting for construction purposes. 3. Temporary heating. 4. Temporary cooling. 5. Temporary ventilation. 6. Telephone service. 7. Facsimile service. 8. High Speed Internet service 9. Temporary water service. 10. Temporary sanitary facilities.
B. Construction Facilities: 1. Field offices and sheds. 2. Parking. 3. Progress cleaning and waste removal. 4. Project identification. 5. Fire prevention facilities.
C. Temporary Controls: 1. Barriers. 2. Enclosures and fencing. 3. Security. 4. Dust control. 5. Noise control. 6. Pest control. 7. Pollution control. 8. Rodent control.
D. Removal of utilities, facilities, and controls.
1.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY
A. Contractor may connect to existing power service required from utility source as needed for construction operation.
B. Complement existing power service capacity and characteristics as required for construction operations.
C. Provide power outlets, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located as required for construction operations. Provide flexible power cords as required for portable construction tools and equipment.
D. Provide main service disconnect and over-current protection at convenient location.
E. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction.
GCPS: Southern High School TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 1 Façade Renovations & Repairs F. Provide distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch circuits for power and lighting. 1. Provide 20 ampere duplex outlets, single phase circuits for power tools for every 500 sq ft of active work area. 2. Provide 20 ampere, single phase branch circuits for lighting.
1.3 TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES
A. Provide and maintain incandescent lighting for construction operations to achieve minimum lighting level of 2 watt/sq ft.
B. Provide and maintain 1 watt/sq ft lighting to exterior staging and storage areas after dark for security purposes.
C. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps for specified lighting levels.
D. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.
E. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction.
1.4 TEMPORARY HEATING
A. Provide and pay for heating devices and heat as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations or Owner use of facilities.
B. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated, and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts.
C. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in product sections.
1.5 TEMPORARY COOLING
A. Provide and pay for cooling devices and cooling as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations.
B. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary cooling purposes, verify installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated, and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts.
C. Maintain maximum ambient temperature of 80 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications.
1.6 TEMPORARY VENTILATION
A. Ventilate enclosed areas to achieve curing of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
B. Utilize existing ventilation equipment. Extend and supplement equipment with temporary fan units as required to maintain clean air for construction operations.
01 50 00 - 2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 1.7 TELEPHONE SERVICE
A. Provide, maintain, and pay for cell phone service for Contractor’s project manager and field superintendent at time of project mobilization.
1.8 FACSIMILE SERVICE (NOT REQUIRED)
A. Provide, maintain and pay for facsimile service and dedicated telephone line at time of project mobilization.
1.9 HIGH SPEED INTERNET SERVICE
A. High speed internet system is not required, but Superintendent/Foreman MUST be able to send, received, and view emails and attached files onsite for the duration of the project.
1.10 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE
A. Connect to existing water service as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations.
B. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded connections. Provide temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing.
C. Conserve water use. Owner reserves the right to change for excessive use.
1.11 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Existing facility use may be permitted. However, this privilege can be revoked if facilities are disrespected or found unsanitary due to construction personnel.
1.12 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS
A. Field office not required.
B. Contractor shall provide temporary storage trailer to stock pile materials and equipment.
1.13 PARKING
A. Park in spaces as designated by Owner.
B. Coordinate heavy vehicles or construction equipment in parking areas. Patch and repair any damage created due to construction operations.
C. Maintenance: 1. Maintain traffic and parking areas in sound condition free of excavated material, construction equipment, products, mud, snow, and ice. 2. Maintain existing and permanent paved areas used for construction; promptly repair breaks, potholes, low areas, standing water, and other deficiencies, to maintain paving and drainage in original, or specified, condition.
GCPS: Southern High School TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 3 Façade Renovations & Repairs D. Removal and Repair: 1. Remove temporary materials and construction when permanent paving is usable before at Substantial Completion. 2. Remove underground work and compacted materials to depth of 2 feet; fill and grade site as specified. 3. Repair permanent facilities damaged by use, to specified condition.
1.14 PROGRESS CLEANING AND WASTE REMOVAL
A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in clean and orderly condition.
B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing spaces.
C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust.
D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site weekly and dispose off-site.
E. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids.
F. Clean all roadways as required.
1.15 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
A. Project Identification Sign: 1. One painted sign, 32 sq ft area, bottom 6 feet above ground. 2. Content: a. Project number, title, logo and name of Owner as indicated on Contract Documents. b. Names and titles of authorities. c. Names and titles of Architect/Engineer and Consultants. d. Name of Prime Contractor. 3. Graphic Design, Colors, Style of Lettering: Designated by Architect/Engineer.
B. Project Informational Signs: 1. Painted informational signs of same colors and lettering as Project Identification sign, or standard products; size lettering for legibility at 100 feet distance. 2. Provide sign at each field office, storage shed, and directional signs to direct traffic into and within site. Relocate as Work progress requires. 3. Provide municipal traffic agency directional traffic signs to and within site. 4. No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law.
C. Design sign and structure to withstand 60 miles/hr wind velocity.
D. Sign Painter: Experienced as professional sign painter for minimum three years.
01 50 00 - 4 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs E. Finishes, Painting: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for duration of construction.
F. Show content, layout, lettering, color, foundation, structure, sizes, and grades of members.
G. Sign Materials: 1. Structure and Framing: New wood structurally adequate. 2. Sign Surfaces: Exterior grade plywood with medium density overlay, minimum 3/4 inches thick, standard large sizes to minimize joints. 3. Rough Hardware: Galvanized. 4. Paint and Primers: Exterior quality, two coats; sign background of color as selected. 5. Lettering: Pre-cut vinyl self-adhesive products, white.
H. Installation: 1. Install project identification sign within 15 days after date fixed by Notice to Proceed. 2. Erect at designated location. Erect supports and framing on secure foundation, rigidly braced and framed to resist wind loadings. 3. Install sign surface plumb and level, with butt joints. Anchor securely. 4. Paint exposed surfaces of sign, supports, and framing.
I. Maintenance: Maintain signs and supports clean, repair deterioration and damage.
J. Removal: Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations at completion of Project and restore area.
1.16 FIRE PREVENTION FACILITIES
A. Smoking of any type is prohibited on school property.
B. Establish fire watch for cutting and welding and other hazardous operations capable of starting fires. Maintain fire watch before, during, and after hazardous operations until threat of fire does not exist.
C. Portable Fire Extinguishers: NFPA 10; 10 pound capacity, 4A-60B: C UL rating. 1. Provide one fire extinguisher at each stair on each floor of buildings under construction and demolition. 2. Provide minimum one fire extinguisher in every construction trailer and storage shed. 3. Provide minimum one fire extinguisher on roof during roofing operations using heat producing equipment.
1.17 BARRIERS
A. Provide weatherproof barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition.
B. Provide barricades and walkways required by authorities having jurisdiction for public rights-of-way.
C. Provide protection for plants designated to remain. Replace damaged plants.
GCPS: Southern High School TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 5 Façade Renovations & Repairs D. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.
1.18 ENCLOSURES AND FENCING
A. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence.
B. Provide 8 feet high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. Relocate fence sections and supports as required by Owner or authority having jurisdiction for duration of construction activities.
C. Exterior Enclosures: 1. Provide temporary insulated weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks.
1.19 SECURITY
A. Security Program: 1. Protect Work from theft, vandalism, and unauthorized entry. 2. Initiate program at project mobilization. 3. Maintain program throughout construction period until Owner acceptance precludes need for Contractor security.
B. Entry Control: 1. Restrict entrance of persons and vehicles into Project site and existing facilities. 2. Allow entrance only to authorized persons with proper identification. 3. Maintain log of workers and visitors, make available to Owner on request.
C. Restrictions: 1. Do not allow cameras on site or photographs taken except by written approval of Owner.
1.20 DUST CONTROL
A. Execute Work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations.
B. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere.
1.21 NOISE CONTROL
A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction operations.
1.22 PEST CONTROL
A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects from damaging the Work and entering facility.
01 50 00 - 6 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 1.23 POLLUTION CONTROL
A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations.
B. Comply with pollution and environmental control requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.24 RODENT CONTROL
A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing or invading premises.
1.25 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS
A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, and prior to Substantial Completion inspection.
B. Remove underground installations to minimum depth of 2 feet or as indicated on Drawings.
C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.
D. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
(Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
(Not Used)
END OF SECTION
GCPS: Southern High School TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 7 Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 01 54 60 - SAFETY AND HEALTH
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR): 1. OSHA General Industry Safety and Health Standards (29 CFR 1910), Publication V2206; OSHA Construction Industry Standards (29 CFR 1926). 2. National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (40 CFR, Part 61). 3. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Final Rule (40 CFR Part 761) dated July 17, 1985.
C. Federal Standard (Fed. Std): 1. 313A Material Safety Data Sheets, Preparation and the Submission of.
D. Maryland Standards: 1. Maryland Occupational Safety and Health (MOSH) Supplement to OSHA.
1.3 WORK COVERED BY THIS SECTION
A. This section is applicable to all work.
B. A Site-Specific Safety and Health Plan is to be developed by the Contractor and shall be adhered to in the execution of the work. The Plan shall include an overview of procedures, reports and samples of forms and documents for the plan. The contractor shall provide a copy of his safety plan to the Construction Manager.
1.4 DEFINITION OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
A. Refer to hazardous and toxic materials/substances included in Subparts H and Z of 29 CFR 1910; and to others as additionally defined in Fed. Std. 313. Those most commonly encountered include asbestos, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB’s), explosives, and radioactive material, but many include others. The most likely products to contain asbestos are sprayed-on fireproofing, insulation, boiler lagging, pipe covering and likely products to contain PCB’s are transformers, capacitors, voltage regulators, and oil switches.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Safety Meeting: Representatives of the Contractor shall meet with the Owner and his/her representative(s) prior to the start of work under this contract for the purpose or reviewing the Contractor’s safety and health programs and discussing implementation of all safety and health provisions pertinent to the work to be performed under the contract. The Contractor shall be prepared to discuss in detail, the measures he/she intends to take
GCPS: Southern High School SAFETY AND HEALTH 01 54 60 - 1 Façade Renovations & Repairs in order to control any unsafe or unhealthy conditions associated with the work to be performed under the contract. If directed by the Owner, this meeting may be held in conjunction with other meetings which are scheduled to take place prior to start of work under this contract. The level of detail for the safety meeting is dependent upon the nature of the work and the potential inherent hazards. The Contractor’s principal on-site representative(s), the general superintendent and his/her safety representative(s) shall attend this meeting.
B. Compliance with Regulations: All work, including contact with and handling of hazardous materials, the disturbance or dismantling of structures containing hazardous materials and/or the disposal of hazardous materials shall comply with the applicable requirements of 29 CFR 1926/1910 and 40 CFR 761. All work shall comply with applicable state and municipal safety and health requirements. Where there is a conflict between applicable regulations, the most stringent shall apply.
C. Contractor Responsibility: The Contractor shall assume full responsibility and liability for compliance with all applicable regulations pertaining to the health and safety of personnel during the execution of work and shall hold the Owner harmless for any action on his/her part or that of his/her employees or subcontractors, which results in illness, injury or death.
1.6 SUBMITTAL
A. Site-Specific Safety and Health Plan: The Contractor’s Safety and Health Plan is to be submitted for approval during the initial submittals for the project.
B. Accident Reporting: A copy of each accident report, which the Contractors or subcontractors submit to their insurance carriers, shall be forwarded to the Owner as soon as possible, but in no event later than seven (7) calendar days after the day the accident occurred.
C. Permits: If hazardous materials are disposed of off-site, submit copies of permits from applicable, Federal, state or municipal authorities and necessary certificates that the material has been disposed of as per regulations.
D. Other Submittals: If agreed to in writing at the safety meeting, other submittals shall be required. One such submittal which may be included is a plan of action for handling hazardous materials, which shall contain the following: 1. Number, type, and experience of employees to be used for the work 2. Description of how applicable safety and health regulations and standards are to be met. 3. Type of protective equipment and work procedures to be used 4. Emergency procedures for accidental spills or exposures 5. Procedures for disposing of or storing the toxic/hazardous materials 6. Identification of possible hazards, problems, and proposed control mechanisms 7. Protection of public or others not related to the operation 8. Interfacing and control of subcontractors, if any 9. Identifications of any required analyses, test demonstrations, and validation requirements. 10. Method of certification for compliance
01 54 60 - 2 SAFETY AND HEALTH GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Special facilities, devices, equipment, clothing, and similar items used by the Contractor in the execution of work shall comply with the applicable regulations.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Material Safety Data Sheets: Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) shall be kept on file in the Contractor’s Field Office and made available for review when required.
3.2 SAFETY AND HEALTH PLAN
A. Site-Specific Safety and Health Plan: Post copies of the plan in conspicuous location so that all personnel may be made aware of the safety procedures at all times.
3.3 STOP WORK ORDERS
A. When the Contractors or his/her subcontractors are notified by the Owner/Architect of any noncompliance with the provisions of the contract and the action(s) to be taken, the Contractor shall immediately, if so directed, or within 48 hours after receipt of a notice of violation correct the unsafe or unhealthy condition. If the Contractor fails to comply promptly, all or any part of the work being performed may be stopped by the Owner/Architect with a “Stop Work Order”. When, in the opinion of the Owner/Architect, satisfactory corrective action has been taken to correct the unsafe and unhealthy condition, a start order will be given immediately. The Contractor shall not be allowed any extension of time or compensation for damages by reason of or in connection with such work stoppage.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent injury to the public, or damage to property of others. For the purposes of this contract, the public shall include all persons not employed by the Prime Contractor’s or a subcontractor working under his/her direction.
B. Storing, positioning or use of equipment, tools, materials, scraps, and trash in a manner likely to present a hazard to the public by its accidental shifting, ignition, or other hazardous qualities is prohibited.
C. Public Thoroughfare: When work is to be performed over a public thoroughfare such as a sidewalk, the thoroughfare shall be closed, if possible, or other precautions taken such as the installation of screen or barricades. When the exposure to heavy falling objects exists, as during the erection of building walls, special protection of the type detailed in 29 CFR 1910/1926 shall be provided.
D. Fences and barricades shall be removed upon completion of the project, in accordance with local ordinance and to the satisfaction of the General Contractor.
END OF SECTION
GCPS: Southern High School SAFETY AND HEALTH 01 54 60 - 3 Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Products.
B. Product delivery requirements.
C. Product storage and handling requirements.
D. Product options.
E. Product substitution procedures.
1.2 PRODUCTS
A. Furnish products of qualified manufacturers suitable for intended use. Furnish products of each type by single manufacturer unless specified otherwise.
1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS
A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.
C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.
1.4 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS
A. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
B. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.
C. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product.
D. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.
E. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. Off-site storage must be located within the State of Maryland.
F. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products.
GCPS: Southern High School PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1 Façade Renovations & Repairs G. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter.
H. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.
I. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.
1.5 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those standards or description.
B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: products of one of manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.
C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with Provision for Substitutions: Submit request for substitution for any manufacturer not named in accordance with the following article.
1.6 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
A. If the specification has listed three (3) or more product lines, substitutions will not be considered. Where less than three (3) manufacturers or products are listed in the Specifications, or the specification lists “Approved Equal” as an acceptable product, the burden of proof of equivalency rests with the Contractor and evidence shall be submitted to the Architect and approved by Architect with final approval to be determined by the Owner. Criteria includes but is not limited to performance, materials, craftsmanship, quality control, certification procedures or requirements, warranty, installation procedures, etc..
B. Any proposed substitution, or proposed equal product, must be submitted to the Architect for review, 10 days prior to the bid date. After the receipt of bids and award of the Contract, the Owner and Architect are under no obligation to review or approve requests for substitution or equal products that were not specifically mentioned in the Specifications. The Owner reserves the right to request a substitution at any time in the project.
C. Substitutions may be considered during construction when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
D. During construction, substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on Shop Drawing or Product Data submittals, without prior separate written request, or approval, or when acceptance will require revision to Contract Documents.
01 60 00 - 2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs E. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit request for Substitution for consideration electronically in pdf. format. Limit each request to one proposed Substitution. 2. Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, and certified test results attesting to proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. Architect/Engineer will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. 4. If a substitution is found acceptable, the Contractor shall be responsible for coordination among the trades. Any redesign by the Architect/Engineer required by the accepted substitution, will be completed on a time and material basis with the cost submitted to the Owner and credited to the Owner-Contractor contract sum.
F. If a substitution is requested during construction, and the original specified product is available, the Owner/Architect/Engineer may request the Contractor to submit substantiating purchase cost data for review. 1. If it is found that the Contractor is in receipt of a savings to his contract by the substituted product, the Owner/Architect/Engineer may request that the credit be passed through to the Owner and credited to the Owner-Contractor contract sum.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
(NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
(NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
GCPS: Southern High School PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 3 Façade Renovations & Repairs REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION
DATE OF REQUEST: ______
PROJECT: GCPS: Southern Garrett High School – Façade Renovations and Repairs
CONTRACTOR: ______
TELEPHONE NO: ______
FACSIMILE NO: ______
CONTACT: ______
CONTRACT PACKAGE: ______
1. Item for which substitution is being requested: ______
2. Reference Specification Section: ______
3. Reference Drawing: ______
4. Reason for Substitution Request :______
5. Product Comparison:
Submit three copies of shop drawing, product data, color samples, utility requirements and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence.
a. ______Data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with contract documents. b. ______Product identification, manufacturer’s name, address and telephone number. c. ______Manufacturer’s literature, warranty. d. ______Full color selection, showing colors Architect may select without additional cost. e. ______Samples f. ______Warranty g. ______References of product use. h. ______Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method specified. Highlight all differences from specified item. i. ______All items listed Section 01 60 00-1.6. j. ______Cover letter stating benefits or equality of substitution and reason for substitution request.
6. If request is being submitted after the receipt of bids, attach price quotations of specified product and substituted products.
END OF SECTION
01 60 00 - 4 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 01 73 00 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Closeout procedures.
B. Final cleaning.
C. Demonstration and instructions.
D. Protecting installed construction.
E. Project record documents.
F. Operation and maintenance data.
G. Manual for materials and finishes.
H. Spare parts and maintenance products.
I. Product warranties and product bonds.
1.2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected by the Contractor and governing agencies, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect/Engineer's review. 1. The contractor shall then request in writing a “closeout inspection” by the Owner/Architect and Consultants. 2. Prior to the start of the closeout inspection, the Contractor shall have performed final cleaning of the area in accordance with Article 1.3 of this section. 3. Upon completion of the closeout inspection, the Owner/Architect/Engineer shall compile their findings and comments into one (1) document and submit it to the Contractor for corrective work. a. If all parties are in agreement, this closeout inspection shall constitute “substantial completion” to that portion of building or site inspected. b. If the area inspected is found unacceptable by the Owner/ Architect/Engineer, reinspection fees will be charged to the Contractor on a time and material basis.
B. Provide submittals to Owner/Architect/Engineer required by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due.
1.3 FINAL CLEANING
A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment.
GCPS: Southern High School EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 73 00 - 1 Façade Renovations & Repairs B. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces remove dust from all surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.
C. Clean equipment and fixtures to sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to surface and material being cleaned.
D. Replace filters of operating equipment.
E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.
G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from site.
1.4 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of Substantial Completion.
B. Demonstrate Project equipment and instruct in classroom environment located at site and instructed by qualified manufacturer's representative who is knowledgeable about the Project.
C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six (6) months.
D. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.
E. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time, at equipment designated location.
F. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction.
G. Required instruction time for each item of equipment and system is specified in individual sections.
H. Each demonstration shall be digitally filmed by a professional camera crew. 1. The filmed demonstration shall be professionally edited with titles, subtitles and sound in a manner that clearly illustrates the operation and maintenance of the equipment or systems being demonstrated. 2. Each piece of equipment or systems that has been filmed shall be submitted on a DVD format that can be operated by the Owner’s standard equipment. 3. Separate DVD’s shall be provided for each piece of equipment or system demonstrated with title of demonstration, date of demonstration, name of facility, name of Owner, General Contractor, Subcontractor, Equipment or System Manufacturer, Model Number of Equipment or System, Name of Consultant and Architect. 4. Provide two (2) copies of each DVD in a case or in an indexed “D” ring binder labeled in accordance to Article 1.7.
01 73 00 - 2 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 5. Listing of Demonstrations:
1.5 PROTECTING INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.
B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage.
C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.
D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.
E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. When traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.
F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas.
1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. 7. Contractor Request for Information (RFI) and Architectural Supplemental Instructions (ASI).
B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.
C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.
D. Record information concurrent with construction progress, not less than weekly.
E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.
F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.
GCPS: Southern High School EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 73 00 - 3 Façade Renovations & Repairs 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract drawings.
G. Submit documents to Architect/Engineer with claim for final Application for Payment.
1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit data bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, three D side ring, 3 inch binders with durable clear view plastic cloth covers. All binders shall be the same color
B. Prepare binder cover with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required.
C. Internally subdivide binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.
D. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages.
E. Contents: Prepare Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description identified, typed on white paper, in three parts as follows: 1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions arranged by specification division and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. c. Parts list for each component. d. Operating instructions. e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. 3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a. Shop drawings and product data. b. Air and water balance reports. c. Certificates. d. Originals of warranties and bonds
F. Submit one (1) copy for Architect/Engineer review prior to closeout inspection. 1. Upon completion of review by the Architect/Engineer, the copy shall be returned to the Contractor for corrections.
G. Upon completion of corrections, the Contractor shall submit two (2) final copies and one (1) electronic copy in pdf. format on CD or thumb drive of the Operation and Maintenance Data to the Architect/Engineer.
01 73 00 - 4 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 1.8 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Submit one (1) copy of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents electronically before start of Work. Architect/Engineer will review draft and return one copy with comments.
B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit documents within ten days after acceptance.
C. Submit one copy of completed volumes 15 calendar days prior to substantial inspection. Draft copy be reviewed and returned after inspection, with Architect/Engineer comments. Revise content of document sets as required prior to final submission.
D. Submit two (2) sets of revised final volumes in final form and one (1) electronic copy in pdf. format on CD or thumb drive within 10 days after final completion.
E. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. Include information for re-ordering custom manufactured products.
F. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
G. Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products: Include product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Include recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair.
H. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.
I. Include listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data.
1.9 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS
A. Furnish spare parts, maintenance, and extra products in quantities specified in individual specification sections.
B. Deliver to and place in location as directed by Owner; obtain receipt prior to final payment.
1.10 PRODUCT WARRANTIES AND PRODUCT BONDS
A. Per Section 01 74 00 – Warranties and Bonds.
B. Obtain warranties and bonds executed in triplicate by responsible subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten (10) calendar days after completion of applicable item of work.
C. Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents and bonds from subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers.
GCPS: Southern High School EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 73 00 - 5 Façade Renovations & Repairs D. Verify documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.
E. Submit prior to final Application for Payment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
(Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
(Not Used)
END OF SECTION
01 73 00 - 6 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 01 74 00 - WARRANTIES AND BONDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Preparation and submittal.
B. Time and schedule of submittals.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 00 02 00 - Invitation to Bid - Instructions to Bidders: Bid Bonds.
B. Section 00 30 00 - General Conditions: Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bonds, Warranty, and Correction of Work.
C. Section 01 73 00 - Execution Requirements: Contract closeout procedures.
D. Individual Specifications Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work.
1.3 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. Bind in commercial quality, 8-1/2 x 11 inch three “D”-ring ‘clear-vue’ binders with hardback, cleanable, and transparent plastic covers and side binder.
B. Label cover and side of each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title and date of Project; name, project number; address and telephone number of Contractor; and name of Architect.
C. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification Section in which specified, and the name of the product or work item.
D. Directory: Provide a directory which indicates names, addresses and telephone/ fax numbers of Owners, Consultants, General Contractors, Subcontractors, and Major Suppliers. Include name of contact person for each entry.
E. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Sub-contractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal. Include information regarding maintenance and operations of equipment and or materials as may be required by the specifications or manufacturer.
GCPS: Southern High School WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 74 00-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs 1.4 PREPARATION OF SUBMITTALS
A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item or work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial Completion is determined.
B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.
C. Co-execute submittals when required.
D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.
1.5 TIME OF SUBMITTALS
A. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within ten (10) days after acceptance.
B. Provide draft copy of warranties and bonds for review by consultant no later then time of 50% project completion.
C. Make other submittals within ten (10) days prior to closeout inspection and prior to final Application for Payment.
D. For items of Work when acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within ten days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
(Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
(Not Used)
END OF SECTION
01 74 00-2 WARRANTIES AND BONDS GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
DIVISION 2
EXISTING CONDITIONS
BUSHEY FEIGHT MORIN ARCHITECTS INC. 473 NORTH POTOMAC STREET HAGERSTOWN, MARYLAND 21740 301-733-5600 FAX: 301-733-5612
SECTION 02 41 16 - DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Demolishing designated building equipment and fixtures. 2. Demolishing designated construction. 3. Cutting and alterations for completion of the Work. 4. Removing designated items for reuse and Owner’s retention. 5. Protecting items designated to remain. 6. Removing demolished materials. 7. Provide temporary protection.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Demolition Schedule: Indicate overall schedule and interruptions required for utility and building services.
B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate location of items designated for reuse and Owner’s retention. 2. Indicate location and construction of temporary work.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities, concealed utilities discovered during demolition, and subsurface obstructions.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit description of system, inspection data, and parts lists.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to applicable codes for demolition work, dust control, products requiring electrical disconnection and re-connection.
B. Conform to applicable codes for procedures when hazardous or contaminated materials are discovered.
C. Obtain required permits from authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Perform Work in accordance with State of Maryland and Town of Oakland standards.
1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
GCPS: Southern High School DEMOLITION 02 41 16 - 1 Front Façade Renovation 1.6 SEQUENCING
A. Sequence demolition activities in accordance with the proposed project phasing.
B. Schedule Work to coincide with phasing.
C. Cooperate with Owner in scheduling noisy operations and waste removal that may impact Owners operation in adjoining spaces.
D. Perform noisy, malodorous, dusty work in accordance with local ordinance: 1. Between hours of 6:00 AM to 8:00 PM Monday thru Friday or as approved by GCPS. 2. Saturday and Sunday as approved by GCPS.
E. Coordinate utility and building service interruptions with Owner. 1. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without three days prior written notice to Owner. 2. Schedule tie-ins to existing systems to minimize disruption. 3. Coordinate Work to ensure fire sprinklers, fire alarms, smoke detectors, emergency lighting, exit signs and other life safety systems remain in full operation in occupied areas.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas.
B. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger and notify Architect/Engineer. Do not resume operations until directed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
(NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements.
B. Mark location and termination of utilities.
C. Erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices at locations indicated, including warning signs and lights, and similar measures, for protection of the public, Owner, and existing improvements indicated to remain.
D. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings.
02 41 16 - 2 DEMOLITION GCPS: Southern High School Front Façade Renovation E. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, odors, and noise to permit continued Owner occupancy.
F. Prevent movement of structure; provide temporary bracing and shoring required to ensure safety of existing structure.
G. Provide appropriate temporary signage including signage for exit or building egress.
H. Do not close or obstruct building egress path.
I. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without 3 days prior written notice to Owner.
3.2 SALVAGE REQUIREMENTS
A. Owner has first rights of refusal for all equipment and materials.
B. Coordinate with Owner to identify building components and equipment required to be removed and delivered to Owner.
C. Tag components and equipment Owner designates for salvage.
D. Protect designated salvage items from demolition operations until items can be removed.
E. Carefully remove building components and equipment indicated to be salvaged.
F. Disassemble as required to permit removal from building.
G. Package small and loose parts to avoid loss.
H. Mark equipment and packaged parts to permit identification and consolidation of components of each salvaged item.
I. Prepare assembly instructions consistent with disassembled parts. Package assembly instructions in protective envelope and securely attach to each disassembled salvaged item.
J. Deliver salvaged items to Owner. Obtain signed receipt from Owner.
3.3 DEMOLITION
A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas.
B. Maintain protected egress from and access to adjacent existing buildings at all times.
C. Do not close or obstruct roadways and sidewalks without permits.
D. Cease operations immediately when structure appears to be in danger and notify Architect/Engineer and Owner.
GCPS: Southern High School DEMOLITION 02 41 16 - 3 Front Façade Renovation E. Disconnect and remove designated utilities within demolition areas.
F. Cap and identify abandoned utilities at termination points when utility is not completely removed. Annotate Record Drawings indicating location and type of service for capped utilities remaining after demolition.
G. Demolish in orderly and careful manner. Protect existing improvements and supporting structural members.
H. Carefully remove building components indicated to be reused. 1. Disassemble components as required to permit removal. 2. Package small and loose parts to avoid loss. 3. Mark components and packaged parts to permit reinstallation. 4. Store components, protected from construction operations, until reinstalled.
I. Remove demolished materials from site except where specifically noted otherwise. Do not burn or bury materials on site.
J. Remove materials as Work progresses. Upon completion of Work, leave areas in clean condition.
K. Provide temporary protection to maintain a secured facility and protect building interior from the elements.
L. Remove temporary work as required.
END OF SECTION
02 41 16 - 4 DEMOLITION GCPS: Southern High School Front Façade Renovation
DIVISION 3
CONCRETE
BUSHEY FEIGHT MORIN ARCHITECTS INC. 473 NORTH POTOMAC STREET HAGERSTOWN, MARYLAND 21740 301-733-5600 FAX: 301-733-5612
SECTION 03 10 00 - CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Formwork for cast-in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage.
B. Openings for other work.
C. Form accessories.
D. Form stripping.
1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Supply of concrete accessories for placement by this Section.
B. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Supply of metal fabrications for placement by this Section.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcement.
B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
C. Section 32 13 13 – Cement Concrete Paving.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ACI 347 - Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.
B. ANSI/ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving Walks.
C. PS-1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.
1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to code requirements; resultant concrete to conform to required shape, line and dimension.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensions, materials, bracing, and arrangement of joints and ties.
C. Product Data: Provide data on void form materials and installation requirements.
GCPS Southern High School CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 347, 301 and 318.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Design formwork under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Maryland.
1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to IBC code for design, fabrication, erection and removal of formwork.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
B. Deliver void forms and installation instructions in manufacturer's packaging.
C. Store off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from moisture.
1.12 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 31 00.
B. Coordinate this Section with other Sections of work which require attachment of components to formwork.
C. If formwork is placed after reinforcement resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement, request instructions from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD FORM MATERIALS
A. Form Materials: Per schedule at the end of this section.
2.2 PREFABRICATED FORMS
A. Preformed Steel Forms: Minimum 16 gage matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces.
B. Glass Fiber Fabric Reinforced Plastic Forms: Matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished concrete surfaces.
C. Pan Type: Steel of size and profile required.
03 10 00-2 CONCRETE FORMWORK GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs D. Tubular Column Type: Round, spirally wound laminated fiber material, surface treated with release agent, non-reusable, of sizes required.
2.3 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Form Ties: Snap-off type, galvanized metal, adjustable length, one inch back break dimension, free of defects that could leave holes larger than 1-1/4 inch in concrete surface.
B. Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil which will not stain concrete, or absorb moisture, or impair natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete. C. Corners: Chamfered, wood strip type; maximum possible lengths.
D. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.
E. Waterstops: Polyvinyl chloride, min. 1,750 psi tensile strength, min. 50 ΕF to plus 175 ΕF working temperature range, 1/2 inch wide, maximum possible lengths, ribbed profile, preformed corner sections, heat welded jointing; manufactured by Dur-o-wall.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with Drawings.
3.2 EARTH FORMS
A. Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms. Remove loose soil prior to placing concrete.
3.3 ERECTION - FORMWORK
A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301.
B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads.
C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores.
D. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum.
E. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members which are not indicated on Drawings.
F. Provide chamfer strips on external corners of beams and miscellaneous concrete work.
GCPS Southern High School CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs G. Install void forms in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Protect forms from moisture or crushing.
3.4 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT
A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items.
C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied coverings which are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete.
3.5 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS
A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in or passing through concrete work.
B. Locate and set in place items which will be cast directly into concrete.
C. Coordinate work of other Sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts.
D. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.
E. Install waterstops continuous without displacing reinforcement. Heat seal joints watertight.
F. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain.
G. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces.
3.6 FORM CLEANING
A. Clean and remove foreign matter within forms as erection proceeds.
B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete.
C. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.
D. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts or water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within heat enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter.
03 10 00-4 CONCRETE FORMWORK GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 3.7 FORMWORK TOLERANCES
A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301.
B. Camber slabs and beams 1/4 inch per 10 feet in accordance with ACI 301.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure.
B. Do not reuse wood formwork more than two times for concrete surfaces to be exposed to view. Do not patch formwork.
3.9 FORM REMOVAL
A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads.
B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view.
C. Store removed forms in manner that surfaces to be in contact with fresh concrete will not be damaged. Discard damaged forms.
3.10 SCHEDULES
A. Footings: Earth forms permitted.
B. Foundation Walls Not Exposed to View: Site fabricated plywood or steel pan coated with form oil.
C. Foundation Walls Exposed to View: Smooth steel pan coated with form oil.
END OF SECTION
GCPS Southern High School CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00-5 Façade Renovations & Repairs
SECTION 03 20 00 – CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Reinforcing steel bars, wire fabric and accessories for cast-in-place concrete.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Formwork.
B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
C. Section 32 13 13 - Cement Concrete Paving.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings.
B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
C. ACI SP-66 - American Concrete Institute - Detailing Manual.
D. ANSI/ASTM A82 - Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement.
E. ANSI/ASTM A184 - Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement.
F. ANSI/ASTM A185 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.
G. ANSI/ASTM A496 - Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.
H. ANSI/ASTM A497 - Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.
I. ANSI/AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code for Reinforcing Steel.
J. ANSI/AWS D12.1 - Reinforcing Steel Welding Code.
K. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
L. ASTM A704 - Welded Steel Plain Bar or Rod Mats for Concrete Reinforcement.
M. AWS D12.1 - Welding Reinforcement Steel, Metal Inserts and Connections in Reinforced Concrete Construction.
N. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Manual of Practice.
O. CRSI 63 - Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars.
P. CRSI 65 - Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports, Specifications and Nomenclature.
GCPS Southern High School CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs 1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate bar sizes, spacings, locations, and quantities of reinforcing steel and wire fabric, bending and cutting schedules, and supporting and spacing devices.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
C. Provide Architect/Engineer with access to fabrication plant to facilitate inspection of reinforcement. Provide notification of commencement and duration of shop fabrication in sufficient time to allow inspection.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 31 00.
B. Coordinate with placement of formwork, formed openings and other Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 60 ksi yield grade; deformed billet steel bars, plain to ASTM A767, Class I finish.
B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 Plain Type in flat sheets; Class I finish.
2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage annealed type.
B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during concrete placement conditions including load bearing pad on bottom to prevent vapor barrier puncture.
C. Special Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers Adjacent to Weather Exposed Concrete Surfaces: Plastic coated Stainless steel type; size and shape as required.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with ACI 318.
B. Weld reinforcement in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.4.
C. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on Drawings, at point of minimum stress. Review location of splices with Architect/Engineer.
03 20 00-2 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PLACEMENT
A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position.
B. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier.
C. Accommodate placement of formed openings.
D. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as follows:
Item Coverage Beams 2 inch Supported Slabs and Joists 1 inch Column Ties 1-1/2 inch Walls (exposed to weather or backfill) 2 inch Footings and Concrete Formed Against Earth 3 inch Slabs on Fill Mid depth
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01 40 00.
END OF SECTION
GCPS Southern High School CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 03 30 00 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cast-in-place concrete building frame members, floors, foundation walls, and supported slabs.
B. Floors and slabs on grade.
C. Beneath slab vapor barriers for general slabs.
D. Control, expansion, and contraction joint devices associated with concrete work.
E. Equipment pads, light pole base, flagpole base, thrust blocks, and miscellaneous items.
1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Formwork: Placement of joint device and joint device anchors in formwork.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Formwork: Formwork and accessories.
B. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcement.
C. Section 04 90 01 – Masonry Restoration: Concrete repair.
C. Division 5 - Metals: Anchors for structural systems.
D. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Sealers.
E. Division 23 - Mechanical: Mechanical items for casting into concrete.
F. Division 26 - Electrical: Electrical items for casting into concrete.
G. Section 31 23 23.23 – Cement Concrete Paving.
H. Section 32 13 13 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Sidewalks, curbs and gutters.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings.
B. ACI 302 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.
C. ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete.
D. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting.
E. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting.
F. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete.
GCPS Southern High School CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs G. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
H. ANSI/ASTM D994 - Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type).
I. ANSI/ASTM D1190 - Concrete Joint Sealer, Hot-Poured Elastic Type.
J. ANSI/ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).
K. ANSI/ASTM D1752 - Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.
L. ASTM B221 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes.
M. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates.
N. ASTM C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete.
O. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement.
P. ASTM C260 - Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
Q. ASTM C330 - Light Weight Aggregates for Structural Concrete.
R. ASTM C494 - Chemicals Admixtures for Concrete.
S. ASTM C618 - Fly Ash and Raw or Calcinated Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Provide data on joint devices, attachment accessories, admixtures and curing compounds.
C. Submit mix designs (by a qualified testing laboratory) for pea gravel and normal concrete. Submit procedures to be followed for hot weather and cold weather construction. Submittals must be made prior to any installations.
1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 73 00.
B. Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components which are concealed from view.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Acquire cement and aggregate from same source for all work.
C. Conform to ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
D. Conform to ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
03 30 00-2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 31 00.
B. Coordinate the placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I - Normal Portland type; manufactured by ESSROC Cement or Lehigh Cement Co.
B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33.
C. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.
2.2 ADMIXTURES
A. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260; Daravair 1,000 or equal manufactured by W. R. Grace.
B. Chemical: ASTM C494, Type A - Water Reducing, Type D - Water Reducing and Retarding, Type E - Water Reducing and Accelerating, admixture; such as Dozough manufactured by Master Builders.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Bonding Agent: Two component modified epoxy resin.
C. Non-Shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days.
2.4 JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS
A. Joint Filler Type A: Flexible foam expansion joint filler complying with ASTM D1752, Sections 5.1 through 5.4; 2 inch thick, equal to Ceramar by W. R. Meadows with water absorption of 0.246% of volume as tested in accordance with ASTM D545.
B. Construction Joint Devices: Integral; 1/8 inch thick, formed to tongue and groove profile, with removable top strip exposing sealant trough, knockout holes spaced at 6 inches, ribbed steel spikes with tongue to fit top screed edge.
C. Sealant and Primer: Type, as specified in Section 07 90 00.
2.5 CONCRETE MIX
A. Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94, Alternative No. 2.
B. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301 Method 2.
C. Provide concrete to the following criteria: 1. Design Mix 7 Day Strength 28 Day Strength 3,000 psi 1,950 psi 3,000 psi 4,000 psi 2,600 psi 4,000 psi
GCPS Southern High School CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs 2. Slump: per ASTM C-94.
D. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Architect/Engineer. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements.
E. Use of calcium chloride shall be prohibited.
F. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Architect/Engineer.
G. Add air entraining agent to normal weight concrete mix for work exposed to exterior at 5-7 percent air content.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01 31 00.
B. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement.
C. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout.
3.3 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304, ACI 301, ACI 318.
B. Notify Architect/Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of operations.
C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joint fillers and joint devices are not disturbed during concrete placement.
D. Install vapor barrier under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight by sealant applied between overlapping edges and ends or taping edges and ends.
E. Repair vapor barrier damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor barrier material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight.
F. Install joint fillers, primer and sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
G. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with 1/2 inch thick joint filler.
H. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/2 inch of finished slab surface. Conform to Section 07 90 00 for finish joint sealer requirements.
03 30 00-4 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs I. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
J. Install construction joint device in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.
K. Install joint device anchors. Maintain correct position to allow joint cover flush with floor and wall finish.
L. Install joint covers in longest practical length, when adjacent construction activity is complete.
M. Apply sealants in joint devices in accordance with Section 07 90 00.
N. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken.
O. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints.
P. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur.
Q. Place floor slabs as indicated on structural drawings or submit actual plan of concrete slab placement.
R. Saw cut joints within 24 hours after placing. Using 3/16 inch thick blade, cut into 1/4 depth of slab thickness.
S. Screed floors and slabs on grade level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4 inch in 10 ft.
T. Consolidation of concrete shall be done in accordance with ACI 301.
3.5 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Provide formed concrete surfaces to be left exposed concrete walls, columns, and beams with smooth rubbed finish.
B. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301.
C. Wood float surfaces which will receive quarry tile, ceramic tile with full bed setting system.
D. Steel trowel surfaces which will receive carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, thin set quarry tile, thin set ceramic tile.
E. Steel trowel surfaces which are scheduled to be exposed.
F. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at 1/8 inch per foot.
G. Apply cure in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed in accordance with ACI 301 and under provisions of Section 01 40 00.
GCPS Southern High School CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-5 Façade Renovations & Repairs B. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm.
C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of Work.
D. Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements.
E. Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 50 or less cu yds of each class of concrete placed. Cylinders shall be tested on 7 day and 28 day intervals. The third cylinder shall be tested if a failure should occur and be utilized as a comparison.
F. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents.
G. One slump test and one air content test will be taken for each truck load in accordance with ASTM and ACI Standards.
3.7 PATCHING
A. If excessive honeycomb or embedded debris is present in concrete when forms are removed, this will not acceptable. Notify Architect/Engineer upon discovery.
B. Patch imperfections in accordance with ACI 301.
3.8 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements.
B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect/Engineer.
C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect/Engineer for each individual area.
3.9 SCHEDULE - CONCRETE TYPES AND FINISHES
A. Foundation Walls and Footings: 3,000 psi 28 day concrete, form finish with honeycomb filled surface.
B. Slabs on Grade: 4000 psi 28 day concrete, finish per Section 3.5
END OF SECTION
03 30 00-6 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
DIVISION 4
MASONRY
BUSHEY FEIGHT MORIN ARCHITECTS INC. 473 NORTH POTOMAC STREET HAGERSTOWN, MARYLAND 21740 301-733-5600 FAX: 301-733-5612
SECTION 04 10 00 - MASONRY MORTAR AND GROUT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes mortar and grout for masonry.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 81 00 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Installation of mortar and grout. 2. Section 04 90 00 - Masonry Restoration. 3. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel. 4. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications. 5. Section 08 11 00 - Steel Doors and Frames: Grouting steel door frames. 6. Section 08 41 00 - Aluminum Framed Storefronts 7. Section 08 52 00 - Aluminum Windows 8. Division 23 – Mechanical 9. Division 26 – Electrical
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. 2. ACI 530.1 - Specifications for Masonry Structures.
B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C5 - Standard Specification for Quicklime for Structural Purposes. 2. ASTM C91 - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement. 3. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 4. ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 5. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 6. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 7. ASTM C199 - Standard Test Method for Pier Test for Refractory Mortars. 8. ASTM C206 - Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime. 9. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 10. ASTM C387 - Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and Concrete. 11. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout. 12. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry. 13. ASTM C595 - Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. 14. ASTM C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry. 15. ASTM C1019 - Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout. 16. ASTM C1142 - Standard Specification for Extended Life Mortar for Unit Masonry. 17. ASTM C1314 - Standard Test Method for Constructing and Testing Masonry Prisms Used to Determine Compliance with Specified Compressive Strength of Masonry. 18. ASTM C1329 - Standard Specification for Mortar Cement. 19. ASTM C1357 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating Masonry Bond Strength.
GCPS Southern High School MASONRY MORTAR AND GROUT 04 10 00-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal requirements.
B. Samples: Submit two samples of mortar, illustrating mortar color and color range.
C. Design Data: Submit design mix when Property specification of ASTM C270 is to be used, required environmental conditions, and admixture limitations.
D. Test Reports: 1. Submit reports on mortar indicating conformance of mortar to property requirements of ASTM C270 and test and evaluation reports to ASTM C780 for aggregate ratio and water content, air content, consistency and compressive strength. 2. Submit reports on grout indicating conformance of grout to property requirements of ASTM C476 and test and evaluation reports to ASTM C1019.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit premix mortar manufacturer's installation instructions.
F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1.
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Cold Weather Requirements: In accordance with ACI 530.1 when ambient temperature or temperature of masonry units is less than 40 degrees F.
C. Hot Weather Requirements: In accordance with ACI 530.1 when ambient temperature is greater than 100 degrees F or ambient temperature is greater than 90 degrees F with wind velocity greater than 8 mph.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT
A. Manufacturers: 1. Argos – Brick-Lok 2. Lehigh. 3. Substitutions: Per Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Mortar Cement: ASTM C1329, Types S and N.
B. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type.
C. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404, fine. 04 10 00-2 MASONRY MORTAR AND GROUT GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs D. Water: Clean and potable.
E. Mortar Color: TBD.
2.3 MIXES
A. Mortar Mixes: 1. Mortar for Structural Masonry: ASTM C270, Type S using Proportion specification. 2. Mortar for Non-Structural Masonry: ASTM C270, Type S using Proportion specification. 3. Pointing Mortar: ASTM C270, Type N using Proportion specification.
B. Mortar Mixing: 1. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270 in quantities needed for immediate use. 2. Achieve uniformly damp sand immediately before mixing process. 3. Add mortar color and admixtures to achieve uniformity of mix and coloration. 4. Re-temper only within two hours of mixing.
C. Grout Mixes: 1. Grout for Non-Structural Masonry: 2,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-11 inches slump; mixed in accordance with ASTM C476 Fine or Course grout. 2. Grout for Structural Masonry: 2,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-11 inches slump; mixed in accordance with ASTM C476 Fine or Course grout. 3. Application: a. Coarse Grout: For grouting spaces with minimum 4 inches dimension in every direction. b. Fine Grout: For grouting other spaces.
D. Grout Mixing: 1. Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C476. 2. Add admixtures; mix uniformly.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 31 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Request inspection of spaces to be grouted.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Apply bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install mortar and grout in accordance with ACI 530.1 Specifications for Masonry Structures.
GCPS Southern High School MASONRY MORTAR AND GROUT 04 10 00-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Testing Frequency: One set of specified tests for every 5,000 sf of completed wall area.
C. Testing of Mortar Mix: In accordance with ASTM C780 for aggregate ratio and water content, air content, consistency, and compressive strength.
D. Testing of Grout Mix: In accordance with ASTM C1019 for compressive strength, and in accordance with ASTM C143/C143M for slump.
E. Test flexural bond strength of mortar and masonry units to ASTM C1357; test in conjunction with masonry unit sections specified.
F. Test compressive strength of mortar and masonry to ASTM C1314; test in accordance with masonry unit sections specified.
3.5 SCHEDULES
A. Exterior Brick Wall: Brick masonry with Type N mortar.
B. Concrete Masonry Walls: Type S mortar.
END OF SECTION
04 10 00-4 MASONRY MORTAR AND GROUT GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 04 81 00 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes brick and concrete masonry units; pre-faced brick masonry units; reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories; and parged masonry surfaces. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 10 00 - Masonry Mortar and Grout: Mortar and grout. 2. Section 04 90 00 - Masonry Restoration 3. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel: Product requirements for steel anchors for placement by this section. 4. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Product requirements for loose steel lintels and fabricated steel items for placement by this section. 5. Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation: Insulation for cavity spaces. 6. Section 07 27 26 - Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barriers. 7. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Sealers: Rod and sealant at control and expansion joints. 8. Section 08 11 00 - Steel Doors and Frames. 9. Section 08 52 00 - Aluminum Windows. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. 2. ACI 530.1 - Specifications for Masonry Structures. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A153/A153M - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 2. ASTM A240/A240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. 3. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength. 4. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 5. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 6. ASTM A951 - Standard Specification for Masonry Joint Reinforcement. 7. ASTM B370 - Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. 8. ASTM B695 - Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel. 9. ASTM C55 - Standard Specification for Concrete Brick. 10. ASTM C62 - Standard Specification for Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale). 11. ASTM C67 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile. 12. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units. 13. ASTM C129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.
GCPS Southern High School UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04 81 00-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs 14. ASTM C140 - Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units. 15. ASTM C216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale). 16. ASTM C652 - Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale). 17. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 18. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal requirements. B. Product Data: 1. Submit data for concrete masonry units and fabricated wire reinforcement, wall ties, anchors, and other accessories. 2. Indicate initial rate of absorption for face brick. C. Samples: Submit four samples of face brick, units to illustrate color, texture and extremes of color range. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures and ACI 530.1 Specification for Masonry Structures. B. Fire Rated Wall Construction: Rating as indicated on Drawings. 1. Tested Rating: Determined in accordance with ASTM E119. C. Surface Burning Characteristics: 1. Foam Insulation: Maximum 75/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. D. Apply label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify each foam plastic insulation insert. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 MOCKUP A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Mockup requirements.
04 81 00-2 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs B. Construct composite cavity masonry wall mockup, 8 feet long by 4 feet high, including masonry, mortar and accessories, structural backup, flashings, wall insulation, air and vapor membrane, parging, and ,mortar net with weeps. C. Locate where directed by Architect/Engineer. D. Remove mockup when directed by Architect/Engineer. 1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 01 31 00 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Accept pre-faced units on site. Inspect for damage. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Cold Weather Requirements: In accordance with ACI 530.1 when ambient temperature or temperature of masonry units is less than 40 degrees F. C. Hot Weather Requirements: In accordance with ACI 530.1 when ambient temperature is greater than 100 degrees F or ambient temperature is greater than 90 degrees F with wind velocity greater than 8 mph. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Section 01 31 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate masonry work with installation of window and door anchors. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 01 73 00 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products. B. Supply 20 of each size, color, and type of pre-faced units.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES A. Specified Manufacturers: 1. Harmar 2. Belden 3. Glen-Gery Brick 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
GCPS Southern High School UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04 81 00-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Facing Brick: ASTM C216, Type FBS, Grade SW. 1. Field Brick No. 2 – Equal to Cushwa Jamestown FBS #172 2. Field Brick No. 1 – Equal to Harmar #835 Golden Buff Smooth FBX
B. Building Brick: ASTM C62, Grade SW; solid units. C. Hollow Brick: ASTM C652, Grade SW. D. Brick Size and Shape: Nominal size of 4 x 4 x 12 inches. Furnish special units for 90 degree corners, and lintels. E. Special Brick Shape: Shaped to profile indicated; surface texture on four sides and ends. F. Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): ASTM C90; normal weight. G. Solid Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): ASTM C90; normal weight. H. Hollow Non-Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): ASTM C129 light weight. I. Concrete Brick Units: ASTM C55, Grade S; same weight as block units. J. Concrete Masonry Unit Size and Shape: Nominal modular size of 8 x 8 x 16 inches. Furnish special units for 90 degree corners, bond beams, lintels, and bullnosed corners. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A951; truss type; steel; 0.188 inch diameter side rods with 0.148 inch diameter cross ties; hot dip galvanized. B. Multiple Wythe Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A951; truss type; steel; with moisture drip; adjustable type; 0.188 inch diameter side rods with 0.148 inch diameter cross ties; hot dip galvanized. C. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, 60 ksi yield grade, deformed billet bars, uncoated finish. D. Strap Anchors: bent steel shape, 1 1/2 x 24 inch size x 1/4 inch thick; ASTM A153/ A153M hot dip galvanized. E. Wall Ties (CMU): Corrugated formed sheet metal, 7/8 x 7 inch size x 16 gage thick; ASTM A153/A153M hot dip galvanized. F. Wall Ties (Metal Stud): ASTM A82; steel wire 3/16 inch diameter, adjustable; ASTM A153/A153M hot dip galvanized, designed to span specified cavity. G. Anchor Rods: ASTM A307; Grade C; J-shaped or L-shaped; complete with washers and heavy hex nuts; sized for minimum 15 inch embedment; galvanized finish. 1. Hot-Dipped Galvanizing: ASTM A153/A153M. H. Mortar and Grout: As specified in Section 04 10 00.
04 81 00-4 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs I. Copper/Kraft Paper Flashings: Equal to York Manufacturing 5 oz. CDA alloy cooper sheet with 060 temper conforming to ASTM B-370-98 bonded between two layers of fabric weighing not less than 0.3oz/ft 2 with a minimum of 20 x 10 threads per inch. J. Stainless Steel Drip Edge Flashing: ASTM A240, Type 304; 26 gage x 1 ½” wide with 3/8” hemmed edge. K. Preformed Control Joints: Polyvinyl chloride material. Furnish with corner and tee accessories, heat fused joints. L. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding; 3/8 inch wide x by maximum lengths. M. Cavity Drain Material (Mortar Net): Open polyethylene dovetail mesh thickness required to fill cavity space and shaped to ensure moisture drainage to cavity weeps. 1. Advanced Building Products, Inc. 2. CavClear/Archovations Inc. 3. Mortar Net USA, Ltd. 4. Dur-O-Wall, Inc. 5. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. N. Building Paper: ASTM D226; Type I, No. 15 unperforated asphalt felt. O. Nailing Strips: Softwood, preservative treated for moisture resistance, dovetail shape, sized to masonry joints. P. Weeps: Equal to Blok-Lok Cellvent fabricated from flexible polypropylene-co- polymer plastic. Color as selected. Q. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. R. Precast Concrete Lintels: Type, size, as indicated on Drawings 3,000 psi strength at 28 days. S. Steel Lintels: size as indicated on Drawings, hot-dip galvanized. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing, inspection and analysis requirements. B. Test brick efflorescence in accordance with ASTM C67. Brick rated greater than “slightly effloresced” is not acceptable.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 31 00 - Administrative Requirements: coordination and project conditions. B. Verify field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. C. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located.
GCPS Southern High School UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04 81 00-5 Façade Renovations & Repairs D. Verify built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other sections. B. Furnish temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent support. C. Wet clay and shale brick before laying when initial rate of absorption is greater than 30 grams when tested in accordance with ASTM C67. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form bed and head joints of uniform thickness. C. Coursing of Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Bond: Running. 2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave. D. Coursing of Brick Units: 1. Bond: Common (every 6 th course headers and stretchers) (Refer to elevation) 2. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave. E. Placing and Bonding: 1. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints. 2. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. 3. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted. 4. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. 5. Interlock intersections and external corners. 6. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment is required, remove mortar and replace. 7. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to assure straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. 8. Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled, cement parging is required, resilient base is scheduled, cavity insulation vapor retarder adhesive is applied, or bitumen dampproofing is applied. 9. Isolate masonry from vertical structural framing members with movement joint using ½ inch polystrene insulation or expansion joint mortar. 10. Isolate top of masonry from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with compressible joint filler. F. Weeps and Vents: Furnish weeps and vents in outer wythe at 24 inches oc horizontally above through-wall flashing, above shelf angles and lintels, and at bottom and top of walls.
04 81 00-6 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs G. Cavity Wall: Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weeps. Build inner wythe ahead of outer wythe to receive cavity insulation and air/vapor retarder adhesive. 1. Install cavity drain material continuously at bottom of each cavity above through wall flashing and at all flashing locations. H. Joint Reinforcement and Anchorage - Single Wythe Masonry: 1. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches oc. 2. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. 3. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls. 4. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. 5. Reinforce joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches oc. I. Joint Reinforcement and Anchorage - Masonry Veneer: 1. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches oc. 2. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. 3. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls. 4. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. 5. Embed wall ties in masonry backing to bond veneer at maximum 16 inches oc vertically and 16 inches oc horizontally. Place wall ties at maximum 8 inches oc vertically within 8 inches of jamb of wall openings. J. Joint Reinforcement and Anchorages - Cavity Wall Masonry: 1. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches oc. 2. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. 3. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and secon] joint below top of walls. 4. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. 5. Attach to structural steel members. Embed anchorages in every second block, sixth brick joint. 6. Reinforce joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches oc. K. Reinforcement and Anchorages - Multiple Wythe Unit Masonry: 1. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches oc. 2. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. 3. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls. 4. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. 5. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position. 6. Embed anchors attached to structural steel members. Embed anchorages in every second block, sixth brick joint. 7. Reinforce stack bonded unit joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches oc. L. Masonry Flashings:
GCPS Southern High School UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04 81 00-7 Façade Renovations & Repairs 1. Extend flashings horizontally on top of drip edge flashing through outer wythe at foundation walls, above ledge or shelf angles and lintels, under parapet caps, at bottom of walls, and trim flush with mortar joint. 2. Turn flashing up minimum 8 inches and bed into mortar joint of masonry, seal to concrete, seal to sheathing over wood or steel stud framed backing. 3. Lap end joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight using manufactures recommended adhesive and sealer. 4. Turn flashing, fold, and seal at corners, bends, and interruptions. M. Lintels: 1. Install loose steel or precast concrete lintels over openings sized per structural drawings. 2. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where steel or precast concrete lintels are not scheduled or indicated. 3. Do not splice reinforcing bars. 4. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. 5. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. 6. Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing temporary supports. 7. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening. N. Grouted Components: 1. Reinforce bond beam as indicated on structural drawings. 2. Lap splices bar diameters required by code. 3. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. 4. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. 5. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for minimum 12 inches both sides of opening. O. Reinforced Masonry: 1. Lay masonry units with cells vertically aligned and cavities between wythes clear of mortar and unobstructed. 2. Place reinforcement bars as indicated on Drawings. 3. Splice reinforcement in accordance with Section 03 20 00. 4. Support and secure reinforcement from displacement. 5. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. 6. Place grout in accordance with ACI 530.1 Specification for Masonry Structures. P. Control and Expansion Joints: 1. Install control and expansion joints at the following maximum spacings, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings: a. Exterior Walls: 20 feet on center and within 24 inches on one side of each interior and exterior corner. b. Interior Walls: 30 feet on center. c. At changes in wall height. 2. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints. 3. Form control joint with sheet building paper bond breaker fitted to one side of hollow contour end of block unit. Fill resultant core with grout fill. Rake joint at exposed unit faces for placement of backer rod and sealant. 4. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07 90 00 for sealant performance. 5. Form expansion joint by omitting mortar and cutting unit to form open space. Q. Built-In Work:
04 81 00-8 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 1. As work progresses, install built-in metal door and glazed frames, fabricated metal frames, window frames, wood nailing strips, anchor bolts, plates, and other items to be built-in the work and furnished by other sections. 2. Install built-in items plumb and level. 3. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout or mortar. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings. 4. Do not build in materials subject to deterioration. R. Cutting and Fitting: 1. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, and grounds. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. 2. Obtain Architect/Engineer’s approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. S. Parging: 1. Dampen masonry walls prior to parging. 2. Scarify each parging coat to ensure full bond to subsequent coat. 3. Parge masonry walls in two uniform coats of mortar to total thickness of 3/4 inch. 4. Steel trowel surface smooth and flat with maximum surface variation of 1/8 inch per foot. 5. Strike top edge of parging at 45 degrees. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Maximum Variation from Alignment of Columns: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Variation from Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch. D. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more. E. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more. F. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch in 30 ft. G. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft. H. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch. I. Maximum Variation for Steel Reinforcement: 1. Install reinforcement within the tolerances specified in ACI 530.1 for foundation walls. 2. Plus or minus 1/2 inch when distance from centerline of steel to opposite face of masonry is 8 inches or less. 3. Plus or minus 1 inch when distance is between 8 and 24 inches. 4. Plus or minus 1-1/4 inch when distance is greater than 24 inches. 5. Plus or minus 2 inches from location along face of wall.
GCPS Southern High School UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04 81 00-9 Façade Renovations & Repairs 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Brick Units: Test each type in accordance with ASTM C67, 5 random units for each 50,000 units installed. C. Concrete Masonry Units: Test each type in accordance with ASTM C140. 3.6 CLEANING A. Section 01 73 00 - Execution Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. E. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Section 01 50 00 – Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Requirements for protecting finished Work. B. Protect exposed external corners subject to damage. C. Protect base of walls from mud and mortar splatter. D. Protect masonry and other items built into masonry walls from mortar droppings and staining caused by mortar. E. Protect tops of masonry work with waterproof coverings secured in place without damaging masonry. Provide coverings where masonry is exposed to weather when work is not in progress. 3.8 SCHEDULES A. Existing Exterior Wall: Exterior wythe of face brick veneer, with masonry ties to existing brick wall with 2 inch space for insulation. Air and vapor barrier membrane per Section 07 27 26. B. Existing Interior Partitions: Single wythe concrete masonry units as noted. C. Portico Foundation: Minimum 8” and 12” CMU.
END OF SECTION
04 81 00-10 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 04 90 01 - MASONRY RESTORATION
PART 1 ─ GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. The requirements and application procedures for the restoration of existing masonry units and installation of sealant materials. B. Approval of mortar and brick color must be obtained before work can start. Match existing conditions. C. Repointing of 20% of existing brick wall areas (rear of 2-story main classroom) as identified on drawings. D. Cleaning of cast stone panels and re-pointing at Media Center. E. Replacement in areas of work of all vertical building control joints with new sealant and backer rod.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and contract documents, including Section 01 01 00 - Summary of Work, apply to this section.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete repairs. B. Section 04 10 00 – Masonry Mortar C. Section 04 81 00 – Unit Masonry Assemblies D. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Sealants E. Section 08 11 00 - Steel Doors and Frames F. Section 08 41 00 - Aluminum Framed Storefronts G. Section 08 52 00 - Aluminum Windows
1.4 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. 2. ACI 530.1 - Specifications for Masonry Structures. B. Brick Industry Association (BAI).
1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 30 00 - Submittals: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate special supports for the work. Detail shoring and bracing and temporary or permanent support. C. Product Data: Submit data on cleaning compounds and cleaning solutions, re-pointing materials and products. D. Samples: Submit four samples of face brick units to illustrate color, texture, and extremes of color range to match existing.
GCPS Southern High School MASONRY RESTORATION 04 90 01-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs E. Samples: Submit mortar samples matched to existing mortar color. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation procedures for products selected for use, manufacturer's installation instructions, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1 requirements. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience and having completed work.
1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 01 03 90 – Coordination and Meetings: Pre-installation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: 1. Deliver materials to job-site in new, dry, unopened and well-marked containers showing product and manufacturers name. 2. Deliver materials in sufficient quantity to allow continuity of work. 3. Coordinate delivery with project superintendent. B. Storage of Materials: 1. Store materials marked “KEEP FROM FREEZING” in areas where temperatures will remain above 40 degrees F. 2. Do not store materials in open or in contact with ground or roof surface. 3. Store all materials on a raised platform covered with secured canvas tarpaulin (not polyethylene), top to bottom. Cover all materials when project is not in progress and maintain the ability at all times to cover the materials when required, such as during an unanticipated rain shower. 4. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored on premises. 5. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. 6. Store hydrated lime in manufacturer's original and unopened containers. Discard lime if containers have been damaged or have been opened for more than two days. 7. Store lime putty covered with water in sealed containers. 8. Store sand where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained, and contamination avoided.
1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Environmental requirements: 1. Do not work in rain, snow, or in presence of water. 2. Do not work in temperatures below 40 degrees F. 3. Do not install materials marked “KEEP FROM FREEZING” when daily temperatures are scheduled to fall below 40 degrees F. 04 90 01-2 MASONRY RESTORATION GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 4. Do not perform masonry work below 40 degrees F. 5. Remove any work exposed to freezing. 6. Coordinate with superintendent when volatile materials are to be used near air ventilation intakes so owner can use some or all of the following methods to minimize disruptions to building occupants and operations: a. Divert air intake from work area by attaching scoops or temporary ductwork. b. Temporarily shut down or block air intakes. c. Provide make-up air or intake air from sources away from work area.
PART 2 ─ PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL A. Comply with quality control, references, specifications, and manufacturer's data. Products containing asbestos are prohibited on this project. Use only asbestos-free products. B. Use products with personal protection. User must read container label and material safety data sheets prior to use.
2.2 MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING A. Mortar Manufacturers: (Type N Mortar) 1. Lehigh Cement 2. Argos 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.3 COMPONENTS A. Facing Brick: ASTM C216, Type FBS, Grade SW – match existing brick. B. Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): ASTM C90; normal weight. C. Concrete Masonry Unit Size and Shape: Nominal modular size of 8 x 8 x 16 inches. Furnish special units for 90-degree corners, bond beams, lintels, and bullnosed corners. D. Multiple Wythe Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A951; truss type; steel; with moisture drip; adjustable type; 0.188 inch diameter side rods with 0.148 inch diameter cross ties; hot dip galvanized. E. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, 60 ksi yield grade, deformed billet bars, uncoated finish. F. Copper/Kraft Paper Flashings: Equal to York Manufacturing 5 oz. CDA alloy cooper sheet with 060 temper conforming to ASTM B-370-98 bonded between two layers of fabric weighing not less than 0.3oz/ft2 with a minimum of 20 x 10 threads per inch. G. Cavity Drain Material (Mortar Net): Open polyethylene dovetail mesh thickness required to fill cavity space and shaped to ensure moisture drainage to cavity weeps. 1. Advanced Building Products, Inc. 2. CavClear/Archovations Inc. 3. Mortar Net USA, Ltd. 4. Dur-O-Wall, Inc. 5. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. H. Weeps and Vents: Furnish weeps and vents in outer wythe at 24 inches oc horizontally above through-wall flashing, above shelf angles and lintels, and at bottom and top of walls.
GCPS Southern High School MASONRY RESTORATION 04 90 01-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs I. Cavity Wall: Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weeps. Build inner wythe ahead of outer wythe to receive cavity insulation and air/vapor retarder adhesive. 1. Install cavity drain material continuously at bottom of each cavity above through wall flashing and at all flashing locations. J. Masonry components: 1. Water: Potable. 2. Masonry Sand: ASTM C 144-93. Shall contain no more than 0.5% lightweight aggregate particles. Shall be free of coal, grains, wood, and other organic impurities. Shall be washed and free of expansive clay. 3. Hydrated lime: ASTM C 207-91(1992), Type S, non-air-entrained. Do not use unslaked lime. Follow manufacturer's written hydration procedures if lime putty is used. 4. Portland cement: ASTM C 150-94, Type I. 5. Mortar: ASTM C 270-92, Type N. Proportions by volume 1:1.25:5 (portland cement: hydrated lime: masonry sand). Do not use ground limestone. 6. Mortar coloring material: Inert, non-fading, alkali fast oxides, finely ground, made especially for cement/lime mortars, to match existing color. Color quantity no more than 6% by weight. Match existing color. Actual color samples must be approved before work can begin. 7. Face brick: Use existing brick. If needed, new brick to match existing in sizes, texture, and color, provide samples for selection by Architect / Owner. 8. Packing for weep slots: Glass wool batts. 9. Blasting Sand: Not Permitted. 10. Bonding Primer Agent: Equal to Sika Latex R: acrylic polymer latex, on-component, penetrating non-re-emulsifiable general purpose admixture. 11. Metal flashings per Section 07 62 00. 12. Term Bar per Section 07 62 00. K. Cleaners: 1. Limestone and Masonry Pre-wash: Equal to Sure Klean 766 Limestone and Masonry Pre-wash. 2. Afterwash: Equal to Sure Klean Limestone and Masonry Afterwash. 3. Restoration Cleaner: Equal to Sure Klean Restoration Cleaner. L. Paint per Section 09 90 00.
2.4 CONCRETE REPAIR A. Patch Material: Equal to W.R. Meadows product: Meadow-Patch 20 – Fast Setting, General Purpose Cementitious Repair Mortar. 1. One-component, cementitious, fast setting restoration/repair mortar. Low slump. Light gray color. 2. Capable of trowel finish, shaped, molded and shave before final set. 3. Interior or exterior applications, above or below grade applications. 4. Compressive strength per ASTM C109: 3 hrs – 1,200 psi, 28 day 6,500 psi.
B. Bonding Agent: Equal to W.R. Meadows ACRY-LOK.
C. Curing Agent: Equal to W.R. Meadows 2200-White; non-solvent based curing compound.
2.5 SEALANTS A. Sealants: Urethane Sealant – Refer to Section 07 90 00.
04 90 01-4 MASONRY RESTORATION GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs B. Primer for sealants: 1. Primer for concrete or masonry surfaces prior to applying urethane sealants: Primer #1. 2. Primer for metal surfaces prior to applying urethane sealants: Non-Porous Primer 3. Approved equal by Owner. C. Backer Rod: Refer to Section 07 90 00.
PART 3 ─ EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify conditions as satisfactory to receive work. B. Do not begin work until all unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions.
3.2 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP A. All work performed by subcontractor shall conform to this specification. B. The presence and activity of the manufacturer's representative, architect's representative, and/or owner's representative shall in no way relieve subcontractor of contract responsibilities or duties. C. Substrate temperature shall be within 50°F to 110°F for product application. At no time shall temperature exceed 110°F during application and cure. D. Re-pointing work as described herein shall not proceed at an ambient temperature below 40°F or above 95°F without prior written approval from the engineer. E. Re-pointing work shall not be performed during rain or inclement weather or when such weather is imminent. F. Perform masonry restoration work in the following sequence: 1. Remove plant growth. 2. Repair existing masonry, including replacing existing masonry with new masonry materials. 3. Rake out joints that are to be repointed. 4. Inspect for open mortar joints and repair before cleaning to prevent the intrusion of water and other cleaning materials into the wall. 5. Clean masonry surfaces. 6. Point mortar joints. 7. Install reglet or thru wall flashing as necessary. 8. As scaffolding is removed, patch anchor holes used to attach scaffolding. Patch holes in masonry units.
3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Vertical surfaces must be cleaned of laitance, dirt, dust, oil, grease efflorescence, alkali coatings and all other contaminants. Replace any missing, loose, weak or soft mortar. B. The surface of joints to receive sealants shall be free of all frost, condensation and moisture. Oil, grease dirt, chalk, particles of mortar, dust, loose mill scale, caulking and other foreign substances shall be removed from surfaces of joints to be in contact with the sealant. Oil and grease shall be removed with solvent and surfaces shall be wiped dry with clean clothes. All surfaces shall be ground free of existing sealants, caulkings and abraded to clean mortar or stone.
GCPS Southern High School MASONRY RESTORATION 04 90 01-5 Façade Renovations & Repairs C. Remove loose particles present or resulting from grinding, abrading or blast cleaning by sweeping particles out with a dry brush, blowing out joints with oil free compressed air or by vacuuming joints prior to solvent cleaning. D. Clean only as much area that can be primed, packed and caulked in a single day.
3.4 BRICK REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT A. At locations indicated, remove bricks for through-wall application. Carefully demolish or remove entire units from joint to joint, without damaging surrounding masonry, in a manner that permits replacement with full-size units. Install new 24 gauge stainless steel through-wall and all joints soldered. Turn up through-wall minimum 4”. At top of stainless steel through-wall flashing install ice and water shield membrane and terminate the top of ice and water shield with termination bar fastened every 6”. Caulk top of term bar. B. When removing single bricks, remove material from center of brick and work toward outside edges. C. Support and protect remaining masonry that surrounds removal area. Maintain flashing, reinforcement, lintels, and adjoining construction in an undamaged condition. D. Notify Owner of unforeseen detrimental conditions including voids, cracks, bulges, and loose masonry units in existing masonry backup, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated items. E. Remove in an undamaged condition as many whole bricks as possible. F. Remove mortar, loose particles, and soil from brick by cleaning with hand chisels, brushes, and water. G. Store brick for reuse, as indicated. H. Deliver cleaned brick not required for reuse to Owner, unless otherwise directed. I. Clean bricks surrounding removal areas by removing mortar, dust, and loose particles in preparation for replacement. J. Install replacement brick into bonding and coursing pattern of existing brick. If cutting is required, use a motor-driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp, unchipped edges. K. Lay replacement brick with completely filled bed, head, and collar joints. Butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Wet both replacement and surrounding bricks that have ASTM C 67 initial rates of absorption (suction) of more than 30 g/30 sq. in. per min. Use wetting methods that ensure that units are nearly saturated, but surface is dry when laid. Maintain joint width for replacement units to match existing joints. L. Tool exposed mortar joints in repaired areas to match joints of surrounding existing brickwork. M. Rake out mortar used for laying brick before mortar sets and point new mortar joints in repaired area to comply with requirements for repointing existing masonry, and at same time as repointing of surrounding area.
3.5 RE-POINTING A. Prepare re-pointing areas using hand tools or power tools. B. Remove all loose mortar from joint to a depth of approximately 5/8". Remove any exposed cavity tie back steel from surface and loose brick.
04 90 01-6 MASONRY RESTORATION GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs C. Remove all mortar that has a visible crack on one side of the joint. D. Remove loose particles present or resulting from grinding, chipping or raking by oil free compressed air. E. Mix mortar: 1. Use paddle batch mixer. Begin mixing by combining 3/4 of the needed water, all of the portland cement and hydrated lime and 2 of the sand. Mix for at least three and not more than five minutes. Gradually add sand, water, and mix to obtain uniform visual and physical characteristics. Mixed consistency, molded ball into hand. 2. Use mortar after adding final water to bring to working consistency. Prehydrate mortar according to manufacturer’s directions if lime putty is used. 3. Discard mortar not used within 2-1/2 hours of original mixing time. 4. Re-tempering mortar with additional water is not permitted. F. Dampen brickwork to be pointed. G. Tuck re-pointing mortar into prepared joint in layers, tightly compress. Fill joint in this manner until full and surface is slightly recessed from brick face. H. When surface layer is thumbprint hard, tool joints. Match the surface configuration of the existing mortar or use a 5/8" rounded jointing tool forming concave joint. Avoid tool burn or slicking. I. Clean excess material from all surfaces.
3.6 RE-CONDITIONING OF EXISTING LINTELS A. At Brick Lintels: Clean from surface all rust, scale, dirt and other foreign substances to bare metal, prime and paint per Section 09 90 00.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF BACKER-ROD MATERIAL A. When using backup material comprised of tubular or rod stock, avoid lengthwise stretching of the material. Do not twist or braid backer material at windows and louvers at penthouses. B. Installation tool: 1. Do not puncture the exterior skin or surface of the backer material. 2. For installation of backup material, provide a blunt-surfaced tool of wood or plastic, having shoulders designed to ride on the adjacent finished surface and a protrusion of the required dimensions to assure uniform depth of backup material below the sealant. 3. Do not, under any circumstance, use a screwdriver or similar tool for this purpose. 4. Using the approved tool, smoothly and uniformly place the backup material to the depth indicated on the drawings or otherwise required, compressing the backer material 25% to 50% and securing a positive fit. Do not insert the depth of the backer material beyond 1/2".
3.8 INSTALLATION OF SEALANTS A. At windows and louvers prior to start of installation of each joint, type according to the details on the drawings and verify that the required proportion of width of joint to depth of joint ration has been secured. 1. Minimum size of joint shall be four times the anticipated movement. 2. Joint depth to be 1/4 inch for joints 1/4 inch to 2 inch in width. 3. Maximum joint size approximately 1 1/4" width x 3/8" depth in a single application. GCPS Southern High School MASONRY RESTORATION 04 90 01-7 Façade Renovations & Repairs B. Equipment 1. Apply sealant under pressure with power actuated hand gun or manually operated hand gun, or by other appropriate means. 2. Use guns with a nozzle of proper size and providing sufficient pressure to completely fill the joints as designed. 3. If multi-component sealants are used, a two blade mixing paddle is required in the mixing process. C. Thoroughly and completely mask joints where the appearance of primer or sealant on adjacent surfaces would be objectionable. D. Temperature: Install all work of this section when substrate surface temperature is above 40°F and below 140°F unless the applicator obtains prior approval from the sealant manufacturer to install material outside of this temperature range. E. Moisture: Do not apply work of this section on surfaces which are wet, damp, or have frost. F. Install the sealant in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, thoroughly filling joints to the recommended width and depth. G. Dry tool exposed joints to force material against backing material causing the caulking to obtain full surface contact with the joint interfaces. Finished joint will have a slightly concave surface, be uniform and neatly finished. H. Cleaning up: 1. Remove masking tape immediately after joints have been tolled. 2. Keep clean adjacent surfaces free from excess sealant as the installation progresses, using solvent or cleaning agent recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 3. Upon completion of the work of this section, promptly remove from the job site all debris, empty containers, and surplus material derived from this portion of the work.
3.9 CONCRETE REPAIR - APPLICATION
A. Surface Preparation: 1. Prepare concrete substrate in accordance with ICRI Technical Guideline #310.2: Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, and Polymer Overlays. 2. Mechanically roughen or high pressure water-jet existing concrete substrate to a minimum concrete surface profile of CSP-4 or higher. 3. Remove all unsound concrete and provide a profiled, porous surface. Substrate must be structurally sound, dust-free, and free of grease, oil, dirt, curing compounds, release agents, or any other surface or penetrated contaminants that will adversely affect bond. 4. Sanding, cup grinding, or wire-abrading are not approved surface preparation methods. 5. Substrate must be saturated, surface dry (SSI) and free of standing water. 6. Prime SSD substrate with slurry coat consisting of two parts powder to one part water or ACRY-LOK from W.R. Meadows. 7. Do not allow slurry coat to become dry or tack-free. If slurry coat becomes dry or tack-free prior to application of the bulk mix, reapply slurry coat after the already primed substrate has been properly saturated to SSD condition.
04 90 01-8 MASONRY RESTORATION GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs B. Placement: 1. Compact mortar into properly prepared (SSD) potable water per bag depending on desired consistency. Mix for three minutes or until homogenous and until lump-free. Do not mix more material than can be placed and finished within 8-12 minutes at 77 o F (25 o C). Do not over-mix. MEADOW-PATCH 20 may be mixed with 1.25 gallons (4.7 L) of ACRY-LOK per bag to achieve greater durability and enhanced performance.
C. Curing: 1. Cure mortar immediately following application using a suitable water-based curing compound or in accordance with ACI 308. 2. When conditions exist for early water loss, such as, but not limited to , high temperature [90 o F (32o C)], high winds, direct sun, low humidity, or thin and/or small area patches, wet curing for 24 hours, immediately followed by an application of curing compound.
3.10 RESTORATION CLEANING A. Cleaning Existing Masonry: 1. Prewash: a. Pre-wet existing masonry and limestone surface with clean water. b. Apply a heavy coating of the limestone and masonry prewash by using a roller. c. Let the prewash stay on the surface 30-60 minutes. Longer dwell times may be required with lower temperatures. Do not let material dry on surface. d. Pressure rinse, making sure to flush each portion of the masonry surface with concentrated water pressure. The best combination of rinsing pressure and water volume is provided by masonry washing equipment generating 400-1000 psi with a water flow rate of 6-8 gallons per minute delivered through a 15-45 degree fan spray tip. Equipment should be adjustable to reduce water flow rate and rinsing pressure as required for controlled cleaning of more sensitive surfaces. e. Brick, sandstone and other noncalcareous masonry: Immediately apply a solution for Sure Klean Limestone and Masonry Afterwash or Sure Klean Limestone Restorer, following the instructions on the product label. 2. Afterwash: a. Immediately after rinsing the prewash from masonry surface, apply the diluted Afterwash to the wet surface. b. Let the Afterwash stay on the surface for three to five minutes. c. Pressure rinse from the bottom of the treated area to the top. Make sure to cover each portion of the masonry surface with a concentrated stream of water. To avoid streaking, keep wall surfaces immediately below area being cleaned running wet and free of cleaner rundown and residues. The best combination of rinsing pressure and water volume is provided by masonry washing equipment generating 400-1000 psi with a water flow rate of 6-8 gallons per minute delivered through a 15-45 degree fan spray tip. Equipment should be adjustable to reduce water flow rate and rinsing pressure as required for controlled cleaning of more sensitive surfaces. 3. Restoration Cleaner: a. After protecting all non-masonry surfaces thoroughly pre-wet the area to be cleaned with fresh water. b. Apply cleaning solution liberally using low-pressure spray (50 psi), roller or densely filled (tampico) masonry washing brush. GCPS Southern High School MASONRY RESTORATION 04 90 01-9 Façade Renovations & Repairs c. Leave the cleaning solution on the surface for 3-5 minutes. Reapply. d. Light scrubbing improves cleaning results especially if high-pressure rinsing equipment isn’t available. Keep people away from treated surfaces. e. Water rinse with low-pressure flood rinse to remove initial acidic residue with minimum risk of wind drift. Then rinse the treated area thoroughly with high-pressure spray. Rinse from the bottom to the top. Flush each section of the surface with a concentrated stream of water. Keep the wall below wet and rinsed free of cleaner and residues to avoid streaks. The best combination of rinsing pressure and water volume is provided by masonry washing equipment generating 400-1000 psi with a water flow rate of 6-8 gallons per minute delivered through a 15-45 degree fan spray tip. Equipment should be adjustable to reduce water flow rate and rinsing pressure as required for controlled cleaning of more sensitive surfaces.
3.11 CONCRETE REPAIR A.
3.12 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair of deficiencies: 1. Installations of details noted as deficient during final inspection must be repaired and corrected by applicator, and made ready for reinspection, within five (5) working days. B. Clean-up: 1. Immediately upon job completion, roof membrane, flashing surfaces, ground and surrounding areas shall be cleaned of debris.
END OF SECTION
04 90 01-10 MASONRY RESTORATION GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
DIVISION 5
METALS
BUSHEY FEIGHT MORIN ARCHITECTS INC. 473 NORTH POTOMAC STREET HAGERSTOWN, MARYLAND 21740 301-733-5600 FAX: 301-733-5612
SECTION 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Structural shapes. 2. Channels and angles. 3. Hollow structural sections. 4. Structural pipe. 5. Structural plates and bars. 6. Floor plates. 7. Fasteners, connectors, and anchors.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Institute of Steel Construction: 1. AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. 2. AISC Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. 3. AISC Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Single-Angle Members. 4. AISC Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings. 5. AISC Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single-Angle Members. 6. AISC Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections. 7. AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings Allowable Stress Design, and Plastic Design.
B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. 3. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished. 4. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 5. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 6. ASTM A193/A193M - Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service. 7. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength. 8. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 9. ASTM A500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
GCPS: Southern High School STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 1 Façade Renovations & Repairs
10. ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. 11. ASTM A514/A514M - Standard Specification for High-Yield-Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding. 12. ASTM A529/A529M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon- Manganese Steel of Structural Quality. 13. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 14. ASTM A618 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Tubing. 15. ASTM A786/A786M - Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates. 16. ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes. 17. ASTM B695 - Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel. 18. ASTM E94 - Standard Guide for Radiographic Examination. 19. ASTM E164 - Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of Weldments. 20. ASTM E165 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination. 21. ASTM E709 - Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination. 22. ASTM F436 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. 23. ASTM F959 - Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners. 24. ASTM F1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength.
C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination. 2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
D. Research Council on Structural Connections: 1. RCSC - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.
E. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings: 1. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Manual. 2. SSPC Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Paint. 3. SSPC Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I - Inorganic and Type II - Organic). 4. SSPC SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning. 5. SSPC SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning. 6. SSPC SP 10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments, and fasteners. 2. Connections.
05 12 00 - 2 STRUCTURAL STEEL GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 3. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.
B. Mill Test Reports: Submit indicating structural strength, destructive and non- destructive test analysis.
C. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
D. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within previous 12 months.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with the following: 1. AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. 2. AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings Allowable Stress Design, and Plastic Design.
B. Perform Work in accordance with State of Maryland and Garrett County standards.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 10 years documented experience.
B. Erector: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience.
C. Shop Painter: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience.
D. Welders and Welding Procedures: AWS D1.1 qualified within previous 12 months.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL
A. Structural W-Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M; Grade
B. Channels and Angles: ASTM A36/A36M
C. Round Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500, Grade B.
D. Square and Rectangular Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500, Grade B.
E. Structural Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B.
GCPS: Southern High School STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 3 Façade Renovations & Repairs
F. Structural Plates ASTM A36/A36M
2.2 FASTENERS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
A. High Strength Bolts: ASTM A325; Type 1. 1. Finish: Unfinished.
B. Nuts: ASTM A563 heavy hex type. 1. Finish: Unfinished. 2. Washers: ASTM F436; Type 1, circular
C. Threaded Rods: ASTM A36/A36M. 1. Finish: Mechanically galvanized
D. Forged Structural Steel Hardware: 1. Clevises and Turnbuckles: ASTM A108; Grade 1085. 2. Eye Nuts and Eye Bolts: ASTM A108; Grade 1030. 3. Sleeve Nuts: ASTM A108; Grade 1018. 4. Rod Ends, Yoke Ends and Pins, Cotter Pins, and Coupling Nuts: Carbon steel.
2.3 WELDING MATERIALS
A. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC Paint 15, Type 1, red oxide
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. Grind exposed welds smooth.
B. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors.
2.6 FINISH
A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 3.
B. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be in contact with concrete.
C. Galvanizing for Structural Steel Members: ASTM A123/A123M; minimum 1.2 oz/sq ft coating thickness; galvanize after fabrication.
D. Galvanizing for Fasteners, Connectors, and Anchors: 1. Hot-Dipped Galvanizing: ASTM A153/A153M. 2. Mechanical Galvanizing: ASTM B695; Class 50 minimum.
05 12 00 - 4 STRUCTURAL STEEL GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS
A. Quality Requirements: Testing, inspection and analysis requirements.
B. Shop test bolted and welded connections as specified for field quality control tests.
C. When fabricator is approved by authority having jurisdiction, submit certificate of compliance indicating Work performed at fabricator's facility conforms to Contract Documents. 1. Specified shop tests are not required for Work performed by approved fabricator.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify bearing surfaces are at correct elevation.
B. Verify anchors rods are set in correct locations and arrangements with correct exposure for steel attachment.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Furnish templates for installation of anchor rods and embedment’s in concrete and masonry work.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.
B. Field weld components indicated on Drawings
C. Field connect members with threaded fasteners; torque to required resistance tighten to snug tight for bearing type connections.
D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect/Engineer.
E. After erection, touch up welds and abrasions to match shop finishes.
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.
B. Maximum Offset from Alignment: 1/4 inch.
GCPS: Southern High School STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 5 Façade Renovations & Repairs
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Bolted Connections: Inspect in accordance with AISC specifications. 1. Visually inspect all bolted connections. 2. For Direct Tension Indicators, comply with requirements of ASTM F959. Verify that gaps are less than gaps specified in Table 2.
B. Welding: Inspect welds in accordance with AWS D1.1. 1. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies. 2. Visually inspect all welds. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164; perform on all full penetration welds. 4. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165. 5. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709. 6. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94.
C. Correct defective bolted connections and welds.
END OF SECTION
05 12 00 - 6 STRUCTURAL STEEL GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 05 21 00 - STEEL JOISTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Open web steel joists, with bridging, attached seats, and anchors at areaway slab replacement.
B. Loose bearing plates and anchor bolts for site placement.
1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Anchors for casting into concrete.
B. Section 04 30 00 - Unit Masonry System: Anchors for embedding into masonry.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04 10 00 - Mortar: Grouting base plates and bearing plates.
B. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel.
C. Section 05 31 30 - Steel Deck.
D. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Non-framing steel fabrications.
E. Section 09 90 00 - Painting.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A108 - Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality.
B. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Threaded Standard Fasteners.
C. ASTM A325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.
D. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
E. FS TT-P-636 - Primer Coating, Alkyd, Wood and Ferrous Metal.
F. SJI - Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists K, KCS and LH Series.
G. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate standard designations, configuration, sizes, spacing, locations of joists, and joist leg extensions. 2. Joist coding, bridging, connections, and attachments.
GCPS Southern High School STEEL JOISTS 05 21 00-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs 3. Cambers and finish.
C. Welders' Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificates under provisions of Section 01 33 00 that welders employed on the Work have met AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with SJI Standard Specifications, Load Tables, and Weight Tables, including headers and other supplementary framing.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum ten (10) years documented experience.
B. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00 and to SJI requirements.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01 60 00 and to SJI requirements.
C. Protect joists from distortion or damage.
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings and shop drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Open Web Joists Members: SJI Type K, and KCS.
B. Anchor Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325. galvanized to ASTM A153.
C. Primer: PPG Water Base Inhibitive metal primer 90-712 at 4.8 mils MWF.
D. Structural Steel for Supplementary Framing and Joist Leg Extensions: ASTM A36.
E. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Provide bottom and top chord extensions as indicated on drawings.
B. Frame special sized openings in joist chord framing as detailed.
05 21 00-2 STEEL JOISTS GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 2.3 FINISH
A. Shop prime joists. Do not prime surfaces that will be field welded or in contact with concrete.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and analysis of components will be performed under provisions of Section 01 40 00.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions.
3.2 ERECTION
A. Erect and bear joists on supports and conform with all applicable code requirements.
B. Allow for erection loads. Provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain framing safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bridging and bracing.
C. Coordinate placement of anchors in concrete or masonry construction for securing bearing plates and angles.
D. After joist alignment and installation of framing, field weld joist seat to bearing plates and angles.
E. Position and field weld joist chord extensions and wall attachments as detailed.
F. Frame floor and roof openings greater than 12 inches with supplementary framing.
G. Do not permit erection of decking until joists are braced, bridged, and secured.
H. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of joist fabricator and Architect/Engineer.
I. After erection, clean, brush and prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete.
3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch.
B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment: 1/4 inch.
GCPS Southern High School STEEL JOISTS 05 21 00-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01 40 00.
END OF SECTION
05 21 00-4 STEEL JOISTS GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 05 31 10 - STEEL DECK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Steel roof deck at portico.
B. Steel floor deck at Media corridor entrance for elevated slab.
C. Bearing plates and angles per Sections 05 12 00 or 05 50 00.
1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Installation of anchors for bearing plates and angles cast in concrete.
B. Section 04 81 00 - Unit Masonry System: Installation of anchors for bearing plates and angles embedded in masonry.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel: Structural framed openings larger than 12 inches.
B. Section 05 40 00 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Light gauge framed roof trusses.
C. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrication.
D. Section 06 06 00 - Rough Carpentry.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. AISI - Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.
B. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel.
C. ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality.
D. ASTM A611 - Steel, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Carbon, Structural.
E. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
F. SDI - Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes and standards: 1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."
GCPS Southern High School STEEL DECK 05 31 10-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs 2. American Welding Society (AWS), D1.3 Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. 3. Steel Deck Institute (SDI), Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and Roof Decks. 4. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials, West Conshohocken, PA. 5. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Chantilly, VA.
B. Qualification of Field Welding: Use qualified welding processes and welding operators in accordance with “Welder Qualification” procedures of AWS.
C. Underwriters' Label: Provide metal roof deck units listed in Underwriters' Laboratories "Fire Resistance Directory", with each deck unit bearing the UL label and marking for specific system detailed.
1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design metal decking in accordance with SDI Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks.
B. Calculate to structural limit stress design and maximum vertical deck deflection of 1/240.
C. Lateral deflection of diaphragm shall not exceed 1/500 of the story height.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate decking plan, support locations, projections, openings and reinforcement, pertinent details, and accessories. Indicate temporary shoring of decking where required.
C. Product Data: Provide deck profile characteristics and dimensions, structural properties, and finishes.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate specific installation sequence, and special instructions.
E. Provide test data for mechanical fasteners used in lieu of welding for fastening deck to supporting structures.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
05 31 10-2 STEEL DECK GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs C. Cut plastic wrap to encourage ventilation.
D. Separate sheets and store decking on dry wood sleepers; slope for positive drainage.
1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings and confirmed by shop drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A611, Grade B Structural Quality; with G60 galvanized coating conforming to ASTM A446.
B. Sheet Steel: ASTM A611, Grade C, galvanized.
C. Bearing Plates and Angles: ASTM A36 steel, unfinished.
D. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1.
E. Touch-Up Primer: Zinc chromate type.
F. Steel for Galvanized Metal Deck Units: ASTM A 653-94, grade as required complying with SDI specifications.
G. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36.
H. Sheet Metal Accessories: ASTM A 526, commercial quality, galvanized.
I. Galvanizing Repair: Where galvanized surfaces are damaged, prepare surfaces and repair in accordance with procedures specified in ASTM A 780.
J. Flexible Closure Strips: Manufacturer's standard vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.
K. Metal Deck: Corrugated galvanized ‘S’ deck, 9/16” deep, 26 ga. min. thickness. 1. Gage, rib depth, rib configuration and finish; lapped and stitched joints. 2. Sheet steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M-97, Grade A structural quality; with G90 coating (galvanized). 3. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Consolidated Systems, Inc., Columbia, SC. b. Roof Deck, Inc., Hightstown, NJ. c. United Steel Deck, Inc., Summit NJ. d. Verco Manufacturing Co., Phoenix, AZ. e. Vulcraft Division, Nucor Corp., Florence, SC. f. Wheeling Corrugating Co., Division Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corp., Wheeling WV. 4. Metal roof deck fasteners: TRAXX by ITW Buildex, Itasca, IL. 5. Deck sidelap stitching: 10-16 x 3/4 inch Hex Washer Head, TRAXX, #1 Drill Point.
GCPS Southern High School STEEL DECK 05 31 10-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs 6. Deck to bar joist: 12-24 x 7/8 inch Hex Washer Head, TRAXX, #4 Drill Point. 7. Deck to structural steel: 12-24 x 1-1/4 inch Hex Washer Head, TRAXX, #5 Drill Point. 8. Rust inhibitive paint: Rust Inhibitive Metal Primer.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Flute Closures: Closed cell foam rubber, one (1) inch thick; profiled to fit tight to the decking.
B. Sound Absorbing Batts: Inert, inorganic mineral fibered material.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Metal Decking: Sheet steel, configured as follows: 1. Span Design: Multiple 2. Minimum Metal Thickness (Excluding Finish): 36 gage 3. Nominal Height: 9/16 inch, fluted profile to SDI WR 4. Formed Sheet Width: 36 inch 5. Side Joints: Overlapped and screwed 6. Flute Sides: Plain vertical face 7. Finish: Galvanized
B. General: Form deck units in lengths to supports, with flush, telescoped, or nested 2 inch laps at ends and interlocking or nested side laps, of metal thickness, depth, and width as indicated.
C. Roof Deck Units: Provide deck configurations that comply with SDI "Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck."
D. Metal Closure Strips: Fabricate metal closure strips for openings between decking and other construction, of not less than 0.045-inch min. (18 gage) sheet steel. Form to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of cells or flutes and sides of decking.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Erect metal decking in accordance with SDI Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks.
B. Bear decking on masonry or concrete support surfaces with 4 inch minimum bearing. Align and level. C. Bear decking on steel supports with 1-1/2 inch minimum bearing. Align and level.
05 31 10-4 STEEL DECK GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
D. Fasten deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports with 3/4" puddle welds (through weld washers if 24 ga. or thinner) at 12 inches oc maximum, parallel with the deck flute and at every other transverse flute. 1. Mechanically attach sections of deck to steel support members 12 inches o.c. (at every other rib) and 6 inches o.c. (at every rib) in roof corner and roof perimeter areas using self-tapping No. 8 or larger machine screws. a. Side laps: Mechanically fasten 18 inches o.c. b. Mechanically fasten steel deck to supporting member at each deck side lap, regardless of spacing. c. Overlap steel deck end laps 2 inches minimum. Mechanically attach at the above listed factors.
E. Deck protection: Apply rust inhibitive paint over surface rust.
F. Uplift Loading: Install and anchor roof deck units to resist gross uplift loading of 45 psf for all roof areas.
G. Cutting and Fitting: Cut and neatly fit deck units and accessories around other work projecting through or adjacent to the decking, as shown.
H. Weld in accordance with AWS D1.1.
I. Mechanically clinch male/female side laps at 24 inches oc maximum.
J. Reinforce steel deck openings from 6 to 24 inches in size with 2 1/2 x 2 1/2 x 3/16 inch steel angles. Place angles perpendicular to flutes; extend minimum two flutes beyond each side of opening and puddle weld to deck at each flute. Openings larger than 24" to 48" shall be reinforced with 4 x 3 x 1/4" steel angle framed to structure.
K. Install 6 inch minimum wide sheet steel cover plates, of same thickness as decking, where deck changes direction. Puddle weld 12 inches oc maximum.
L. Install sheet steel closures and angle flashings to close openings between deck and walls, columns, and openings.
M. Install single row of foam flute closures above walls and partitions perpendicular to deck flutes.
N. Position roof sump pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Puddle weld at each deck flute.
O. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, clean, wire brush and coat welds, burned areas, and damaged surface coating, with touch-up prime paint.
P. Prior to start of roofing membrane, install sound absorbing batts. Protect as required to avoid damage from environmental elements.
END OF SECTION
GCPS Southern High School STEEL DECK 05 31 10-5 Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 05 40 00 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Load bearing formed steel stud exterior portico framing.
B. Formed steel joist, purlin, slotted channel, and framing and bridging.
C. Light gauge steel roof trusses.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel
B. Section 05 31 10 - Steel Deck: Metal floor and roof decking.
C. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrication
D. Section 06 11 40 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Rough wood blocking.
E. Section 07 21 30 - Batt and Blanket Insulation: Insulation within framing members.
F. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Sealers.
G. Section 09 11 00 - Metal Stud Framing System: Light weight, non-load bearing metal stud framing.
H. Section 09 26 00 - Gypsum Board Systems: Wall beard.
I. Section 09 51 10 - Suspended Acoustical Ceilings: Ceiling suspension system.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute - Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual.
B. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
C. ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot Dip Process, Physical (Structural) Quality.
D. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process.
E. ASTM A570 - Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet and Strip. Structural Quality.
F. ASTM A611 - Steel, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Carbon, Structural.
G. ASTM A645 - Steel Sheet, Pressure Vessel Plates, Five Percent Nickel Alloy Steel, Specially Heat Treated.
H. ASTM C955 - Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Bracing or Bridging, for Screw Application of Gypsum Board and Metal Plaster Bases.
GCPS Southern High School COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs I. AWCI (Association of Wall and Ceiling Industries) - Specifications Guide for Cold Formed Steel Structural Members.
J. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
K. AWS D1.3 - Light Steel Welding Code.
L. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Steel Structures Painting Manual.
M. MFMA (Metal Framing Manufacturers Association) - Guidelines for the Use of Metal Framing.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate component details, framed openings, bearing, anchorage, loading, welds, type and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of related work.
C. Indicate stud and roof joist layout sealed and signed by a qualified registered professional structural engineer licensed in the State of Maryland. 1. Indicated description of design criteria 2. Engineering analysis depicting member stresses and deflection. 3. Member sizes, gauges and connections. 4. Member truss support reactions. 5. Top chord, bottom chord and web tracing requirements.
D. Describe method for securing studs to tracks and for bolted or welded framing connections. E. Product Data: Provide data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish, product criteria and limitations.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three (3) years documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five (5) years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 31 00.
B. Coordinate with the placement of components within the stud framing system.
05 40 00-2 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Dale/Incor of Baltimore, MD.
B. Marino Industries Corp of South Plainfield, NJ
C. Unimast Inc. of Franklin of Park IL
D. Dietrich Industries of Baltimore, MD
E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
2.2 FRAMING MATERIALS
A. Studs – As noted on drawings: 1. ASTM C955, formed to channel shape, solid web, knurled faces; 16 gage thick, 1 5/8 inch face and 6 inch depth. 2. ASTM C955, formed to channel shape, solid web, knurled faces; 16 gage thick, 1 5/8 inch face and 3-5/8 inch depth.
B. Joists: ASTM A446 Grade sheet steel, formed to channel shape, punched web; 16 gage thick, 1 1/2 inch face, 10 inch depth.
C. Track: Formed steel; channel shaped; same width as studs, tight fit; 16 gage thick, solid web.
2.3 OVERFRAMING
A. Second Framing 1. Purlins shall be cold-formed sections attached to post framing. Purlin spacing shall be maximum 4 ft. 0 in. measured on the slope. 2. Girts shall be provided for wall covering support. The roofing system manufacturer shall determine girt elevations. 3. Posts shall be cold-formed sections spaced 5 ft. on center and supported by the existing framing.
B. Lateral Bracing: 1. Lateral bracing is the x-bracing that shall resist horizontal loads. The bracing shall be provided in the roof framing system.
C. Roofing System Coverings shall be in accordance with Section 07 61 10 and as detailed.
D. Governing Code: 1. Steel design shall conform to the applicable allowable stress design sections of latest edition of the AISI Codes referenced by the IBC 2000 and local amendments. 2. If the building code specified by the buyer does not specifically address any of the design considerations identified below, those conditions shall be designed in accordance with ASCE 7-98.
E. Loads shall be applied in accordance with the governing Building Code. Live and roof snow loads shall be applied to the horizontal projection of the roof and wind loads applied perpendicular to the loaded surface. 1. Roof Live Load shall be 30 psf
GCPS Southern High School COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs Roof live loads shall not be reduced for structural members based on its tributary load areas per applicable codes. 2. Collateral Dead Load shall be 5 psf. Concentrated Dead Loads shall be as shown on Contract Drawings. 3. Snow Load: a. Roof snow load shall be calculated as follows: (1) Ground Snow: (Pg) = 35 psf (2) Importance Factor: (I) = 1.1 (3) Exposure Factor: (Ce) = 0.9 (4) Thermal Factor: (Ct) = 1.0 (5) Roof Snow: (Pf) = 24.5 psf b. Snow Drift Loads shall be applied to all appropriate roof areas as defined by the building configuration and the governing building code. 4. Wind Loads shall be calculated in accordance with the governing Building Code and the following items: a. Basic Wind Speed = 90 mph b. Exposure category = C c. Importance Factor = 1.15 5. Seismic loads shall be calculated in accordance with the governing Building ode and the following items.: a. Seismic Design Category B, Use Group II b. Importance Factor = 1.25 c. Site Class = D 6. Thermal Forces: Roofing assembly to permit movement of components without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subjected to a temperature range of -40 to 200 degrees Fahrenheit. 7. Miscellaneous Loads: Other loads as shown on the Contract Drawings.
F. Load Combinations as specified in the governing Building Code.
G. Wind loads for deflection calculations shall be based on ten-year mean recurrence. Unless otherwise specified below, AISI “Serviceability Design Considerations for Low-Rise Buildings” deflection criteria will be used. 1. Secondary-framing deflections shall not exceed: a. Purlins: Span/240 b. Girts: Span/240 c. Positive roof drainage as specified 2. Roof Sheeting deflection shall not exceed: a. Vertical roof snow or live load deflection: Span/360
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered.
B. Plates, Gussets, Clips: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered.
C. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC - Paint 20 Type I Inorganic zinc rich.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. Self-drilling, Self-tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A123, hot dip galvanized to 1.25 oz/sq ft. 05 40 00-4 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs B. Anchorage Devices: Drilled expansion bolts.
C. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate assemblies of framed sections of sizes and profiles required; with framing members fitted, reinforced, and braced to suit design requirements.
B. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site, ready for installation.
2.7 FINISHES
A. Studs: Galvanize to G90 coating class.
B. Tracks and Headers: Galvanize to G90 coating class.
C. Joists: Galvanize to G90 coating class.
D. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Same finish as framing members.
E. Plates, Gussets, Clips: Same finish as framing members.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01 31 00.
B. Verify that building framing components are ready to receive work.
3.2 ERECTION OF STUDDING
A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to partition layout. Secure in place with fasteners by welding at maximum 24 inches oc. Coordinate installation of sealant with floor and ceiling tracks.
C. Place studs at 16 inches oc or 12" o.c. within 6'-0" of corners; not more than 2 inches from abutting walls and at each side of openings. Connect studs to tracks using fastener method.
D. Construct corners using minimum three studs. Double stud wall openings, door and window jambs.
E. Erect load bearing studs one piece full length. Splicing of studs is not permitted.
F. Erect load bearing studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength, to achieve design requirements.
G. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after erection.
H. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing.
GCPS Southern High School COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-5 Façade Renovations & Repairs I. Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing at non-load bearing framing.
J. Attach cross studs to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls.
K. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent stud rotation.
L. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer.
3.3 ERECTION OF JOISTS
A. Install framing components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Make provisions for erection stresses. Provide temporary alignment and bracing.
C. Place joists as indicated at 16 inches o.c.; not more than 2 inches from abutting walls. Connect joists to supports using fastener method.
D. Set floor joists parallel and level, with lateral bracing and bridging.
E. Locate joist end bearing directly over load bearing studs or provide load distributing member to top of stud track.
F. Provide web stiffeners at reaction points.
G. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with zinc rich primer.
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/4 inch in ten (10') feet.
B. Maximum Variation of any Member from Plane: 1/8 inch.
END OF SECTION
05 40 00-6 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:
A. This section includes the materials and application procedures for the installation of miscellaneous steel supports or fabrication as needed.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and Contract Documents, including Section 01 01 00 - Summary of Work, apply to Work of this Section.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 02 41 16 - Demolition
B. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel
C. Section 05 31 10 - Steel Deck
D. Section 06 06 00 - Rough Carpentry
E. Section 07 90 00 - Sealants
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide steel capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
B. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC "Steel Construction Manual."
B. Comply with Section 10 of AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for architecturally exposed structural steel.
C. Fabricator: Engage a firm experienced in fabricating structural steel similar to that indicated for this Project and within 15 percent this project size, with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to fabricate structural steel without delaying the Work. GCPS: Southern High School METAL FABRICATION 05 50 00 - 1 Façade Renovations & Repairs 1. Fabricator must be designated as an AISC-certified plant, Category Sbd. 2. Contractor Option: Comply with the following procedures instead of engaging an AISC-Certified Plant: a. Demonstrate that the fabricator has in place a quality control program for meeting IBC requirements and compliance with AISC recommendations and standards. b. At no additional cost to the Owner, provide for an independent field inspection of fabrications and welding to comply with IBC, AISC and AWS recommendations and standards. c. Provide certified shop inspection reports signed by the fabricator and an independent inspection agency indicating that the steel, as fabricated, complies with requirements of Contract Documents. d. Provide shop drawings signed and sealed by a qualified licensed Structural Engineer, within the project jurisdiction, responsible for design of connections. e. The steel fabricator shall provide signed and sealed field modification details with backup computations for all field revisions. f. Field modifications details and computations must be prepared by same licensed Structural Engineer preparing shop drawings. 3. Provide documentation that fabricator has provided material for and erected at least 3 projects within 15 percent of project size and complexity, in the last 6 years.
D. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of documented experience.
E. Design connections not detailed on the drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Maryland
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.
05 50 00 - 2 METAL FABRICATION GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
B. Steel Sections: ASTM A36.
C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B.
D. Plates: ASTM A283.
E. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B Schedule 40.
F. Fasteners: As detailed.
G. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 galvanized to ASTM A153 for galvanized components.
H. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
I. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC 6 - SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning and Prime.
J. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: PPG Zinc rich type 6-209 galvanized steel primer.
K. Metal Grating: Equal to McNichols Grate Lock Plank Grating, 9” with, 14 ga. traction grip surface, 1-1/2” deep minimum. Provide male/male at outer plank with female/male for others. Provide anchorage devices as required.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
GCPS: Southern High School METAL FABRICATION 05 50 00 - 3 Façade Renovations & Repairs C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts.
D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
E. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to four times the load imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
F. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.
B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified- alkyd primer complying with MPI#79.
C. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Products: a. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer CM18/19. b. Carboline Company; Carbozinc 621. c. ICI Devoe Coatings; Catha-Coat 313. d. International Coatings Limited; Interzinc 315 Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer. e. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97- 670. f. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer. g. Approved equal by Owner.
D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for re-galvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
F. Non-shrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout complying with ASTM C 1107, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications.
05 50 00 - 4 METAL FABRICATION GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs G. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.
2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.
D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat- head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
GCPS: Southern High School METAL FABRICATION 05 50 00 - 5 Façade Renovations & Repairs I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.8 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Exteriors Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC- SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
B. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.
C. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 05 50 00 - 6 METAL FABRICATION GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
F. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.
G. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
H. Obtain Architect/Engineer approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.
I. After erection, clean, brush and prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete.
3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.
B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.
C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.
B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment: 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION
GCPS: Southern High School METAL FABRICATION 05 50 00 - 7 Façade Renovations & Repairs
DIVISION 6
WOOD AND PLASTIC
BUSHEY FEIGHT MORIN ARCHITECTS INC. 473 NORTH POTOMAC STREET HAGERSTOWN, MARYLAND 21740 301-733-5600 FAX: 301-733-5612
SECTION 06 11 40 - WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Roof curbs and cants.
B. Blocking in wall and roof openings.
C. Wood furring and grounds.
D. Concealed wood blocking for support of toilet and bath accessories, wall cabinets, tack boards, and wood trim.
E. Preservative treatment of wood.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place: Concrete openings to receive wood blocking.
B. Section 04 81 00 - Unit Masonry System: Masonry openings to receive wood blocking.
C. Section 05 31 10 – Steel Deck.
D. Section 05 40 00 – Cold Formed Metal Framing.
E. Section 07 21 00 – Thermal Insulation.
F. Section 09 11 10 – Metal Stud Framing System.
G. Section 10 10 50 – Visual Display Boards.
Section 10 80 00 – Toilet and Bath Accessories.
H. Section 11 66 00 – Classroom Casework.
I. Section 12 51 20 – Horizontal Louver Blinds.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ALSC (American Lumber Standards Committee) - Softwood Lumber Standards.
B. APA (American Plywood Association).
C. AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association) C1 - All Timber Products Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process.
D. AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association) C20 - Structural Lumber Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process.
E. NFPA (National Forest Products Association).
GCPS: Southern High School WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 06 11 40-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs F. RIS (Redwood Inspection Service).
G. SPIB (Southern Pine Inspection Bureau).
H. WCLIB (West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau).
I. WWPA (Western Wood Products Association).
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with the following agencies: 1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC. 2. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: In accordance with Section 01 33 00, submit manufacturer’s certification for pressure-treated and fire-treated lumber.
PART 2 ─ PRODUCTS
2.1 BLOCKING & CURBING MATERIALS
A. Lumber Grading Rules: WCLIB and WWPA.
B. Miscellaneous Framing: Stress Group D, S.P.F. species, 19 percent maximum moisture content, pressure preservative treat when wood is in contact with concrete, masonry or metal.
C. Plywood: APA Grade C-C-X; unsanded. 1. Fire Retardant Treated: Locations as indicated in Drawings or as listed below. 2. Tongue and Groove: As indicated in Drawings.
D. Particle board: Will not be acceptable.
2.2 SHEATHING MATERIALS
A. Underlayment: Equal to Georgia-Pacific’s Superwood Hardboard, 4’ x 8’ x ¼”, standard hardboard, APA rated; smooth both sides.
B. Plywood Roof Sheathing: APA Structural I Rated Sheathing EXT, Exposure Durability 1; unsanded – 3/4" thick tongue and groove.
C. Plywood Wall Sheathing: 5/8” thick APA Structural I Rated Sheathing; Exposure Durability 1; sanded.
D. Plywood Floor Sheathing: APA Structural I Rated Sheathing EXT.
E. Underlayment: APA Rated Sturd-I-Floor EXT.
F. Telephone and Electrical Panel Boards: Plywood 3/4" fire retardant.
06 11 40-2 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs G. Exterior Sheathing: Equal to GP- Dens Glass Sheathing, 5/8” Type ‘X’ square edge, 4’ wide’ gypsum panel consisting of a treated water- resistant core with fiberglass mats and primer coat, mold-resistant per ASTM D3273; ASTM E136, noncombustible exceed ASTM C1396 for humidified deflection x10 UL Rated, meets ASTM C1177 flame spread and smoke developed rating 0/0 per ASTM E84.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Fasteners: Hot dipped galvanized steel for high humidity and treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing. 3. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. Bolt or ballistic fastener for anchorages to steel. 4. Machine Bolts: comply with ASTM A307.
B. Other Materials: Provide materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by contractor subject to approval of the architect. The most important features and those requiring detail description are mentioned only not all components are individually described. Carpentry work and miscellaneous items not mentioned or described shall be furnished and/or installed in accordance with the intent of drawings and specifications and as required to complete the work.
2.4 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT
A. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment) EPA Approved: AWPA Treatment C1 using water borne preservative with 0.060 L.I.S. CF retainage. 1. Products treated with “CCA” (chromated copper arsenate) will not be permitted. 2. “ACQ” (amine copper qust) or “CBA” (copper baron azole) treated products will be acceptable.
B. Fire Treatment: Shall be equal to Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc. of Milford, VA (804) 633-5021 Pyro-Guard Complying with AWPA Type A fire retardant treatment and shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84. 1. Interior Fire retardant treated lumber and plywood shall have an equilibrium moisture content of not over 28% when tested in accordance with ASTM D- 3201 at 92% relative humidity. 2. Each piece of fire retardant treated lumber and plywood shall be manufactured under Underwriters Laboratories and shall bear the UL Qualification label for surface burning characteristics in the 30 minute E-84 flame test and also indicate kiln drying after treatment (KDAT).
GCPS: Southern High School WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 06 11 40-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 VERIFICATION
A. Before commencing work, check all lines and levels indicated and such other as has been completed. Should there be any discrepancies, report same in writing to the architect for correction or adjustment. In the event of failure to do so, contractor shall be responsible for correction of any errors.
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. General: Install all wood framing, making proper provisions for work of other trades. Do all cutting of wood required to accommodate plumbing, heating and ventilating, electrical and other trades. Fit neatly around all exposed items, such as outlet boxes, conduit, pipes and ducts.
B. Furring, blocking and backing shall be furnished and installed as indicated or required for formation of architectural features, concealment pipes, conduits, ducts, attachment of supports for toilet room accessories, building specialties, door stops and other fixtures. Contractor shall consult with the trades concerned and set furring and blocking they require. Include fire retardant treated wood blocking for drywall partitions and walls where shown or required.
C. Produce joints which are tight, true and well nailed with members assembled in accordance with the Drawings and with pertinent codes and regulations.
D. Selection of Lumber Pieces: Select individual pieces so that knots and obvious defects will not interfere with placing bolts or proper nailing, and will allow making of proper connections. 1. Cut out and discard defects which render a piece unable to serve its intended function. 2. Lumber may be rejected by the Architect, whether or not it has been installed, for excessive warp, twist, bow, crook, mildew, fungus, or mold, as well as for improper cutting and fitting.
E. Do not shim any framing component.
3.3 FRAMING AND BLOCKING
A. Set members level and plumb, in correct position.
B. Place horizontal members, crown side up.
C. Construct curb members of solid wood sections.
D. Space framing and furring 16 inches oc.
E. Curb roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form corners by alternating lapping side members.
F. Coordinate curb installation with installation of decking and support of deck openings, parapet construction.
06 11 40-4 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 3.4 TELEPHONE AND ELECTRIC BOARDS
A. Install telephone and electrical panel boards with fire-treated plywood sheathing material where required. Size the back board by 12 inches beyond size of electrical panel.
3.5 TOLERANCES
A. Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements: Tolerances.
3.6 SCHEDULES
A. Blocking for cabinetry, toilet accessories and other types of blocking as identified per specifications or drawings: S/P/F species, No. 2 grade or better, 19% maximum moisture content. See Drawings and coordinate in the field.
END OF SECTION
GCPS: Southern High School WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 06 11 40-5 Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 06 20 00 - FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Finish carpentry items, including finish trim.
B. Hardware and attachment accessories.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06 11 40 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Grounds and support framing.
B. Section 06 41 00 - Custom Casework: Shop fabricated custom cabinet work.
C. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass and glazing.
D. Section 09 90 00 - Painting: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
B. AWI - Quality Standards.
C. AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association) C2 - Lumber, Timbers, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes.
D. AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association) C20 - Structural Lumber Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process.
E. BHMA A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware.
F. FS MMM-A-130 - Adhesive, Contact.
G. HPMA (Hardwood Plywood Manufacturer's Association) HP - American Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
H. NEMA (National Electric Manufacturers Association) LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.
I. NHLA (National Hardwood Lumber Association).
J. NWWDA (National Wood Window and Door Association) I.S.4 - Water Repellent Preservative Treatment for Millwork.
K. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.
L. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
GCPS Southern High School FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and accessories, to a minimum scale of 1-1/2 inch to 1 ft.
C. Provide instructions for attachment hardware.
D. Samples: Submit two samples of ballet bar, 12 inch in size illustrating wood grain and specified finish.
E. Submit two samples of wood trim six (6) inches long.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Premium Custom Economy quality. NHLA.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Fabricator: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five (5) years documented experience.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
B. Protect work from moisture damage.
1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 31 00.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS
A Softwood Lumber: PS 20; Graded in accordance with AWI Custom; white pine species, maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with vertical grain, of quality suitable for transparent finish.
B. Hardwood Lumber: Graded in accordance with AWI Custom Premium; Maple species, maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with vertical grain, of quality suitable for transparent finish.
2.2 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Softwood Plywood: PS 1 Grade C-D; Graded in accordance with AWI Custom; veneer lumber core; White Pine species, cut.
B. Wood Particleboard: Will not be allowed.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized finish in concealed locations and stainless steel finish in exposed locations.
06 20 00-2 FINISH CARPENTRY GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
B. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Lumber for Shimming: Softwood lumber of cedar species.
B. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer type.
C. Wood Filler: Solvent Oil base, tinted to match surface finish color.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate to AWI Custom standards.
B. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.
C. Fit exposed sheet material edges with 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) matching hardwood veneer or plastic laminate edging matching adjacent surface. Use one piece for full length only.
D. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install work in accordance with AWI Custom Quality Standard.
B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.
C. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.
D. Install components and trim with nails, screws, or bolts with blind fasteners at 16 inch on center.
F. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch.
B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch.
END OF SECTION
GCPS Southern High School FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 06 41 00 - CUSTOM CASEWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Removal of existing cabinets along exterior wall, storage of such units, and re- installation of cabinets.
B. Cabinet hardware. (Re-installation if removed.)
C. Prefinished surfaces and preparation for site finishing.
D. Preparation for installing utilities.
E. Solid surface windowsills.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06 11 40 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Grounds and support framing.
B. Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry: Related trim not specified in this section.
C. Section 09 90 00 - Painting: Finishing cabinet exterior and interior.
D. Section 11 66 00 - Modular Casework: Factory Fabricated Cabinetry.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/BHMA A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware.
B. AWI - Quality Standards.
C. FS MM-L-736 - Lumber, Hardwood.
D. FS MMM-A-130 - Adhesive, Contact.
E. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA) LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.
F. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.
G. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location, and schedule of finishes.
C. Product Data: Submit data for hardware accessories.
D. Samples: 1. Submit two, 12 x 12 inch size samples, illustrating cabinet finish. 2. Submit two, 12 x 12 inch size samples, illustrating countertop finish. 3. Submit two samples of drawer pulls, hinges and door glides, illustrating hardware finish.
GCPS Southern High School CUSTOM CASEWORK 06 41 00-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform cabinet construction in accordance with AWI Premium quality; perform drawer and door front construction in accordance with AWI Custom quality.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements.
B. During and after installation of work of this section, maintain the same temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces as will occur after occupancy. C. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
B. Protect units from moisture damage.
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings and design drawings.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 31 00.
B. Coordinate the work with plumbing and electrical rough-in.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRICATORS
A. Cavetown Planing Mill, Cavetown, MD.
B. Maryland Millwork, Hagerstown, MD
C. American Cedar and Millwork, Millersville, MD
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
2.2 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Hardwood Lumber: FS MM-L-736; graded in accordance with AWI Custom; average moisture content of 6 percent; species and grade as follows: ITEM SPECIES CUT Cabinet Frame Maple Plain-Slice Exposed Stiles and Rails Maple Plain-Slice Internal Construction Douglas Fir Plain-Slice
06 41 00-2 CUSTOM CASEWORK GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 2.3 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Hardwood Plywood: PS 51; graded in accordance with AWI, core materials of veneer, type of glue recommended for application; face veneer and cuts as follows: ITEM FACE SPECIES CUT Door and Drawer Fronts Maple Plain Slice Drawer Construction Maple Plain Slice Gables and Backs Maple Plain Slice
B. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): Minimum 3/4 inches thick graded in accordance with AWI “Premium” grade and make with high waterproof resin adhesive and sanded faces.
C. Hardboard: is not acceptable.
2.4 MANUFACTURERS - PLASTIC LAMINATE
A. Formica Product, HGPL.
B. Nevamar
C. WilsonArt
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.5 LAMINATE MATERIALS
A. Plastic Laminate: AWI, 0.050 inch General Purpose quality; color, pattern, and surface texture as selected.
B. Laminate Backing Sheet: 0.020 inch Backing Sheet grade, undecorated plastic laminate.
C. Interior Liner: Melamine 0.20 inch NEMA Cl20.
2.6 SOLID SURFACING
A. Solid Surfacing Materials equal to Formica’s Solid Surfacing, Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA-2. 1. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.
B. Special Features: Eased edge treatments.
C. Accessories: 1. Adhesives: For seams and drop edges, Formica Solid Surfacing Seaming Cartridges, 9 ounce (260 ml); color to blend with sheet material. 2. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with the limits of VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
D. Fabrication: 1. Assemble work at shop following manufacturer’s printed fabrication instructions and deliver to job read for installation. Manufacture in largest practical pieces for handling and shipping without seams. a. Grade: AWI Premium b. Fabricate work square and to required lines. c. Recess and conceal fasteners, connections and reinforcing. d. Design construction and installation details to allow for expansion and contraction of materials. Properly frames material with tight, hairline joints held rigidly in place.
GCPS Southern High School CUSTOM CASEWORK 06 41 00-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs
e. Fabricate countertops and vanities with backsplash and side splash pieces to profiles and sizes indicated. f. Fabricate items to profiles shown with connections and supports as indicated or as required for complete installation in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and approved submittals. g. Provide cut-outs for plumbing fixtures and trim, washroom accessories, appliances, and related items. Confirm layout with manufacturer’s cut-out templates before beginning work. Round corners of cut-outs and sand edges smooth. h. Do not exceed manufacturer’s recommended unsupported overhang distances. i. Finish exposed surfaces smooth and polish to low sheen. j. Radius corners and edges.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: Type recommended by AWI and laminate manufacturer to suit application.
B. Edge Trim: 1. Vinyl Tee Moulding: Extruded convex shaped; smooth finish; self locking serrated tongue; of width to match component thickness; color as selected. 2. PVC Edge Band: Extruded Thermoplastic PVC; smooth finish 3 mm thickness x full width of edge; hot melt adhered; color as selected.
C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; chromium plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel finish in exposed locations.
D. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
E. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.
F. Hardware: (Color to be selected by the Owner and Architect) All hardware shall be equal to Doug Mockett and Company unless otherwise noted. 1. Grommet: XG - 3" flip top 2. Table Leg: TL Series 3 inch O.D. by length required with plate leveler and satin chrome finish. 3. Wire Manager: WM-4 4. Clothes Rod: Haffle 988.50 Series with Rosette and 64 theft-proof Haffle Hangers Type 804.57.1 and fastening hardware. 5. Self-Closing Drawer Slide: Haffle 422.86 Series (Black) 6. Pulls: Haffle 101.79.604 7. Hinges: Haffle 354.65.410 8. Cabinet Locks: Haffle 232.35 Series 9. Shelving Standards: Haffle 283.64.918 with 283.13.900 shelf support. 10. Coat Hooks for Cabinets: Equal to Hafele/Hewi #842.61.2 XX (Color to be selected), wall hooks with Hospa screws, 50 mm rosette diameter, nylon, unbreakable, concealed mounting plate and trim cap. 11. Piano Hinges: SC-311, size as required.
G. Smart Boards: Remove existing, store and re-install units when work is complete.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings.
B. Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with 3/8 inch matching hardwood edging. Use one piece for full length only. 06 41 00-4 CUSTOM CASEWORK GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
C. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern.
D. Door and Drawer Fronts: 3/4 inch thick; flush style.
E. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
F. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs.
G. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces.
H. Fabricate metal countertop surfaces pressure glued to plywood core backing with butt welded joints with spline and without visible joints.
I. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops with steel brackets at 16 inches on center.
J. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, and inserts. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Seal contact surfaces of cut edges.
2.9 FINISHING
A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations.
C. On items to receive semi-transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes.
D. Seal, stain and varnish exposed to view surfaces. Brush apply only.
E. Seal stain and varnish internal exposed to view and semi-concealed surfaces. Brush apply only.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 31 00 – Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
C. Verify locations and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Set and secure casework in place; rigid, plumb, and level.
B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.
C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and counter tops.
D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose.
E. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. GCPS Southern High School CUSTOM CASEWORK 06 41 00-5 Façade Renovations & Repairs
F. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces.
G. Seal all joints.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 73 00.
B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean work under provisions of 01 73 00.
B. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings and fixtures.
3.5 SCHEDULES
A. Countertops: As detailed. 1. Plastic laminate top (typical).
B. Plastic laminate covered cabinet.
C. Hardware in typical classrooms: 1. Smart board mounting. 2. Computer table support legs.
D. Windowsills: 1. 1 1/8” solid surfacing with bullnosed edges and apron trim full width of opening.
END OF SECTION
06 41 00-6 CUSTOM CASEWORK GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
DIVISION 7
THERMAL AND MOISTURE CONTROL
BUSHEY FEIGHT MORIN ARCHITECTS INC. 473 NORTH POTOMAC STREET HAGERSTOWN, MARYLAND 21740 301-733-5600 FAX: 301-733-5612
SECTION 07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Foam-plastic board insulation. 2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation. 3. Mineral-wool blanket insulation. 4. Vapor retarders.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and contract documents, including Section 01 01 00 - Summary of Work, apply to this section.
B. Related Sections 1. Section 04 81 00 Unit Masonry Assemblies 2. Section 05 31 10 Steel Deck 3. Section 05 50 00 Metal Fabrication 4. Section 06 11 40 Wood Blocking and Curbing 5. Section 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 6. Section 07 90 00 Sealants 7. Section 09 11 10 Metal Stud Framing
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 208 Cellulose Fiber Insulating Board
B. ASTM C 240 - Testing Cellular Glass Insulating Block.
C. ASTM C 1289 Polyisocyanurate Insulating Board
D. UL Roofing and Materials Directory 2003, Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
E. ASTM C 518: Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus
F. ASTM C578 - Preformed Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
G. ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanker Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.
H. ASTM C 1338: Standard Test method for Determining Fungi Resistance of Insulation Materials and Facings
I. ANSI/ASTM D2842 - Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
J. ASTM E 84: Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
K. ASTM E 96: Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
GCPS Southern High School THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs L. ASTM E119: Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
M. ASTM E 2178: Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials
N. Factory Mutual Global – Approval Guide
O. NFPA 255 - Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
P. NFPA 285: Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of Exterior Non Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components
Q. FS HH-I-530 - Insulation Board, Thermal, Unfaced, Polyurethane or Polyisocyanurate.
R. FS HH-I-551 - Insulation Block and Boards, Thermal (Cellular Glass).
S. FS HH-I-1972/GEN - Insulation Board, Thermal, Faced, Polyurethane or Polyisocyanurate.
T. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Submit manufacturer's product data and application instructions. 1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 2. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product. 3. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
B. Store materials in a clean dry area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or contamination.
D. Do not apply protection course over liquid applied waterproofing membranes containing volatile solvents until all of the solvent has evaporated.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
07 21 00-2 THERMAL INSULATION GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION (RIGID INSUL)
A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive strength indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Owens Corning. d. Pactiv Building Products. e. Or approved equal. 2. Type X, 15 psi.
B. Unfaced Wall Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, Type IV, 25-psi minimum compressive strength; unfaced; fabricated with shiplap or channel edges and with one side having grooved drainage channels. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Pactiv Building Products. d. Or approved equal.
C. Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 2, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Atlas Roofing Corporation. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Rmax, Inc. d. Or approved equal. GCPS Southern High School THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs D. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.
2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Johns Manville. 3. Owens Corning. 4. Or approved equal.
B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
C. Foil-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type II (non-reflective faced), Class C (faced surface not rated for flame propagation); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier).
D. High Performance Requirements: Provide glass-fiber blanket insulation as follows: 1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde. 2. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less than 0.05-ppm formaldehyde.
2.3 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKET INSULATION (SOUND ATTENUATION)
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Fibrex Insulations Inc. 2. Owens Corning. 3. Thermafiber. 4. Or approved equal.
B. Unfaced, Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm.
B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor- retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
C. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers.
07 21 00-4 THERMAL INSULATION GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs D. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type I, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT related to exposure, and Use O related to vapor-barrier-related substrates.
E. Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and has demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated.
2.5 INSULATION FASTENERS
A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers. b. Gemco; Spindle Type. c. Or approved equal. 2. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. 3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
B. Adhesively Attached, Angle-Shaped, Spindle-Type Anchors: Angle welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Gemco; 90-Degree Insulation Hangers. b. Or approved equal. 2. Angle: Formed from 0.030-inch- thick, perforated, galvanized carbon- steel sheet with each leg 2 inches square. 3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
C. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AGM Industries, Inc.; RC150. b. Gemco; R-150. c. Or approved equal. 2. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in the following locations: a. Where indicated.
GCPS Southern High School THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-5 Façade Renovations & Repairs PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE INSULATION
A. On vertical footing and foundation wall surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches below exterior grade line.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION
A. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches o.c. both ways on inside face, and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units firmly against inside substrates. 1. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall ties designed for this purpose and specified in Section 04 81 00 - Unit Masonry.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B. Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 07 21 00-6 THERMAL INSULATION GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. 5. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor- retarder facings, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation. a. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward interior of construction.
C. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: 1. Loose-Fill Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. 2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION
A. Where glass-fiber blankets are indicated for sound attenuation above ceilings, install blanket insulation over entire ceiling area in thicknesses indicated. Extend insulation 48 inches up either side of partitions.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR CONCRETE SUBSTRATES
A. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation anchors as follows: 1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and application indicated. 2. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between concrete substrate and insulation. 3. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not to compress insulation below indicated thickness. 4. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers to tips of spindles.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF CURTAIN-WALL INSULATION
A. Install board insulation in curtain-wall construction where indicated on Drawings according to curtain-wall manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Hold insulation in place by securing metal clips and straps or integral pockets within window frames, spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer to hold insulation securely in place without touching spandrel glass. Maintain cavity width of dimension indicated between insulation and glass. 2. Install insulation where it contacts perimeter fire-containment system to prevent insulation from bowing under pressure from perimeter fire- containment system.
GCPS Southern High School THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-7 Façade Renovations & Repairs 3.9 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.
B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs. 1. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c. 2. Before installing vapor retarders, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor- retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. 3. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.
C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarders.
D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders.
3.10 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION
07 21 00-8 THERMAL INSULATION GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 07 27 26 - FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface preparation.
B. Application of liquid applied asphalt emulsion air/vapor barrier.
C. Application of materials to provide bridge and seal air leakage pathways in 1. Wall and roof connections and penetrations. 2. Connections to foundation walls. 3. Walls, windows, curtain walls, storefronts, louvers or doors 4. Expansion and control joints. 5. Masonry ties. 6. All other penetrations through the wall assembly.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04 81 00 - Unit Masonry Assemblies.
B. Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation.
C. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Sealers.
D. Section 08 11 00 - Steel Doors and Frames.
E. Section 08 52 00 - Aluminum Windows.
F. Section 09 26 00 - Gypsum Board Systems.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D146-97 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Bitumen- Saturated Felts and Fabrics Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.
B. ASTM D412-98a(2002)e1 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension. C. ASTM E96-00e1 (Method B) - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
D. ASTM E283-91 (1999) - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.
E. ASTM E783 - Standard Test Method for Field Measurement of Air Leakage Through Installed Exterior Windows and Doors.
F. ASTM E1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference.
GCPS Southern High School FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 27 26-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs G. ASTM E2178-01 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials.
H. ASTM E2357 - 05 Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Submit manufacturer's product data and application instructions.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Air Barrier Installer shall be currently accredited under the Air Barrier Association of America (ABAA) and ensure applicators are certified in accordance with the ABAA Quality Assurance Program.
B. Obtain air/vapor barrier materials from a single manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacturing the product.
C. Provide products which comply with all state and local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).
1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Preconstruction Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing Work of this section, in accordance with Section 01 31 00.
1.7 MOCK-UPS
A. Prior to installation of air/vapor barrier, apply air/vapor barrier as follows to verify details under shop drawing submittals and to demonstrate tie-ins with adjoining construction, and other termination conditions, as well as qualities of materials and execution.
B. Apply air barrier in field-constructed mock-ups of assemblies specified in Section 04 81 00 and Section 09 26 00.
C. Apply air/vapor barrier in field-constructed mock-ups of assemblies specified in Section 01 60 00.
D. Construct typical exterior wall panel, 8 feet long by 8 feet wide, incorporating back-up wall, cladding, window and doorframe and sill, insulation, flashing, building corner condition, junction with roof system foundation wall and typical penetrations and gaps; illustrating materials interface and seals.
F. Cooperate and coordinate with the Owner's inspection and testing agency. Do not cover any installed air and vapor barrier membrane unless it has been inspected, tested and approved.
07 27 26-2 FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
B. Store materials in a clean dry area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Store at temperatures above 32 oF (0 oC), free from contact with cold or frozen surfaces.
D. Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or contamination.
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Product not intended for uses subject to abuse or permanent exposure to the elements. B. Do not proceed with product application during rain or inclement weather.
C. Do not apply membrane when air or surface temperatures are below 30 oF (-1oC).
D. Do not apply to frozen substrate.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. W. R. Meadows, Inc.
B. W. R. Grace.
C. SIKA.
D. Substitutions in accordance with Section 01 60 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Liquid Air Vapor Barrier System: One component, polymer modified, cold applied liquid air/vapor barrier membrane. 1. Performance Based Specification: Air/vapor barrier membrane shall be an elastomeric asphalt emulsion having the following characteristics: a. Air Permeability ASTM E2357: 0.04 cfm / ft 2 @ 75 Pa (1.57 lbs / ft 2). b. Air Permeability ASTM E2178: 0.004 cfm / ft 2 @ 75 Pa (1.57 lbs / ft 2). c. Water Vapor Permeance ASTM E96 (Method B): ≤0.1 perms. d. Elongation ASTM D412: 1500 %. e. Tensile Strength ASTM D412: 15 psi. 2. Proprietary Based Specification: AIR-SHIELD LM by W. R. MEADOWS.
GCPS Southern High School FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 27 26-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs 2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Flashing and Transition Membrane: Self-adhesive polymeric air/vapor barrier membrane having a thickness of 40 mils. 1. AIR-SHIELD THRU-WALL FLASHING by W. R. MEADOWS.
B. Detailing Compound: Single component joint filler for exterior sheathing panels. 1. AIR SHIELD JOINT FILLER by W.R. MEADOWS.
C. Liquid Flashing: Fluid applied, single component, flashing membrane for rough openings. 1. AIR SHIELD LIQUID FLASHING by W.R. MEADOWS.
D. Joint Tape: Self adhesive polymeric membrane for joints of plywood and oriented strand board (OSB). 1. AIR SHIELD by W.R. MEADOWS.
E. Primer: 1. Temperatures above 40 oF (4 oC): Water Based Primer a. MEL-PRIME ™ W/B Water Base Primer by W. R. MEADOWS. 2. Temperatures below 30 oF (-1oC): Solvent Based Primer. a. MEL-PRIME VOC Compliant Solvent-Base Primer or Standard Solvent-Base Primer by W. R. MEADOWS.
F. Pointing Mastic: mastic for sealing penetrations and terminations of membrane. 1. POINTING MASTIC by W.R. MEADOWS.
G. Concrete Repair Materials: general purpose patching materials. 1. MEADOW-PATCH ™ 5 and 20 Concrete Repair Mortars by W.R. MEADOWS.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive membrane. Notify Architect if surfaces are not acceptable. Do not begin surface preparation or application until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive air/vapor barrier.
B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive air/vapor barrier membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Do not apply membrane to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer.
D. Concrete surfaces must be clean, free of standing water, ice, snow, frost, dust, dirt, oil, curing compounds or any other foreign material that could prevent proper adhesion of the membrane.
E. Patch all holes and voids and smooth out any surface misalignments.
07 27 26-4 FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs F. Patch all cracks, protrusions, small voids, offsets, details, irregularities and small deformities with cementitious patching mortar at least two hours before application.
G. Ensure joints between dissimilar building materials are sealed with a strip of self- adhesive membrane 6" wide, centered over the joint.
H. Exterior Sheathing Panels: 1. Install and fasten exterior sheathing panels according to the sheathing manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Treat all countersunk and removed fasteners with joint filler or liquid flashing material. 3. Inspect the joint to ensure that all areas to receive joint treatment are clean, dry, smooth, and free from all bond-breaking contaminants. 4. Remove and replace any damaged structural wall components. 5. Joint Treatment using joint filler a. Fill joint area with joint filler using a spreader tool or 3” putty knife. b. Extend the joint filler beyond the joint line 3” onto face of exterior sheathing. c. Fully embed 3” wide reinforcing fabric into the wet joint filler, centered over the joint. d. Run the spreader tool or putty knife over the embedded reinforcing fabric to remove any air bubbles.
3.3 APPLICATION OF AIR BARRIER SYSTEM
A. Transition Membrane 1. Prime surfaces to be covered in one working day with applicable primer. 2. Apply transition membrane with a minimum overlap of 3” onto primed surface at all joints, columns, beams and dissimilar materials. 3. Roll membrane firmly into place. 4. Ensure membrane is fully adhered and remove all wrinkles and fish mouths. 5. Overlap subsequent courses of membrane a minimum of 2” and ensure joints are fully adhered. 6. Seal top edge of transition membrane with pointing mastic.
B. Rough Opening Transition Membrane 1. Fluid Applied Transition Membrane using liquid flashing membrane a. Apply a coat of primer on the raw edges of exterior gypsum board. b. Treatment of joints or cracks larger than ¼” and less than ½”. 1) Prefill any joints or cracks with the liquid flashing material. 2) Apply a generous bead of material over the joint. 3) Press, and spread liquid flashing into the joint. 4) Allow material to skin over prior to full application of liquid flashing into the rough opening. c. Treatment of joints or cracks larger than ½” 1) Install backer rod into the joint to control depth of liquid flashing material. 2) Apply a generous bead of material over and into the joint. 3) Press, and spread liquid flashing into the joint. 4) Smooth out using a spreader tool or putty knife 5) Allow material to cure prior to full application of liquid flashing into the rough opening. GCPS Southern High School FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 27 26-5 Façade Renovations & Repairs d. Apply a bead of liquid flashing in the rough opening starting at the top and continuing around the rough opening. e. Spread the material using a spreader tool or putty knife across the rough opening surface. f. Test the material thickness using a wet mil gauge to ensure that it has a thickness of 12-15 mils. g. Apply a generous bead of liquid flashing material to the vertical surface around the rough opening and spread this material 4” – 6” onto the vertical surface with a spreader tool or putty knife. h. Test the thickness to ensure the material has a thickness of 12-15 mils. i. Allow liquid flashing material to dry before installing any windows, doors, wall assembly, and full air barrier material.
B. Through Wall Flashing 1. Prime surfaces to be covered in one working day with applicable primer. 2. Remove release paper prior to application. 3. Apply through wall flashing at base of masonry walls as indicated on drawings. 4. Recess through wall flashing 1/2” from the face of the masonry. 5. Apply a bead of pointing mastic if through wall flashing is not embedded into masonry.
C. Air Barrier Membrane 1. Apply air/vapor barrier membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Thoroughly, mechanically mix membrane prior to application. 3. Apply membrane by spray or roller at a minimum coverage rate of 20-25 ft 2/gal. (60 mils wet, 45 mils dry). Two coats (30 mils wet) may be necessary. 4. Frequently inspect surface area with a wet mil gauge to ensure consistent thickness. 5. Work material into any fluted rib forming indentations. 6. Cured thickness of membrane should be 45 mils dry. 7. Avoid use of products which contain tars, solvents, pitches, polysulfide polymers, or PVC materials that may come into contact with air/vapor barrier system.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Cover air/vapor barrier membrane as soon as possible, since it is not designed for permanent exposure.
END OF SECTION
07 27 26-6 FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 07 41 00 - PREFORMED METAL WALL AND SOFFIT PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Section Includes
A. Metal wall and soffit panel, trim and accessories.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing
B. Section 06 11 40 – Wood Blocking and Curbing
C. Section 07 21 00 – Thermal Insulation
D. Section 07 27 26 – Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barriers
E. Section 07 61 10 – Custom Metal Roofing
F. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Sealers
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate configuration and dimension of components, adjacent construction, required clearances and tolerances, and other affected work.
C. Product Data: Provide product data on shape of components, materials and finishes, anchor types and locations.
D. Samples: Submit two (2) samples, 12 x 12 inches in size illustrating component shape, finish and color.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Panel system installer shall be experienced with the installation of metal wall and roof systems on projects with similar scope and complexity, and acceptable to panel manufacturer.
B. Panel supplier shall furnish calculations confirming structural adequacy if requested.
C. Painted surfaces of metal panels shall meet all specified criteria printed in the manufacturer’s literature. Where possible, field measurements shall be taken prior to metal panel and flashing fabrication.
GCPS Southern High School PREFORMED METAL WALL 07 41 00- 1 Façade Renovations & Repairs AND SOFFIT PANELS 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Protect panel finish per panel manufacturer’s recommendations. Store materials in accordance with panel manufacturer’s recommendations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS – WALL PANELS
A. Tremco
B. Pac-Clad
C. Firestone (Una-Clad)
D. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01 60 00.
2.2 DESCRIPTION – NON-INSULATED WALL PANELS
A. Metal wall panels for Perimeter Fascia’s required to complete the installation shall be manufactured by: 1. Wall Panel Type A: PAC Clad (Basis of Design) Wall Panels Flush – Flush Seam Panels and consists of: a. Orientation: Vertical b. Fastening Method: Concealed c. Depth: 1” to 1-1/2” d. Panel Size: 12” width x most practical length e. Thickness: 24 ga. f. Finish: Kynar 500 color from manufacturer’s full palette (Cardinal Red) 2. Soffit Panel: Equal to PAC Clad Flush Wide Vent Soffit Panel a. Fastening Method: Concealed b. Panel Depth: 1” c. Panel Width: 12” d. Thickness: 032 aluminum e. Finish: Kynar 500 color from manufacturer’s full palette (Almond) f. Vented (12% wide) 3. Wall Panel: Type B: Media Center Entrance – Equal to PAC Clad Precision Wall Panels – Model HWP 16. a. Fastening Method: Concealed b. Panel Depth: 7/8” c. Panel Width: 16” d. Thickness: 24 ga. steel e. Finish: Kynar 500 color from manufacturer’s full palette (Cardinal Red) f. Orientation: Vertical g. Color: Sandstone
07 41 00- 2 PREFORMED METAL WALL GCPS Southern High School AND SOFFIT PANELS Façade Renovations & Repairs 2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Flashings and Closures: Metal flashings shall be fabricated from the same metal, gauge and finish as the exterior panels, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Profile closure strips shall be placed where shown on the drawings and fabricated from metal or synthetic rubber.
B. Fasteners: as recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. All exposed fasteners shall be self-tapping 300 series stainless steel.
D. All self-drilling fasteners shall be protected with a corrosion resistant finish.
E. All sealants shall be compatible with panel materials.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Structural steel (or substructure) required for metal panel attachment shall be level and plumb.
B. Structural steel (or substructure) shall be structurally sound as determined by Architect/Engineer.
C. Structural steel (or substructure) shall be free of defects detrimental to metal panel work
D. The contractor shall examine the alignment of the structural steel (or substructure) before installing any metal panels and shall not proceed with installation if the structural steel (or substructure) is not aligned to the tolerances established by the AISC Code of Standard Practice.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Field erection of all metal panels and accessories to be accomplished using qualified field mechanics and safety practices.
B. Metal panels should be erected level and plumb, in proper alignment and relation to structural steel (or substructure) and established lines. Panel erection must be started correctly and held true to line.
C. Metal panel and accessory erection shall be in accordance with an approved set of shop drawings.
D. Panel and accessory attachments (anchorage) shall be structurally sound, and per engineering recommendations, if required.
E. Where design loads exceed 20 psf and at elevations above 50 feet, exterior panels shall be face fastened with exposed self-tapping screws. GCPS Southern High School PREFORMED METAL WALL 07 41 00- 3 Façade Renovations & Repairs AND SOFFIT PANELS 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Replace panels that have received irreparable damage.
B. Repair panels with minor damage.
C. Clean all foreign material from panel system when applicable.
D. Remove strippable film coating as soon as possible after surrounding material has been installed.
END OF SECTION
07 41 00- 4 PREFORMED METAL WALL GCPS Southern High School AND SOFFIT PANELS Façade Renovations & Repairs
SECTION 07 61 10 - CUSTOM SHEET METAL ROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Pre-finished galvanized sheet steel roofing, associated flashings, and underlayment. 2. Ice and water shield underlayment 3. Downspouts and gutters. 4. Snow rails.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 12 00 -Structural Steel. 2. Section 05 31 10 - Steel Deck. 3. Section 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel Roof Trusses. 4. Section 07 41 00 - Preformed Metal Wall and Soffit Panels. 5. Section 07 71 00 - Manufactured Roof Specialties. 6. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Sealers.
C. Single Source Requirement: All products listed below shall be from same manufacturer for the typical wall panels on the building, separate from the Performing Arts Center. 1. Section 07 41 00 – Performed Metal Wall and Soffit Panels
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM A240/A240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. 2. ASTM A625/A625M - Standard Specification for Tin Mill Products, Black Plate, Single Reduced. 3. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 4. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. 5. ASTM A755/A755M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products. 6. ASTM A792/A792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 7. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal. 8. ASTM B101 - Standard Specification for Lead-Coated Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. 9. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
GCPS Southern High School CUSTOM SHEET METAL ROOFING 07 61 10 - 1 Façade Renovations & Repairs 10. ASTM B370 - Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. 11. ASTM B749 - Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products. 12. ASTM D226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 13. ASTM D1970 - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection. 14. ASTM D2178 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 15. ASTM D4397 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications. 16. ASTM D4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free.
B. Copper Development Association Inc.: 1. CDA - Cooper Brass Bronze Design Handbook: Architectural Applications.
C. Federal Specification Unit: 1. FS TT-C-494 - Coating Compound, Bituminous, Solvent Type, Acid Resistant.
D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors: 1. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details.
C. Product Data: Submit data on metal types, finishes, and characteristics.
D. Samples: 1. Submit two samples 16 x 18 inch in size illustrating metal roofing mounted on plywood backing illustrating typical seam, external corner, internal corner, valley, ridge, vapor barrier, insulation, slip sheet material, and finish. 2. Submit two samples 16 x 16 inch in size illustrating metal finish color.
1.4 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
07 61 10 - 2 CUSTOM SHEET METAL ROOFING GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual and standard details, except as otherwise noted.
B. UL 90 Classification.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer and Installer: Company specializing in sheet metal roof installations with minimum five (5) years documented experience in similar type of construction and documenting successful completion of contracts for projects similar in size, scope and products.
B. The installer shall be certified by the roofing manufacturer to install the specified weather and watertight roofing system as specified.
C. All work related to the roofing system (including curbs, boots and roof work related to mechanical, plumbing, electrical and lightning protection) shall be performed by the roofing installer or by entity qualified and approved by the roofing manufacturer for the specified warranty.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.
C. Prevent contact with materials causing discoloration or staining.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Coordinate with Work for installing recessed flashing reglets.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Section 01 74 00 – Warranties and Bonds: Product warranties and product bonds.
B. Furnish twenty (20) year watertight manufacturer warranty for custom sheet metal roofing. 1. The Manufacturer shall provide any design required to address issues of expansion and contraction in the building and in the roofing panels. Coordinate with structural design. The roof details are based on fixing the panels at the ridge. Propose alternative details for the Architect’s consideration if the panels will be fixed at another location.
GCPS Southern High School CUSTOM SHEET METAL ROOFING 07 61 10 - 3 Façade Renovations & Repairs 2. Manufacturer shall warrant the metal roof against rupture or perforation or from structural failure, corrosion, and water penetration due to atmospheric conditions for a period of twenty (20) years.
C. Furnish thirty (30) year finish warranty for sheet metal. The manufacturer shall provide a 30 year finish warranty against peeling and blistering, chalk, and fade (color change).
D. The installer shall provide a written warranty for two (2) years from the date of Substantial completion guaranteeing materials and workmanship for watertightness, weathertightness, and against all leaks. During the initial two (2) year period, the Installer shall assure weathertightness and watertightness of the roof at no additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Firestone. 2. Peterson Aluminum Company. 3. Tremco.
B. Performance: 1. Panel shall meet the requirements of UL-580 for Class 90 wind uplift resistance. 2. Panel shall meet the requirements of ASTM-E1680 Air Infiltration Test and ASTM-E1646 Water Penetration Test.
2.2 PANEL TYPE (Sloped Roof)
A. Equal to PAC Clad PAC-150 – 180 o Double Lock Standing Seam System 24 ga. Galvalume Steel Panel: 1. Panel Width: 16 inches 2. Seam Height: 1-1/2 inches 3. Finish: Kynar 500/Hylar 5000. Color as selected. 4. Continuous panel. 5. Concealed fasteners. 6. Finish: Kynar 500 color from manufacturers full palette a. Portico: Cardinal Red with anodic clear trim b. Areaway: Dark Bronze with match trim
B. Trim: Match panel thickness, shapes as detailed.
C. Rake: Color – Anodic Clear
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Same material and finish as roofing metal, with soft neoprene washers and sufficient length to attach to the steel sub grits. 07 61 10 - 4 CUSTOM SHEET METAL ROOFING GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
B. Sheathing Board: Equal to Dens-Deck fiberglass mat faced noncombustible, nonstructural, gypsum core panel; 4x8, 2.5 lbs/s.f., ASTM E84, UL790, thickness indicated on drawings.
C. Underlayment: Equal to Interware Titanium UDL-30 synthetic roof underlayment with anti-slip resistant feature.
D. Metal Deck: Per Section 05 31 10.
E. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper.
F. Primer: Zinc molybdate type.
G. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd.
H. Sealant: Sealant as specified in Section 07 90 00.
I. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I.
J. Roof Insulation: Not Applicable.
K. Ice and Water Shield: Rubberized asphalt bonded to sheet polyethylene, 40 mil total thickness, with strippable treated release paper; manufactured by W. R. Grace. Vycor Ultra for high temperature applications.
L. Concealed clips as required by the roofing manufacturer for installation to nailable substrate.
M. Downspouts - Metal to match the roofing, formed, 22 ga. minimum, rectangular, 8” deeps, min. 6” width. Provide straps as required to support from the building wall minimum spacings 8’-0” o.c.
N. Gutter: 24 ga. galvanized steel in color to match roof panels. Provide hangers as required (no splices and furrels).
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Form sections shape as indicated on Drawings, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.
B. Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, to interlock with sheet.
C. Fabricate starter strips of same material as sheet, continuous, to interlock with sheet.
D. Form pieces in single length sheets.
E. Hem exposed edges on underside 2 inch; miter and seam corners.
F. Form material with standing seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.
GCPS Southern High School CUSTOM SHEET METAL ROOFING 07 61 10 - 5 Façade Renovations & Repairs G. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam y, seal with sealant.
H. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 3 inch and hemmed to form drip.
I. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing. Return and brake edges.
2.5 FACTORY FINISHING
A. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: High Performance Organic Finish; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer 30 year warranty finish system.
B. Primer Coat: Finish concealed side of metal sheets with primer compatible with finish system as recommended by finish system manufacturer.
2.6 SNOW RAILS
A. Equal to L. M. Curbs S-5 Snow Retention System with Hylar 5000 finish to match roofing color. 1. Clamp shall be L. M. Curbs D-5-U with color guard bar and (2) Sno-Clips per 16 inch roof panel seam.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 31 00 – Coordination and Meetings: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Inspect metal deck to verify suitability for installation of metal roofing system.
C. Inspect roof deck to verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, and properly sloped to drains, valleys and eaves.
D. Verify deck is dry and free of snow and ice. Verify joints in deck are solidly supported and fastened.
E. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, vents, or lightning protection through roof are solidly set, reglets are in place, and nailing strips located.
F. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
G. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean deck as required to accept metal roofing system.
07 61 10 - 6 CUSTOM SHEET METAL ROOFING GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
B. Fill knot holes and surface cracks with latex filler at areas of bonded eave protection.
C. Broom clean deck surfaces under eave protection and underlayment.
D. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.
E. Install surface mounted reglets to lines and levels indicated on Drawings. Seal top of reglets with sealant.
F. Back paint concealed metal surfaces and surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals with protective backing paint to minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil .
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install sheathing board per Section 06 11 40. Mechanically fasten through insulation to metal deck below and secure to allow continuation of roofing. Provide appropriate length fasteners to engage deck regardless of placement. Stagger joints. Sheathing edge to land on metal deck rib.
B. Ice and Water Shield Protection: Place eave edge and metal flashings tight with fascia boards. Weather lap joints 2 inches and seal with plastic cement. Secure flange with nails. 1. Apply 4 inch wide band of plastic cement over deck flange of eave edge flashings and embed 18 inch wide strip of eave protection sheet. Place starter strip with eave edge flush with face of flashings. Secure in place. Lap ends minimum 6 inches. 2. Apply plastic cement at rate of approximately 1-1/4 gal/100 sq ft over starter strip. 3. Starting from lower edge of starter strip, lay additional 36 inch wide strips of eave protection sheet in plastic cement, to produce two ply membrane. Weather lap plies minimum 19 inches and nail in place. Lap ends minimum 6 inches. Stagger end joints of each consecutive ply. 4. Extend eave protection sheet minimum 4 feet upslope beyond interior face of exterior wall. 5. Provide at eaves, rakes, valleys, hips, ridges, penetrations, areas of roof with slopes less than a 4 in 12 slope, and all other areas called out in the contract drawings.
C. General Roofing Installation Requirements: 1. Apply underlayment over entire roof deck area in single layer laid perpendicular to slope; weather lap edges 2 inches and nail in place. 2. Apply slip sheet in one layer, laid loose. 3. Cleat and seam joints. 4. Use plastic cement for joints between metal and bitumen and for joints between metal and felts. 5. Provide formed metal pans for protrusions through roof. Fill pans watertight with plastic cement. 6. Provide downspouts and fascias.
GCPS Southern High School CUSTOM SHEET METAL ROOFING 07 61 10 - 7 Façade Renovations & Repairs 7. Install snow guards up slope from eaves and valleys and from any vents through the roof.
D. Standing Seam Roofing Installation: 1. Conform to SMACNA details. 2. Space standing seams at 16 inch oc. 3. Lay sheets with long dimension perpendicular to eaves. Apply pans beginning at eaves. 4. Lock cleats into seams and flatten. 5. Install continuous sheets from ridge to fascia. 6. At eaves and gable ends, terminate roofing by hooking over edge strip. 7. Lock panels together. 8. Seal ends of standing seams at eaves at top and bottom. 9. Form valleys of sheets not exceeding 10 feet in length. Lap joints 6 inches in direction of drainage. 10. Extend valley sheet minimum 6 inches under roofing sheets.
E. Flashing Installation: 1. Conform to SMACNA details. 2. Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit. Secure in place with lead wedges at maximum 6 inches on center. Pack remaining spaces with lead wool. Seal flashings into reglets with sealant. 3. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. 4. Cleat and seam joints. 5. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. 6. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. 7. Seal metal joints watertight.
F. Install snow rail system and other miscellaneous item removed as required to be reinstalled.
3.4 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected roof surface.
3.5 SCHEDULE
A. The Schedule is a list of principal items only. Refer to Drawing details for items not specifically scheduled. 1. Roofing at entrance portico. 2. Roof at Media entrance closure.
END OF SECTION
07 61 10 - 8 CUSTOM SHEET METAL ROOFING GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A Section includes firestopping and through-penetration protection system materials and accessories; firestopping tops of fire rated walls; and smoke sealing at joints between floor slabs and exterior walls.
B Related Sections: 1. Section 04 81 00 - Unit Masonry and Grout. 2. Section 09 26 00 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum board fireproofing. 3. Division 23 - Mechanical: Mechanical work requiring firestopping. 4. Division 26 - Electrical: Electrical work requiring firestopping.
1.2 REFERENCES
A ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
B ASTM E119 - Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
C ASTM E814 - Test Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire stops.
D FM (Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation) - Fire Hazard Classifications.
E UL (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Fire Resistance Directory.
F UL 263 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
G UL 723 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
H UL 1479 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire stops.
I WH (Warnock Hersey) - Directory of Listed Products.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A Firestopping (Through-Penetration Protection System): A sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest the movement of fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A Firestopping Materials: UL 263 to achieve fire ratings as noted on Drawings for adjacent construction, but not less than 1-hour fire rating.
B Surface Burning: UL723 with a maximum flame spread / smoke developed rating of 25/450.
GCPS Southern High School FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs C Fire stop interruptions to fire rated assemblies, materials, and components.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A Conform to applicable code UL or WH for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics.
B Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B Product Data: Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria.
C Schedule: Provide a schedule of opening locations and sizes, penetrating items, and required listed design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire resistance rating of adjacent assembly.
D Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit preparation and installation instructions.
E Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F Engineering Judgements: For conditions not covered by UL or WH listed designs, provide judgements by licensed professional engineer suitable for presentation to authority having jurisdiction for acceptance as meeting code fire protection requirements.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.8 MOCK-UP
A Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Mock-up requirements.
B Apply 1 linear ft. of each type of linear firestopping material to a representative substrate surface.
C Apply one of each unit type of firestopping material, such as penetrations through a fire rated partition, to a representative application.
D Mock-ups may remain as part of the Work.
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
07 84 00-2 FIRESTOPPING GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs B Do not apply materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F.
C Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of materials.
1.11 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A In accordance with Section 01 73 00, the manufacturer and installer shall provide a letter of certification that all installations have been completed in accordance with the approved details and assemblies.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRESTOPPING
A Manufacturers: 1. United States Gypsum Co. Fire Stop System 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirement.
B Product Description: Different types of products by a single manufacturer are acceptable as required to meet specified system description and performance requirements; provide only one type for each similar application. Multiple manufacturers are not permitted. 1. Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping: Composite of mineral fiber stuffing insulation with silicone elastomer for smoke stopping. C Color: Red
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire ratings.
B Dam Material: Permanent: Mineral fiber matting.
C Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and other devices required to position and retain materials in place.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A Section 01 31 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping.
3.2 PREPARATION
A Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter which may affect bond of firestopping material.
GCPS Southern High School FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs B Remove incompatible materials which may affect bond.
3.3 APPLICATION
A Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings which contain penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, conduit and other items, requiring firestopping in accordance with approved UL listed assemblies.
B Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings.
C Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke rating, to uniform density and texture.
D Compress fibered material to maximum 40 percent of its uncompressed size.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing and Inspection Services.
B Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule.
3.5 CLEANING
A Section 01 73 00 - Execution Requirements: Final cleaning.
B Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
3.6 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A Section 01 50 00 – Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Protecting installed construction.
B Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
END OF SECTION
07 84 00-4 FIRESTOPPING GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 07 90 00 - JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Preparing substrate surfaces.
B. Sealant and joint backing.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04 81 00 – Unit Masonry Assemblies
B. Section 04 90 01 – Masonry Restoration
C. Section 07 41 00 – Preformed Metal Wall and Soffit Panels
D. Section 07 61 10 – Custom Sheet Metal Roofing
E. Section 08 11 00 – Steel Doors and Frames
F. Section 08 52 00 – Aluminum Windows
G. Section 09 26 00 - Gypsum Board Systems.
H. Section 09 90 00 - Painting.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C790 - Use of Latex Sealing Compounds.
B. ASTM C804 - Use of Solvent-Release Type Sealants.
C. ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing Compounds.
D. ASTM C919 - Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications.
E. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
F. ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber.
G. ASTM D1565 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Open-Cell Foam).
H. SWRI (Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute) - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
GCPS Southern High School JOINT SEALERS 07 90 00-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability.
C. Samples: Submit two samples, 1 x 4 inch in size illustrating sealant colors for selection.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, surface preparation, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three (3) years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work with other trades.
B. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Pecora
B. Tremco
C. Bostik
D. Sika
E. Substitutions shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 60 00.
2.2 SEALANTS
A. Polyurethane Traffic Grade Sealant (Type A): ASTM C920, Two Part, chemical curing, non-staining, non-bleeding, capable of continuous water immersion, self-leveling type; color as selected; Urexpan NR-200 manufactured by Pecora. 1. Elongation Capability 25 percent
07 90 00-2 JOINT SEALERS GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 2. Service Temperature Range -40 to 180 degrees F 3. Shore A Hardness Range 20 to 35
B. Polyurethane Sealant (Type B): ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class A, chemical curing, non-staining, non-bleeding, capable of continuous water immersion, non-sagging type; color as selected; Dynatrol II manufactured by Pecora. 1. Elongation Capability 50 percent 2. Service Temperature Range -20 to 180 degrees F 3. Shore A Hardness Range 20 to 35
C. Silicone Sealant (Type C): ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT; single component, fungus resistant, chemical curing, non-sagging, non-staining, non-bleeding; color as selected; 860 manufactured by Pecora. 1. Elongation Capability 25 percent 2. Service Temperature Range -75 to +400 degrees F 3. Shore A Hardness Range 15 to 50
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.
C. Joint Backing: ASTM D1565; round, open cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.
D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work.
B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.
B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfiguration.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required 2:1 width/depth ratios.
GCPS Southern High School JOINT SEALERS 07 90 00-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 of the joint width.
D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
G. Tool joints concave.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean work under provisions of 01 73 00.
B. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01 50 00.
B. Protect sealants until cured.
3.6 SCHEDULE
A. General: The following sealants shall be installed throughout the construction where construction materials intersect or abut creating a joint which requires closure for appearance, weather, or as may be required by the Owner and Architect. Location Type 1. Exterior horizontal concrete paving & Two part polyurethane Traffic Grade Type II sidewalk expansion joints (Type A) 2. Exterior vertical joints (Type B) Two part polyurethane Type II 3. Interior vertical & horizontal joints Two part polyurethane Type II (Type B) 4. Interior wet areas, kitchen, & toilet High modulus silicone Areas & fixtures joints w/fungicide (Type C)
END OF SECTION
07 90 00-4 JOINT SEALERS GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
DIVISION 8
DOORS AND WINDOWS
BUSHEY FEIGHT MORIN ARCHITECTS INC. 473 NORTH POTOMAC STREET HAGERSTOWN, MARYLAND 21740 301-733-5600 FAX: 301-733-5612
SECTION 08 11 00 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes steel doors, panels and frames; non-rated and fire rated, and interior borrowed light frames. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04 81 00 – Unit Masonry Assemblies. B. Section 07 90 00 – Joint Sealants. C. Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware. D. Section 09 11 10 – Metal Stud Framing System. E. Section 09 26 00 – Gypsum Board Systems. F. Section 09 90 00 – Painting. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate door and frame elevations, internal reinforcement, cut- outs for glazing, louvers, jamb and door selections and finishes. B. Product Data: Submit door and frame configurations, location of cut-outs for hardware reinforcement. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the following: 1. ANSI 250.8 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 2. DHI - Door Hardware Institute - The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware. B. Fire Rated Door and Panel Construction: Conform to NFPA 252. C. Fire Rated Stair Doors: Rate of rise of 450 degrees F across door thickness. D. Installed Fire Rated Door and Panel Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated on Drawings. E. Attach label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify each fire rated door. 1. Indicate temperature rise rating for stair doors. F. Surface Burning Characteristics: 1. Foam Insulation: Maximum 75/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 and NFPA 255.
GCPS Southern High School STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 00 - 1 Façade Renovations & Repairs G. Apply label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify each foam plastic insulation material.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Manufacturers: (SDI) 1. Amweld Building Products, Inc. 2. Ceco Door Products. 3. Republic Builders Products. 4. Steelcraft. 5. Curries. 6. Substitutions: Permitted in accordance with Section 01 60 00. B. Product Description: Standard shop fabricated steel doors, door panels, and frames; fire rated and non-rated types; flush face or stile and rail design, and door louvers. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Exterior Doors (Insulated): SDI 108, 1-3/4 inch thick. 1. Level 3 - Extra heavy Duty, Model 2, seamless design. - galvanized. B. Interior Doors (Non-Rated): SDI 108, 1-3/4 inch thick. 1. Level 3 - Extra heavy Duty, Model 2, seamless design. C. Interior Doors (Fire Rated): SDI 108, 1-3/4 inch thick. 1. Level 3 - Extra heavy Duty, Model 2, seamless design. D. Exterior Frames: 1. Level 3 for Door Models 2 nominal 16 gage/0.053 inch thick material, base metal thickness. - galvanized E. Interior Frames: 1. Level 3 for Door Models 2, nominal 16 gage/0.053 inch thick material, base metal thickness. F. Door Core: Polystyrene foam and steel channel grid. G. End Closure: Channel, 0.04 inch thick, inverted. H. Thermal Insulated Door: Total insulation R-Value of 4, measured in accordance with ASTM C1363. I. Sound Rated Door: STC of 32, measured in accordance with ASTM E413. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Door Louvers: Roll formed material; Inverted Y blade, sight proof; prime painted. B. Silencers: Resilient vinyl fitted into drilled hole. C. Removable Stops: Rolled steel channel shape. D. Astragals for Double Doors: Steel, T shaped, specifically for double doors. 08 11 00 -2 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs E. Bituminous Coating: Fibered asphalt emulsion. F. Primer: ANSI A250.10 rust inhibitive type. G. Weatherstripping: Specified in Section 08 71 00. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors and frames with hardware reinforcement welded in place. Protect frame hardware preparations with mortar guard boxes. B. Attach astragal to one leaf of pairs of doors. C. Fabricate frames as face welded units. D. Fabricate frames to suit masonry wall coursing with head member as detailed. E. Reinforce frames wider than 48 inches with roll formed steel channels fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top. F. Prepare interior frames for silencers and install. G. Frame Mullions for Double Doors: Removable type, with profile matching jambs. H. Frame Transom Bars: Fixed type, with profile matching jamb and head. I. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated door and frame. 2.5 SHOP FINISHING A. Steel Sheet: Galvanized to ASTM A653/A653M A60. B. Primer: Baked. C. Coat inside of frame profile with bituminous coating where in contact with masonry and also if grout filled. D. Paint per Section 09 90 00.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install doors and frames in accordance with ANSI A250.8. B. Coordinate installation of doors and frames with installation of hardware specified in Section 08 71 00. C. Coordinate door frames with masonry, gypsum board wall construction for frame anchor placement.
GCPS Southern High School STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 00 - 3 Façade Renovations & Repairs D. Install roll formed steel reinforcement channels between two abutting frames. Anchor to structure and floor. E. Install door louvers plumb and level. F. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing specified in Section 08 80 00. G. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement. H. Tolerances: 1. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
END OF SECTION
08 11 00 -4 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 08 41 00 – ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes aluminum-framed storefronts including aluminum and glass doors.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 41 00 - Preformed Metal Wall and Soffit Panels 2. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Sealers: System perimeter sealant and back-up materials. 3. Section 08 71 00 - Finish Hardware: Mortised hardware reinforcement requirements affecting framing members; hardware items other than specified in this section. 4. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Aluminum Association: 1. AA ADM 1 - Aluminum Design Manual.
B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association: 1. AAMA 501 - Methods of Test for Exterior Walls. 2. AAMA 502 - Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Windows and Sliding Glass Doors. 3. AAMA 503 - Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Metal Storefronts. Curtain Wall and Sloped Glazing Systems. 4. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. 5. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections. 6. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. 7. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. 8. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. 9. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to Site. 10. AAMA SFM-1 - Aluminum Store Front and Entrance Manual.
C. American Society of Civil Engineers: 1. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.
D. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. GCPS Southern High School ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08 41 00-1 Front Façade Renovation
3. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 4. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 5. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 6. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 7. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. 8. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors By Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 9. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors By Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 10. ASTM E547 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential. 11. ASTM E1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference.
E. National Fenestration Rating Council Incorporated: 1. NFRC 100 - Procedures for Determining Fenestration Product U-Factors.
F. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
G. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings: 1. SSPC Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I - Inorganic and Type II - Organic). 2. SSPC Paint 25 - Red Iron Oxide, Zinc Oxide, Raw Linseed Oil, and Alkyd Primer.
H. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Aluminum-framed storefront system includes tubular aluminum sections with supplementary internal support framing, aluminum and glass entrances, shop fabricated, factory finished, glass and glazing, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.
B. System Assembly: Site assembled.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. System Design: Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall, including building corners. 08 41 00-2 ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONTS GCPS Southern High School Front Façade Renovation 1. To design pressure of 25 lb/sq ft, as tested in accordance with ASTM E330.
B. Deflection: Limit mullion deflection to flexure limit of glass of span; with full recovery of glazing materials.
C. System Assembly: Accommodate without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement within system, movement between system and peripheral construction, dynamic loading and release of loads, deflection of structural support framing.
D. Air Infiltration: Limit air leakage through assembly to 0.06 cfm/min/sq ft of wall area, measured at reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E283.
E. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glass and inner sheet of infill panel and heel bead of glazing compound.
F. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 with test pressure difference of 20 percent of design pressure, with minimum differential of 2.86 lbf/sq ft and maximum of 12.00 lbf/sq ft.
G. Thermal Transmittance of Assembly (Excluding Entrances): Maximum U Value of 0.45 Btu/sq ft per hour per deg F when measured in accordance with AAMA 1503 and NFRC 100.
H. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components and anchorage.
I. System Internal Drainage: Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system, to exterior by weep drainage network.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work and expansion and contraction joint location and details.
C. Product Data: Submit component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, and internal drainage details.
D. Samples: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inches in size illustrating finished aluminum surface, infill panels, glazing materials.
E. Design Data: Indicate framing member structural and physical characteristics, calculations, dimensional limitations.
F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
GCPS Southern High School ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08 41 00-3 Front Façade Renovation
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with AAMA SFM-1 and AAMA MCWM-1 - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual.
B. Surface Burning Characteristics: 1. Foam Insulation: Maximum 75/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
C. Apply label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify each foam plastic insulation board.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer and Installer: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum ten years documented experience, and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project.
B. Design structural support framing components under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in State of Maryland.
1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 01 31 00 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Handle Products of this section in accordance with AAMA MCWM-1 - Curtain Wall Manual #10.
C. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping or strippable coating. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather.
1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Do not install sealants nor glazing materials when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F during and 48 hours after installation.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Section 01 31 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Section 01 73 00 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
08 41 00-4 ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONTS GCPS Southern High School Front Façade Renovation B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for glazed units.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
A. Manufacturers: 1. YKK AP America Model YES 45 XT - Basis of Design. 2. EFCO Corp. 3. Kawneer Co., Inc. 4. Traco. 5. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: 1. Aluminum Frame: Thermally broken; applied glazing stops; drainage holes; internal weep drainage system. Frames for interior glazing need not to be thermally broken. Nominal 2”w x 4 ½” d. 2. Mullions: Profile of extruded aluminum with internal reinforcement of aluminum or shaped steel structural section. 3. Doors: Aluminum framed thermally broken, insulated (Megatherm 50XT) glass doors; 1-3/4 inches thick, nominal 6 inch wide top rail and vertical stiles, nominal 10 inch high bottom rail (medium stile) width; square glazing stops.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221; 6063 alloy, T5 temper typical, 6061 alloy, T6 temper for extruded structural members.
B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209, 5005 alloy, H15 or H34 temper.
C. Sheet Steel: ASTM A653/A653M; galvanized to minimum G90.
D. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M; shaped to suit mullion sections, galvanized.
E. Glass: Specified in Section 08 80 00.
F. Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08 80 00.
G. Hardware: Furnish manufacturer’s standard door hardware for types of doors and applications indicated, and as specified below. 1. Weather Stripping: Polypropylene pile, continuous and replaceable. 2. Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, of neoprene compound. 3. Threshold: Specified in Section 08 71 00. 4. Hinges: Specified in Section 08 71 00. 5. Push/Pull: Specified in Section 08 71 00. 6. Panic Device: Specified in Section 08 71 00. 7. Closer: Specified in Section 08 71 00. 8. Finish: Exposed hardware to match hardware finishes specified in Section 08 71 00. 9. Lock Cylinders: Specified in Section 08 71 00.
GCPS Southern High School ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08 41 00-5 Front Façade Renovation
H. Flashings: Minimum 0.032 inch thick aluminum to match mullion sections where exposed.
I. Sealant and Backing Materials: 1. Sealant Used Within System (Not Used for Glazing): Manufacturer’s standard materials to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements. 2. Perimeter Sealant: Specified in Section 07 90 00.
J. Fasteners: Stainless steel.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.
C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.
D. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.
E. Reinforce interior horizontal head rail to receive drapery track brackets and attachments.
F. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware.
G. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads.
2.4 SHOP FINISHING
A. Bronze Anodized Aluminum Surfaces: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42 non- specular as fabricated mechanical finish, medium matte chemical finish, and Architectural Class I 0.7 mils Bronze anodized coating. (Match existing on site.)
B. Concealed Steel Items: Galvanized to ASTM A123/A123M; minimum 2.0 oz/sq ft coating thickness; galvanize after fabrication. Unfinished.
C. Apply bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar metals.
D. Shop and Touch-Up Primer for Steel Components: SSPC Paint 25 red oxide.
E. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPC Paint 20 zinc rich.
F. Extent of Finish: 1. Apply factory coating to surfaces exposed at completed assemblies. 2. Apply finish to surfaces cut during fabrication so no natural aluminum is visible in completed assemblies, including joint edges. 3. Apply touch-up materials recommended by coating manufacturer for field application to cut ends and minor damage to factory applied finish.
08 41 00-6 ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONTS GCPS Southern High School Front Façade Renovation PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 31 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other Work.
C. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive Work of this Section.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall system in accordance with AAMA MCWM-1 - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual.
B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities.
C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.
D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances.
E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.
F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent Work to form water tight dam.
G. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor retarder materials.
H. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier.
I. Install integral flashings and integral joint sealers.
J. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure.
K. Install hardware using templates provided. Refer to Section 08 71 00 for installation requirements.
L. Install infill panels using method required to achieve performance criteria.
M. Coordinate installation of glass with Section 08 80 00; separate glass from metal surfaces.
N. Coordinate installation of perimeter sealants with Section 07 90 00.
3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.
GCPS Southern High School ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08 41 00-7 Front Façade Renovation
B. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft, whichever is less.
C. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Inspection to monitor quality of installation and glazing.
C. Test to ASTM E1105.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Section 01 73 00 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting and balancing.
B. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Section 01 73 00 - Execution Requirements: Final cleaning.
B. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.
C. Wash down surfaces with solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.
D. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.
3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Section 01 50 00 – Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Protecting installed construction.
B. Protect finished Work from damage.
3.8 SCHEDULES
A. Refer to Drawings.
END OF SECTION
08 41 00-8 ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONTS GCPS Southern High School Front Façade Renovation
SECTION 08 52 00 – ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes extruded aluminum windows, fixed, and operable. B. Operating hardware and insect screens. C. Installation of fiberglass insulation between window frames and adjacent construction. 1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 04 81 00 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Placement of supporting anchors. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04 81 00 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Preparation of adjacent work to receive work of this section. B. Section 05 40 00 - Cold Formed Metal Framing. C. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Steel lintels. D. Section 06 11 40 Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood perimeter shims. E. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials. F. Section 08 41 00 - Aluminum Framed Storefronts. G. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing. H. Section 09 26 00 - Gypsum Board Systems. 1.4 REFERENCES A. AAMA 101 - Specifications for Aluminum Prime Windows and Sliding Glass Doors. B. AAMA 603.8 - Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Extruded Aluminum. C. AAMA 605.2 - Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels. D. AAMA 606.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. E. AAMA 607.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. F. AAMA 608.1 - Specification and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum.
GCPS Southern High School ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 52 00-1 Front Façade Renovation G. AAMA 910-93 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Window Life Cycle Test. H. ASTM A386 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Assembled Steel Products. I. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. J. ASTM B221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube. K. ASTM E283 - Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors. L. ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. M. ASTM E331 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. N. FS L-S-125 - Screening, Insect, Nonmetallic. O. FS RR-W-365 - Wire Fabric (Insect Screening). P. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Manual. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Windows: Aluminum sections, shop fabricated, factory prefinished, vision glass, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. B. Configuration: 1. Fixed, non-operable F-HC-65 2. Single hung AW-PG5 C. Glazing: Insulated 1” thickness. 1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall to a design pressure of 67 lb/sq ft and a suction of 67 lb/sq ft and as measured in accordance with ASTM E330. B. Limit member deflection to 1/175; with full recovery of glazing materials per ASTM E330 at 45 lbs/sf minimum 10 seconds with no damage. C. System to accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement between window and perimeter framing, deflection of lintel. D. Limit air leakage through assembly to .20 cf/min/sq ft of wall area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 6.24 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E283. E. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 with a test pressure difference of 10 lb/sq ft for a period of 15 minutes. F. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound. 08 52 00-2 ALUMINUM WINDOWS GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs G. Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system, to the exterior by a weep drainage network.
H. Conductive "U" value tests with 15 mph perpendicular dynamic wind: .42 BTU/hr/ft2/F (with Low-E glass) in accordance per AAMA 1503.1.
I. Condensation resistance factor shall not be less than 55 when tested in accordance with AAMA 1502.7. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, framed opening tolerances, affected related work, and installation requirements; at a minimum scale of 3/4" = 1"-0. C. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, anchorage and fasteners, glass, and internal drainage details. D. Submit one sample 18 x 24 inches in size illustrating window frame section, half screen and frame, pre-finished aluminum surfaces, glass units, glazing materials sash lock. E. Submit one sample of operating hardware. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. G. Submit independent laboratory tests certifying that product proposed for this work meets or exceeds the specified standards. Results shall not be older than 4 years. 1. Test sample shall be at least 4'-0" x 9'-0" with sash 3'-10" x 4'-1". 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ANSI/AAMA 101-93 AW-Architectural window. B. Contractor shall be responsible to field verify conditions and measurements of field conditions. 1.9 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer and Installer: Company specializing in manufacturing and installation of institutional aluminum windows with minimum ten years documented experience. 1.10 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this Section, under provisions of Section 01 31 00. 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00. GCPS Southern High School ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 52 00-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs B. Protect pre-finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping or strippable coating. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.12 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.13 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL
A. Furnish and deliver the following spare parts to Owner: 1. Touch up paint: Match window color. 2. Balances: minimum ten (10) quantity. 3. Locks: Three (3) 4. Replacement Window Sash: Two (2) 5. Half Screens: Five (5)
1.14 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturers standard 5 year warranty of defects and workmanship in accordance with Section 01 74 00. B. Provide manufacturers 10 year finish warranty in accordance with Section 01 74 00. C. Finish: 10 year warranty against chipping, pealing, cracking, chalking, and fading. D. Insulated Glass: Warranted from visual obstruction due to internal moisture for a period of 10 years.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ALUMINUM WINDOWS A. Manufacturers: 1. Graham Architectural Products. Basis of Design: 2000H Single Hung Unit. 2. EFCO Corp. 3. Kawneer Co., Inc. 4. Traco. 5. Substitutions: Per Section 01 60 00.
B. Window Types: 1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide window units complying with requirements of AAMA Classification "AW" grade windows. Windows for this project will be rated a minimum of AW45 for full size test units per AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-08 to withstand a design pressure of 45 psf minimum. 2. Fixed Aluminum Windows or Panel Frames (F): Except for guardians or special provisions as indicated for maintenance, cleaning, and removal, no operating hardware or equipment is required. 3. Single Hung Aluminum Window (SH): a. Units: One balanced, vertically sliding sash requiring up to four (4) counterbalancing mechanisms complying with AAMA 902 “Sash 08 52 00-4 ALUMINUM WINDOWS GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs Balance Specifications”. Lift handles on lower rail of lower sash shall have nylon end caps to protect the machined ends of the rail. Saw cut or machined edges will not be acceptable. Provide latches at meeting rails to lock sash in closed position. b. Provide units which have “lift-out” feature permitting easy removal of both sash from inside without special tools. c. Tilt-in type sash is not acceptable for this project.
2.2 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221; 6063 alloy, T5 temper, with a minimum ultimate tensile strength of 22,000 PSI and a yield of 16,000 PSI. B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209 - 6063 alloy, T5 temper. C. Steel Sections: Profiled to suit mullion sections. D. Fasteners: Stainless steel. E. Shop and Touch-Up Primer for Steel Components: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide. F. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPC 20, zinc rich type. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Frames: 3 1/4 inch deep profile, of .062 inch thick section; thermally broken with interior portion of frame insulated from exterior portion; applied glass stops of screw fastened type. B. Sills: .090 inch thick, extruded aluminum; sloped for positive wash; fit under sash leg to 1/2 inch beyond wall face; one piece full width of opening jamb angles to terminate sill end. C. Sash: Hollow extruded horizontal sections, not less than 1-3/8” deep. Extruded aluminum(corners mitered and crimped with corner gussets. Same finish as window. D. Insect Screens: Woven aluminum mesh; 14/18 mesh size. (half size), 18/16 aluminum charcoal retained in screen frames with vinyl splines.
E. Thermal Barrier: Provides a continuous uninterrupted thermal barrier around the entire perimeter of the frame and all sash and shall not be bridged by any metal conductors at any point.
F. Fasteners: Stainless steel.
G. Sash: Hollow extruded horizontal sections, not less than 1-3/8 inches in depth; Join at the corners with screws in integral screw ports. The sash must be easily removed from the frame for either cleaning or repair.
H. Glazing: 1. Pre-glaze all units at the factory with insulated glass as follows: 2. Typical Insulated Glass: Overall thickness of 5/8 inch – 1 inch with two lites of 1/4 inch as size and loading require. GCPS Southern High School ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 52 00-5 Façade Renovations & Repairs a. Primary Sealant: Polyisobutylene applied to the edge of the spacer. Secondary Sealant: Silicone. b. Air Spacer: Continuous metal spacer with formed corners and an in-line connector, containing desiccant. 3. Glaze units to allow for glass replacement without the use of special tools.
2.4 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Sealant and Backing Materials: As specified in Section 07 90 00 of Types described below. B. Perimeter Sealant: Two-part urethane. C. Sealant Used within System (Not Used for Glazing): Type complying with AAMA specification 803.2 and 808.1. 2.5 HARDWARE A. Sash lock: Aluminum automatic sill latches, two at sills over 26 inches, typical. B. Top Sash: Fixed.
C. Balances: Size and capacity required to hold bottom sash stationary in any open position. Easily accessible and replaceable in the field without the use of special tools. Standard Balance (Block and tackle type); Class II AAMA 902-93, with a MAF ratio of 0.6 Force required to keep a moving sash moving up or down, not to exceed 45 pounds. Maximum sash weight of approximately 65 pounds per sash. Spiral balances will not be accepted.
D. Operable Sash Weather Stripping: Molded; permanently resilient, profiled to effect weather seal. E. Pulls: Manufacturers standard. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. D. Arrange fasteners and attachments to ensure concealment from view. E. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for operating hardware. F. Provide internal reinforcement in mullions with galvanized steel members to maintain rigidity. G. Permit internal drainage weep holes and channels to migrate moisture to exterior. Provide internal drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through weep holes.
08 52 00-6 ALUMINUM WINDOWS GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs H. Assemble insect screens of extruded aluminum rectangular tubular sections to cover complete window surface. Miter and reinforce frame corners. Fit mesh taught in frame into frame and secured. Fit frame with stainless steel spring loaded clip retainers. I. Double weatherstrip operable units. J. Shop glaze window units. 2.7 CASING COVER SYSTEM A. Exterior casing cover shall be extruded prime alloy aluminum G063-T5 with a nominal thickness of .078 inch. B. Casing covers less than 2 inches in depth from the window frame may be .062 inch. C. Sections shall be one piece and weathertight but allow window expansion and contraction. D. Casing cover shall be attached with stainless steel screws. E. Exposed screws, pop rivets, and fasteners will be unacceptable. 2.8 FINISHES A. Finish coatings to conform to AAMA 2605 - Duranar Finish with 15 year warranty. B. Exterior Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: Shall be equal to manufacturer’s High Performance finish meeting AAMA 2605. Color to be selected by Owner/Architect. C. Interior Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: Shall be equal to manufacturer’s High Performance finish meeting AAMA 2605. Color to be selected by Owner/Architect D. Concealed Steel Items: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A386 to 2.0 oz/sq ft. E. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site opening conditions under provisions of Section 01 31 00. B. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this Section. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install factory glazed window frames, and hardware in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
GCPS Southern High School ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 52 00-7 Façade Renovations & Repairs B. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. D. Install sill and sill end angles. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. F. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. G. Install operating hardware. H. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07 90 00. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 0.5 inches per 100 ft, whichever is less. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 73 00. B. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01 73 00. B. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces. C. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. D. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
08 52 00-8 ALUMINUM WINDOWS GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Work under this section comprises of furnishing and installing commercial door hardware needed for a complete and operational system B. Products Supplied but not Installed under this Section: 1. Cylinders for locks on storefront entrance doors 2. Final replacement cores and keys installed by Owner 3. Card access reader by West Security. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 11 00 - Steel Doors and Frames 2. Section 08 41 00 - Aluminum Framed Storefronts: Hardware per this Section. 3. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Publications listed herein are part of this specification to extent referenced. B. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI A156 Series 2. ANSI A115W Wood Door Hardware Standards; Hardware Preparation 3. ANSI A115 Specifications for Steel Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware 4. ANSI A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities 5. ANSI A250.6 Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement - Applications) C. Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) D. Door and Hardware Institute: 1. DHI Publication - Abbreviations and Symbols 2. DHI Publication - Basic Architectural Hardware 3. DHI Publication - Hardware for Labeled Fire Doors (with supplements) 4. DHI Publication - Hardware Reinforcements on Steel Doors and Frames 5. DHI Publication - Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware 6. DHI Publication - WDHS-1 Template Book Criteria for Wood Doors 7. DHI Publication - WDHS-3 Recommended Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors 8. DHI Publication - For Processing Hardware Schedules and Templates E. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code 2. NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Windows 3. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code 4. NFPA 105 Recommended Practice for the Installation of Smoke-Control Door Assemblies 5. NFPA 252 Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies F. Steel Door Institute: 1. SDI-109 Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 3. UL Standard 10C Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 4. UL Standard 1784 Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies 5. UL Building Materials Directory
GCPS Southern High School DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 1 Façade Renovations & Repairs
1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Sequence: 1. Submit final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. 2. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to coordinated review of Door Hardware Schedule. B. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer’s technical product fact sheets describing each item of hardware to be provided including material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. C. Door Hardware Schedule: 1. Submit door hardware schedule prepared by or under supervision of a DHI certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) or Certified Door Consultant (CDC) detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. 2. Coordinate Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 3. Format: a. Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical form as described in DHI’s Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule . b. Horizontal hardware schedules are not acceptable. c. Submit hardware schedule via .pdf format electronically. 4. Organization: a. Organize door hardware schedule into hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item needed for each door or opening. b. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in Door Hardware Schedule contained in Part 3 of this specification. c. For doors of different sizes or where hinges, locks, or closers are different, a separate heading shall be used. No labeled openings shall be combined with non-labeled openings. 5. Content: a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish for each door hardware item b. Name and manufacturer of each item c. Fastenings and other pertinent information 6. Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule a. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule b. Mounting locations for door hardware c. Door and frame sizes and materials D. Samples: Submit samples of door hardware items if requested by Architect. Accepted samples may be incorporated into Work. E. Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Test Reports: Provide product test reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, indicating current products comply with requirements. 2. Certificates: Submit a statement from manufacturer certifying that door hardware is approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire doors and complies with listed fire door assemblies. 3. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
08 71 00 - 2 DOOR HARDWARE GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
a. Submit instructions for installation and maintenance of operating parts and finish. b. Furnish templates and schedules needed for fabrication of hollow metal doors and frames, wood doors and frames, and other items related to hardware. c. Submission for templates and template list shall follow procedures established by DHI publication For Processing Hardware Schedules and Templates . 4. Field Quality Assurance. a. To ensure and validate the proper closing, latching, sealing and securing of a door the manufacturer of the gasket shall provide a program of Field Quality Assurance. b. The program shall be acceptable to the architect and provide the site superintendent and installers with knowledge as to the industry acceptable standards for tolerances in manufacturing and field installation. c. The program shall create an audit trail of documentation for the inspection of pre-machined doors for machining and sizing, including hinge backset and depth of mortise, width and height. An “Installation Checklist” and the “Industry Guidelines” shall also be furnished for verification of acceptability of related door, frame and hardware components prior to installing the gasket. These forms shall be part of the submittal process and shall be acknowledged by the site superior and returned to the manufacturer in a timely manner. F. Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and Maintenance: a. Provide operation and maintenance data for hardware consisting of technical information as follows: 1) Maintenance instructions for each item of hardware 2) Catalog pages for each product 3) Parts list for each product 4) Copy of final hardware schedule 5) Copy of final keying schedule b. Include a copy of operational and maintenance descriptions in Operation and Maintenance Data Manual. Include Warranties and any Special warranties specified in this Section. G. Keying Schedule: 1. Prepare and submit a keying schedule using keyset symbols referenced in DHI manual Keying Systems and Nomenclature . Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations. 2. Index keying schedule by door number, keyset, hardware heading number, cross keying instructions, and special key stamping instructions. 3. Provide one complete bitting list of key cuts. 4. Keying schedule shall be prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing Owner’s final keying instructions for locks. 5. Submit keying schedule via pdf format electronically to Owner and Architect. 6. Deliver keys and bitting list to the Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. H. Card Readers; IdentiCard System to be used for access control. Contract West Security (Walt Epperly) (301-697-9089) for installation and needed components.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Door Hardware Supplier: Door hardware supplier shall have warehousing facilities in Project’s vicinity and shall employ a qualified Certified Architectural Hardware GCPS Southern High School DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 3 Façade Renovations & Repairs
Consultant (AHC) available during course of Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. B. Architectural Hardware Consultant: Architectural Hardware Consultant shall be a person who is currently certified by Door and Hardware Institute as an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. C. Installer: Door hardware shall be installed by an experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in- service performance. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Hardware and installation shall comply with provisions and standards listed in IBC 2018. B. Federal Accessibility Regulations: 1. Americans with Disabilities Act - ADA 2. ANSI A117.1 Standard for Accessible and Usable Building s and Facilities 3. Maryland Accessibility Guidelines 2010 C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Windows 2. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code 3. NFPA 105 Recommended Practice for the Installation of Smoke-Control Door Assemblies 4. NFPA 252 Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 10C Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 2. UL 1784 Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies 3. ANSI / BHMA Standards 4. A115-W Series 5. A115 Series 6. A156 Series E. Door and Hardware Institute: 1. Abbreviations and Symbols 2. Basic Architectural Hardware 3. Hardware for Labeled Fire Doors (with supplements) 4. Hardware Reinforcements on Steel Doors and Frames 5. Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware 6. WDHS-1 Template Book Criteria for Wood Doors 7. WDHS-3 Recommended Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors F. Certifications: 1. Hardware used in labeled fire or smoke rated openings shall be bear identifying label or mark indicating listing by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., ITS (Warnock Hersey International), or other nationally recognized organizations acceptable to authority having jurisdiction. 2. Provide door hardware for fire-rated door assemblies complying with NFPA 80 for fire ratings indicated, based on testing in compliance with NFPA 252.
08 71 00 - 4 DOOR HARDWARE GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS & KEYING CONFERENCE A. Conduct conference on-site to comply with requirements in Section 01 31 00 for Project Meetings. Participants shall be Owner’s representative, Contractor, hardware supplier, and lock manufacturer’s representative. B. Topics to be discussed at meeting shall include: 1. Review items such as proper installation sequence, adjustments, attachment, and location of door hardware. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, installer’s personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. C. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including but not limited to following: 1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security needed, and plans for future expansion 2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram 3. Requirements for key control system 4. Address for delivery of keys 1.7 COORDINATION A. Templates: 1. Obtain and distribute templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware to parties involved. 2. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with specified requirements. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: 1. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Site. 2. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final Door Hardware Schedule and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. 1.9 SPECIAL WARRANTY A. Provide written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include but are not limited to following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage 2. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering B. Warranty period shall be for not less than 3 years from Date of Substantial Completion unless otherwise indicated. 1. Manual Closers: 10 years C. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of Contract Documents.
GCPS Southern High School DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 5 Façade Renovations & Repairs
1.10 MAINTENANCE A. Furnish 3 dozen extra screws and other fasteners of each size, type and finish used with the hardware items provided. Extra materials shall be stored on-site as directed by Owner. B. Maintenance Service: 1. Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months’ full maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware installer. a. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as needed for proper door hardware operation. b. Provide parts and supplies as used in manufacture and installation of original products. 2. Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner’s continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS A. General Requirements: 1. Hardware shall be of best grade, entirely free of imperfections in manufacture and finish, and shall satisfactorily perform various functions needed. 2. Furnish necessary screws, bolts or others fastenings of suitable size and type to anchor hardware in position and match hardware as to material and finish. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. 3. Do not use through-bolts for installations where bolt head or nut opposite face is exposed in other work. Use of sex bolts shall not be allowed. 4. Drawings show direction of slide, swing or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as indicated. Items of hardware not definitely specified, but needed for satisfactory installation of hardware shall be provided. Such items shall be of type and quality suitable for service needed and comparable to adjacent hardware. 5. Finishes shall comply with ANSI A156.18/ BHMA 1301. Finish designations cross references shall be as follows: BHMA Nearest BHMA Code Description US Category Basis Metal Equiv. 626 Satin chromium plated US26D A Brass ; Bronze 628 Satin aluminum, clear US27 A Aluminum anodized 630 Satin stainless steel US32D A Stainless Steel 652 Satin chromium plated US26D E Steel 689 Aluminum painted US28 E Any B. Substitutions: Manufacturers and model numbers listed are to establish a standard of quality and design. The architect must approve all product substitutions. Any request for substitutions must be submitted 10 days before the bid date, to allow sufficient time for an addendum to be added to the bid document. In accordance with Section 01 60 00, required data and physical samples must be provided to the architect for review.
2.2 HINGES A. Butt Hinges: ANSI/ BHMA A156.1
08 71 00 - 6 DOOR HARDWARE GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
1. Provide full mortise, template, 5-knuckle, button tip hinges with non-rising loose pins and ball type bearings. 2. Out-swinging exterior doors shall be furnished with stainless steel, hinges with non-removable pins or security studs. 3. Hinges shall be furnished in following quantities: a. Doors up to 90” in height: 3 hinges b. Doors over 90” in height: Add 1 hinge for every additional 30” 4. Furnish hinge sizes not less than as follows: For 1 3/4” Thick Doors: Standard weight Doors up to 3’-0” wide: 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 x 0.134 gauge 5. Furnish hinges of sufficient throw where needed to clear trim or permit doors to swing 180 degrees. 6. Finishes: a. Exterior Doors: BHMA #630 (US32D) b. Interior Doors: BHMA #652 (US26D) 7. Acceptable Manufacturers: Steel Stainless Steel a. Hager: BB1279 BB1191 b. Bommer: BB5000 BB5002 c. Ives: 5BB1 5BB1 B. Geared Continuous Hinges: ANSI/ BHMA A156.26 Grade 1 1. Provide full mortise, non-handed, full height hinges with interlocking cover and symmetrically templated hole pattern made from extruded aluminum. 2. Provide center loaded, interlocking bearing design with adjustability on the “X” & “Y” axis during installation. 3. Finish: BHMA #628 (US27) 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Ives: 112XY / 224XY 2.3 LOCKSETS AND LATCHSETS A. General Requirements: 1. Shape of lever shall be easy to grasp with one hand and not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of wrist. 2. Locksets and latchsets shall not require more than 15 lbf to release latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. 3. Provide manufacturer’s standard wrought box strike for each latchset and lockset with curved lip extended to protect frame without catching clothing. Finish shall match hardware set. 4. Locks and cylinders shall be provided with manufacturer’s standard 6-pin tumbler which complies with ANSI A156.5, unless otherwise indicated. Lock cylinder parts shall be made from brass/bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. B. Mortise Locksets and Latchsets: Heavy duty 1. Provide mortise locksets and latchsets that comply to ANSI A156.13, Series 4000, Grade 1. Functions as listed in Hardware Sets. 2. Locks shall have field reversible handing. 3. Strikes to be 16 gauge, with 1” deep box construction, curved lip of sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing. 4. Finish: BHMA #626 (US26D) 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Sargent: V04-8200-LE1 Series with LNL lever design b. Schlage: L9000-L283-711 Series with 17N lever design 2.4 EXIT DEVICES A. Exit Devices: ANSI/ BHMA A156.3, Grade 1
GCPS Southern High School DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 7 Façade Renovations & Repairs
1. Exit devices shall be listed by UL for accident and hazard. Devices shall conform to applicable requirements of NFPA 80 and NFPA 101. 2. Shape of lever shall be easy to grasp with one hand and not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of wrist. 3. Exit devices shall not require more than 15 lbf to release latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. 4. Exit devices mounted on labeled wood doors shall be through-bolt mounted in compliance with door manufacturer’s requirements. Do not through-bolt if there has been special blocking specified in wood door specification; refer to Section 08 21 00. 5. Furnish filler plates and shim kits as needed for flush mounting of devices on doors. 6. Provide stainless steel touch pads. Plastic touch pads shall not be acceptable. 7. Lever trim shall be heavy-duty type fastened by means of concealed welded lugs and through-bolts from inside. 8. Provide flush end caps and deadlocking latchbolts. 9. Lever trim shall be designed with a breakaway feature to allow trim to freely rotate while remaining securely locked, preventing damage to internal lock components from vandalism by excessive force. 10. Finish: BHMA #630 (US32D) 11. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Falcon: 25 Series b. Detex: 10 Series c. Sargent: 19-43-GL-8888 Series 2.5 DOOR CLOSERS A. General Requirements: 1. Closers shall be sealed and filled with all-weather fluid. Provide stable hydraulic fluid to withstand a temperature range of 120 degrees F to minus 30 degrees F. 2. Size closers in compliance with requirements for accessibility for handicapped and recommendations of manufacturer. Provide barrier free and delayed action features as needed. Comply with following maximum opening-force requirements: a. Interior Hinged Doors: 5.0 lbs. b. Exterior Hinged Doors: 8.5 lbs. c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Surface Closers: ANSI/ BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 - 4000 Series 1. Surface mounted closers shall be full rack-and-pinion type closer with full complement bearings, single piece forged piston, chrome silicon steel spring, non-critical screw valves; back check, sweep and latch. 2. Furnish closers complete with rectangular, non-ferrous covers, necessary brackets and fasteners for top of door surface mounted units. a. Finish: Powdered coated aluminum BMHA 689 3. Closer products with any type of pressure relief valve system shall not be acceptable. 4. Closers shall be ISO 9000 certified. Units shall be stamped with date of manufacturer code. 5. Closers shall be non-sized, field adjustable from size 1 to 6. 6. Furnish non-sized closers with 1 1/2” diameter piston. 7. Do not through-bolt if there has been special blocking specified in wood door specification; refer to Section 08 21 00. 8. Locate closers on interior side of exterior doors and on non-public side of interior doors, unless otherwise specified. 08 71 00 - 8 DOOR HARDWARE GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
9. Provide manufacturers heaviest duty arm available at doors scheduled with parallel arm applications. 10. Provide plates, brackets and special templates when needed for interface with particular header door and wall conditions and adjacent hardware. 11. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. LCN 4050 Series b. Substitutions: Only as approved by Owner
2.6 FLUSH BOLTS A. Flush bolts: ANSI/ BHMA A156.16 1. Provide minimum 1/2” diameter rods of brass or stainless steel, with minimum 12” long rods for doors up to 7’-0” in height. Provide longer rods as needed for doors exceeding 7’-0” in height. 2. Provide dustproof strikes for bottom flush bolt applications, except where special threshold construction provides non-recessed strike for bolt. 3. Finish: BHMA #626 (US26D) 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: Wood Doors/Hollow Metal Doors a. Ives: FB358/FB458 b. Rockwood: 557/555 c. Trimco: 3913/3917 B. Combination Flush bolts: ANSI/ BHMA A156.16 1. Provide combination flush bolts using two automatic flush bolts for top and bottom of the door. When active leaf is opened flush bolts are opened. Automatic flush bolts engage each time inactive leaf is closed. 2. Provide dust-proof strikes for bottom flush bolt applications. 3. Finish: BHMA #626 (US26D) 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: (wood doors) a. Ives: FB41B b. Rockwood: 1945 c. Trimco: 3815 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: (hollow metal doors) a. Ives: FB31B b. Rockwood: 1845 c. Trimco: 3810 2.7 PUSH PLATES, PULL BARS, AND GRIPS A. General Requirements: ANSI/ BHMA A156.6 1. Provide concealed mounting where possible. Where exposed fasteners are used, they shall be countersunk. 2. Push plates shall be beveled on four edges. 3. Where applicable plates shall be prepared to receive cylinder locks or thumb turns as scheduled. 4. Finish: BHMA #630 (US32D) B. Push Plates: 1. Size: 4” x 16” 2. Thickness (US GA): 18 gauge; .050” 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Hager: 30S b. Ives: 8200 c. Rockwood: 70C C. Pull Plates: 1. Size: 4” x 16” 2. Thickness (US GA): 18 gauge; .050” GCPS Southern High School DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 9 Façade Renovations & Repairs
3. Pull Size: 1” diameter; 8” center-to-center 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Hager: 34G b. Ives: 8302-0 c. Rockwood: 110 x 70C D. Pull Bars: Offset “D” pull 1. Size: 1” diameter 2. Projection: 2 1/2” 3. Mounting: 10” center-to-center 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Hager: 11J b. Rockwood: 151 c. Ives – 8190-0 2.8 DOOR PROTECTION DEVICES A. General Requirements: ANSI/ BHMA A156.6 1. Fabricate protection plates (armor, kick, or mop) not more than 2” less than door width on stop side and not more than 2” less than door width on pull side, x height indicated. 2. Protection plates shall be beveled on three edges. 3. Furnish protection plates for concealed mounting where possible. Where exposed fasteners are used, they shall be countersunk. 4. Metal Plates: Stainless steel a. Thickness (US GA): 18 gauge; .050” 5. Finish: BHMA #630 (US32D) B. Kick Plates: 1. Size: 8” 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Hager: 193S b. Ives: 8400 c. Rockwood: kick plate C. Armor Plates: 1. Size: 36” 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Hager: 193S b. Ives: 8400 c. Rockwood: armor plate 2.9 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Surface Mounted Overhead Holders/Stops: ANSI/ BHMA A156.8 1. Description: Standard-duty extruded brass, bronze or stainless steel stop/holders with shock absorber and no plastic parts 2. Finish: BHMA #630 (US32D) 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. GJ b. Rixson 2.10 SEALS AND GASKETS A. General Requirements: ANSI/ BHMA A156.22 1. Except as otherwise indicated, provide continuous weatherstripping at each edge of every exterior door leaf. Provide type, sizes and profiles shown or scheduled. Provide non-corrosive fasteners as recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. 08 71 00 - 10 DOOR HARDWARE GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
2. Seals and gaskets shall be continuous and without unnecessary interruptions at door corners and hardware. Provide components which shall not become ineffective as seals due to misalignment at corners, minor out-of-adjustment of doors and frames, temperature variations, and normal wear and aging. a. Openings allowing light to pass frame perimeter (exclusive of door bottom) shall be rejected. b. Seals that bind door, requiring more than 15 lbs. to release latch, shall be unacceptable. c. Filing of strike plates shall be unacceptable. B. Replaceable Seal Strips: 1. Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. NGP b. Zero c. Reese 2.11 THRESHOLDS A. General Requirements: ANSI/ BHMA A156.21 1. Except as otherwise indicated provide standard threshold units of type, size and profile as shown or scheduled. 2. Metal: Extruded aluminum; 6063-T5 alloy a. Finish: Clear anodized; BHMA #628 (US27) 3. Provide thresholds that are 1” wider than depth of frame. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. NGP b. Zero c. Reese 2.12 AUXILIARY HARDWARE A. Silencers: ANSI/ BHMA A156.16 1. Furnish tamper proof resilient cushions designed to absorb shock and noise at openings without gaskets. 2. Provide 3 silencers per single door, and 2 for pairs of doors. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Hager: 307D b. Ives: SR64 c. Rockwood: 608 B. Wall Bumpers: 2 1/2” diameter; 1” nominal projection 1. Finish: BHMA #626 (US26D) 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Hager: 235W b. Ives: WS402CCV c. Rockwood: 403 C. Interior Floor-Mounted Stops: Dome stops with risers; 1” height 1. Finish: BHMA #626 (US26D) 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Hager: 241F b. Ives: FS438 c. Rockwood: 441 2.13 CYLINDERS, KEYING SYSTEMS AND KEY CONTROL A. General Requirements: GCPS Southern High School DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 11 Façade Renovations & Repairs
1. Meet with Architect and Owner to finalize keying requirements and obtain keying instructions in writing. Keying schedule shall be established in compliance with specific requirements determined in consultation with Owner. 2. Cylinders shall be from same manufacturer as locks 3. Provide temporary construction keying system during construction period. Permanent keys shall be furnished to Owner’s Representative prior to occupancy. Owner or Owner’s Security Agent will void operation of construction keys. 4. Provide interior locks and cylinders to be master keyed into existing Sargent key system. 5. Provide KESO high-security cylinders at exterior locations as listed in hardware sets. B. Cylinders: 1. Permanent cylinders shall be keyed by manufacturer and configured into sets or subsets, master keyed or great grand master keyed as directed by Owner. 2. Permanent keys and cylinders shall be marked with applicable blind code for identification. These visual key control marks or codes shall not include actual key cuts. a. Key and cylinder identification stamping shall be approved by Architect and Owner. Failure to properly comply with these requirements shall be cause for replacement of cylinders and keys involved at no additional cost to Owner. 3. Equip locks and cylinders with patent protected, full size cylinders with six nickel silver finger pins. Provide a minimum of six pins with nickel silver bottom pins. Cylinders shall allow for multiplex master keying, configured to Owner’s instructions. C. Key Material: 1. Provide manufacturer’s standard embossed keys of nickel silver to ensure durability. Key Quantity: Furnish keys in following quantities: a. Master Keys: 1 per master group b. Change Keys: 1) Locks Keyed Alike: 1 per set 2) Locks Keyed Different: 3 per lock c. Key Blanks: 1 per cylinder d. Temporary Construction Master Keys: 2 total 2. Deliver end user exclusive permanent key blanks and other security keys directly to Owner’s representative from manufacturer by secure courier, return receipt requested. Failure to properly comply with these requirements shall be cause for replacement of cylinders and keys involved at no additional cost to Owner.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: 1. Examine doors and frames with Installer present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. 2. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 4. Commencement of installation constitutes acceptance of conditions and responsibility for satisfactory performance. 08 71 00 - 12 DOOR HARDWARE GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: 1. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series a. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames in compliance with SDI 109 2. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115-W Series. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General Requirements: 1. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturers’ written instructions using manufacturer’s supplied fasteners. 2. Securely install finish hardware items in compliance with accepted schedule and templates furnished with hardware. 3. Install mortised items flush with adjacent surfaces. 4. Install locksets, surface mounted closers, and trim after finishing of doors and frames is complete. a. Where cutting and fitting is needed to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are to be painted or finished in another way later, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of door hardware with finishing work. 5. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 6. Drill and countersink units that are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in compliance with industry standards. B. Mounting Heights: 1. Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless otherwise specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: a. Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI A250.6 b. DHI Publication Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames c. DHI Publication Recommended Locations for Builders’ Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frame d. Wood Doors: DHI Publication WDHS-3 C. Door Stops: 1. Door stops shall be furnished for every door leaf. Install floor-mounted or wall- mounted stops, as scheduled. Overhead door holder shall be provided where floor or wall stops cannot be used. 2. Place door stops in such a position that they permit maximum door swing, but do not present a hazard or obstruction. Furnish floor strikes for floor holders of proper height to engage holders of doors. 3. Floor stops shall be installed with risers as needed to accommodate finish flooring materials for proper relationship to door. D. Thresholds: 1. Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant in compliance with requirements specified in Division 7. E. Key Control System: 1. Place keys on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: GCPS Southern High School DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 13 Façade Renovations & Repairs
1. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 2. Adjust door closer sweep period so that from an open position of 70 degrees door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3” from latch measured to leading edge of door. B. Final Adjustment: 1. Return to Project during week prior to Substantial Completion and make final check and adjustment of hardware items. 2. Adjust hardware so doors operate in perfect order. Test and adjust hardware for quiet, smooth operation, free of sticking, binding, or rattling. Adjust closers for proper, smooth operation. 3. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. C. Six Month Adjustment: 1. Approximately six months after Date of Substantial Completion, installer shall perform following: a. Examine and readjust each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. b. Consult with, and instruct, Owner’s personnel on recommended maintenance procedures. c. Replace door hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation. 3.5 CLEANING A. Exposed hardware shall be carefully cleaned by methods not injurious to finish, immediately preceding occupancy. Replace defective, damaged, or missing hardware. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. C. Clean operating items as needed to restore proper function and finish.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes.
3.7 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware shall be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Protect door hardware items from abuse, corrosion and other damage until Owner accepts Project as complete.
3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE HARDWARE SET NO. 01 FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): 101 PROVIDE EACH PR DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QT Y DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 2 EA CONT. HINGE 224XY 628 IVE 1 EA KEYED MULLION KR4023 PC FAL 08 71 00 - 14 DOOR HARDWARE GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
1 EA PANIC DEVICE CD -25 -R-EO 626 FAL 1 EA PANIC DEVICE LD -25 -R-EO 626 FAL 1 EA PULL VR810NL 630 IVE 1 EA RIM CYLINDER W / CONSTRUCTION CORE 626 SA R 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER W / CONSTRUCTION C ORE 626 SAR 2 EA FSIC CORE KESO -MATCH EXISTING 626 SAR SYSTEM 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4050EDA 689 LCN 2 EA SPACER 4050 -61 689 LCN 2 EA SUPPORT BRACKET 4050 -30 689 LCN 1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 100S -ADJ 630 GJ 1 EA WALL STOP WS406CCV 626 IVE 1 EA MULLIO N SEAL 8780N BK ZER 1 EA GASKETING 81 44FS -PSA BK ZER 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA A ZER 2 EA * DOOR CONTACT 679 -05HM SCE 1 EA THRESHOLD 568A -223 A ZER
Door Normally Closed and Locked Free Egress at All Times Entry with Key Upon Loss of Power or Fire Alarm Activation Door Remains Locked Door Monitored
HARDWARE SET NO. 02 FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): 1103, 1108, 1114 PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 EA CONT. HINGE 224HD - EPT 628 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWA RE CX -98 -EO 626 VON 1 EA ELECTRIC POWER EPT-10 628 VON TRANSFER 1 EA MORTISE CYL INDER W / CONSTRU CTION CORE 626 SAR 1 EA FSIC CORE KESO -MATCH EXISTING SYSTEM 626 SAR 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4050 SCNS 689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 8144FS -PSA S-BK ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA AA ZER 1 EA TH RESHOLD 545 A-MSLA -10 A ZER 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142 AA ZER 1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679 -05HM GRY SCE
Door Normally Closed and Locked Egress With Key Override Or Fire Alarm Activation Or After 15-Second Delay Upon Loss of Power Door Remains Locked Door Monitored
HARDWARE SET NO. 03 FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): 121 PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATA LOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 EA CONT. HINGE 224XY -EPT 628 IVE 1 EA CONT. HINGE 224XY 628 IVE GCPS Southern High School DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 15 Façade Renovations & Repairs
1 EA ELECTRIC POWER EPT -10 628 VON TRANSFER 1 EA KEYED MULLION KR402 3 PC FAL 1 EA ELE CTRIC PANIC MEL -25 -R-EO 626 FAL DEVIC E 1 EA PANIC DEVICE LD -25 -R-EO 1 EA PULL VR810 NL 630 IVE 1 EA MORTI SE CYLINDER W / CONSTRUCTION CORE 626 SAR 1 EA RIM CYLINDER W / CONSTRUCTION CORE 626 SAR 2 EA FSIC CORE KESO -MATCH EXISTING 626 SAR SYSTEM 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4050EDA 689 LCN 2 EA SPACER 4050 -61 689 LCN 2 EA SUPPORT BRACKET 4050 -30 689 LCN 2 EA OVERHEAD STOP 100S -ADJ 630 GJ 1 EA MULLION SEA L 8780N BK ZER 1 SET GASKETING 8144FS -PSA BK ZER 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA AA ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 568A -223 A ZER 2 EA * DOOR CO NTACT 679 -05HM SC E POWER SUPPLY REF MISC. POWER SUPPLY SET SCE 1 EA* CREDENTIAL MT15 BK SCH READER
Doors Normally Closed and Locked Free Egress at All Times Entry with Valid Credential or Key Override Upon Loss of Power or Fire Alarm Activation Doors Remain Locked Doors Monitored * To Be Provided by West Security
HARDWARE SET NO. 03A FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): 123 PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 EA CONT. HINGE 224XY -EPT 628 IVE 2 EA CONT. HINGE 224XY 628 IVE 1 EA ELECTRIC POWER EPT -10 628 VON TRANSFER 1 EA KEYED MULL ION KR4023 PC FAL 1 EA ELECTRIC PANIC MEL -25 -R-EO 626 FAL DEVICE 1 EA PANIC DEVICE LD -25 -R-EO 2 EA PULL VR810 NL 630 IVE 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER W / CONSTRUCTION CORE 626 SAR 1 EA RIM CYLINDER W/CONSTRUCTION CORE 626 SAR 2 EA FSIC CORE KESO -MATCH EXISTING 626 SAR SYSTEM 2 EA SUR FACE CLOSER 4050EDA 689 LCN 2 EA OVERHEAD STOP 100S -ADJ 630 GJ 1 EA MULLION SEAL 8780N BK ZER 1 SET GASKETING 8144FS -PSA BK ZER 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 39WA AA ZER 2 EA * DOOR CONTACT 679 -05HM SCE
08 71 00 - 16 DOOR HARDWARE GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
POWER SUPPLY REF M ISC. POWER SU PPLY SET SCE 1 EA* CREDENTIAL MT15 BK SCH READER
Doors Normally Closed and Locked Free Egress at All Times Entry with Valid Credential Upon Loss of Power or Fire Alarm Activation Doors Remain Locked Doors Monitored * To Be Provided by West Security
HARDWARE SET NO. 04 FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): 122 PROVIDE EACH DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESC RIPTION CATAL OG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM 9080L -17N 626 SCH FUNCTION MORTISE LOCK 1 EA MORTISE W / CONSTRUCTION CORE 626 SAR CYLINDER 1 EA FSIC CORE KESO -MATCH EXISTING SYSTEM 626 SAR TO MATCH EXISTIN G 1 EA SURFACE CLO SER 1450 ARW / PA 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406CCV 626 IVE 3 EA GASKETING 8144FS -PSA BK ZER HARDWARE SET NO. - MISC POWER SUPPLIES PROVIDE EACH DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DES CRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MF R 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS906 -4R-KL VON (121 & 123 SHARE) 1 EA POW ER SUPPLIES PS906 -4R -FA -KL VON (1103, 1108, 11 14 SHARE)
END OF SECTION
GCPS Southern High School DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 17 Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes glazing products, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section as required by Contract Documents. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08 11 00 – Steel Doors and Frames B. Section 08 41 00 – Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts C. Section 08 52 00 – Aluminum Windows 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas. D. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to the following requirements: a. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour at 33 feet above grade, according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 6.5, "Method 2-
GCPS Southern High School GLAZING 08 80 00-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Contract Drawings. b. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all 4 edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1 inch, whichever is less. 1) For monolithic-glass lites heat treated to resist wind loads. 2) For insulating glass. C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 1/4 inch thick. 2. Center-of-Glass Values: Based on using LBL-44789 WINDOW 5.0 computer program for the following methodologies: a. U-Factors: NFRC 100 expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F. b. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200. c. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated including performance data for glass. B. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch- square Samples for glass. 1. Each color of float glass. 2. Wired glass. 3. Insulating glass for each designation indicated. C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Contract Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 1. For solar-control low-e-coated glass, provide documentation demonstrating that manufacturer of coated glass is certified by coating manufacturer. E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance.
08 80 00-2 GLAZING GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain the following through one source from a single manufacturer for each glass type: clear float and insulating glass. C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories through one source from a single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated. D. Glazing for Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. E. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and, for wired glass, ANSI Z97.1. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products permanently marked with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified in Part 2 articles for glazing lites more than 9 sq. ft. in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category II materials, for lites 9 sq. ft. or less in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category I or II materials, except for hazardous locations where Category II materials are required by 16 CFR 1201 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units." G. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following testing and inspecting agency: 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. For insulating-glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
GCPS Southern High School GLAZING 08 80 00-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs 1.9 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to the Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project Site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to the Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project Site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Float Glass (Type G-1): ASTM C1036, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality q3 glazing select; 1/4 inch thick minimum. B. Laminated Safety Glass (Type G-2): Two lites of clear annealed glass, 1/8 inch thick with clear Saflex interlayer by Solutia. Laminate shall comply with CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Category I and Safety Glazing Test Standard and ANSI A-97.1-1984. Minimum standards specified in ASTM C1036-85 or C1048-85. C. Wire Glass (Type G-3): Clear, polished both sides, square mesh of woven stainless steel wire of 2 inch grid size; 1/4 inch thick. Conform to ANSI Z97.1.
D. Safety Glass (Type G-4): Clear; fully tempered; conforming to ANSI A97.1 and CPSC 96 CFR (1201); 1/4 inch thick minimum. E. Tinted Glass (Type G-5): Float type, tempered, light reducing tinted color; light transmittance of 70 percent, 3/8 inch thick minimum. Color as selected by Owner/Architect. F. Insulating-Glass Units, General (Type G-6 and G-7): Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article 2.9 of this Spec Section. 1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Article 1.4 of this SpecSection. 2. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) glass lites where safety glass is indicated. 08 80 00-4 GLAZING GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 3. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated for insulating-glass units are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge. 4. Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants as follows: a. Manufacturer's standard sealants. 5. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 2.3 GLAZING GASKETS A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. Neoprene, ASTM C 864. 2. EPDM, ASTM C 864. 3. Silicone, ASTM C 1115. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1115. 5. Any material indicated above. B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. Neoprene. 2. EPDM. 3. Silicone. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber. 5. Any material indicated above. C. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded corner units and zipper lock-strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black. 2.4 GLAZING TAPES A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. GCPS Southern High School GLAZING 08 80 00-5 Façade Renovations & Repairs D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). 2.6 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with outdoor and indoor faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.
2.7 MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS UNITS A. Uncoated Clear Float-Glass Units: Class 1 (clear) annealed or Kind HS (heat- strengthened) float glass where heat strengthening is required to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with system performance requirements. 1. Thickness: 1/4 inch thick minimum. 2.8 MONOLITHIC WIRED-GLASS UNITS A. Polished Wired-Glass Units: Form 1 (wired glass, polished both sides), Quality- Q6, Mesh 1 (Diamond), 1/4 inch thick. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Asahi/AMA Glass Corp.; affiliated with AFG Industries, Inc. b. Central Glass Co., Ltd.; distributed by Northwestern Industries Inc. c. Pilkington Sales (North America) Ltd. d. Substitutions: Or approved equal. 2.9 INSULATING-GLASS UNITS A. Tinted Insulating-Glass Units (G-6 & G-7): 1. Acceptable Manufactures: a. PPG – Solarban 70XL. b. Oldcastle. c. Guardian. d. Pilkington. e. Substitutions: Or approved equal. 2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 1/4 inch minimum individual glass lite thickness with an overall unit thickness of 1 inch. 3. Interspace Content: Air or Argon. 4. Outdoor Lite: Class 1 float glass. 5. Indoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass. a. Kind HS (heat strengthened). 6. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on second or third surface. 7. Visible Light Transmittance: 40 percent minimum. 8. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.26 maximum. 9. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.23 maximum. 10. Shading Coefficient: 0.27 minimum. 08 80 00-6 GLAZING GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 11. Ultra Violet: 2 percent.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Contract Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project Site and legally dispose of off Project Site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows: 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.
GCPS Southern High School GLAZING 08 80 00-7 Façade Renovations & Repairs 2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed. F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners 08 80 00-8 GLAZING GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system, unless otherwise indicated. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
GCPS Southern High School GLAZING 08 80 00-9 Façade Renovations & Repairs
DIVISION 9
FINISHES
BUSHEY FEIGHT MORIN ARCHITECTS INC. 473 NORTH POTOMAC STREET HAGERSTOWN, MARYLAND 21740 301-733-5600 FAX: 301-733-5612
SECTION 09 11 10 - METAL STUD FRAMING SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Formed metal stud framing at interior locations.
B. Framing accessories.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05 40 00 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Exterior wall and roof framing.
B. Section 06 11 40 – Wood Blocking and Curbing: Framing, sheathing and rough wood blocking.
C. Section 07 21 00 – Thermal Insulation.
D. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Sealers.
E. Section 09 26 00 - Gypsum Board Systems: Metal studs for partitioning.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
B. ASTM A653/A653M-08 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
C. ASTM A924 - Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Electrolytic Zinc-Coated.
D. ASTM A1003 – Standard Specification for Sheet Steel, Carbon, Metallic and Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members.
E. ASTM C645 - Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track) and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board.
F. ASTM C754 - Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water-Resistant Backing Board.
G. GA 203 - Installation of Screw-Type Steel Framing Members to Receive Gypsum Board.
H. Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (MFMA) - Guidelines for the Use of Metal Framing.
I. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Steel Structures Painting Manual.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Metal stud framing system for interior walls, with batt type acoustic insulation specified in Section 07 21 00, and interior gypsum board specified in Section 09 26 00.
GCPS Southern High School METAL STUD FRAMING SYSTEM 09 11 10-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs B. Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by pressure and suction of wind acting normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with code.
C. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate component details, anchorage to structure, type and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of other related work.
C. Describe method for securing studs to tracks, splicing, and for blocking and reinforcement to framing connections.
D. Product Data: Provide data describing standard framing member materials and finish, product criteria, load charts, and limitations.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with GA 203 and ASTM C754.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 31 00.
B. Coordinate with the placement of components within the stud framing system, specified in Section 06 11 40 and mechanical/electrical items.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STUD FRAMING MATERIALS
A. Studs: Meeting requirements of ASTM C645; C-Channel, roll-formed from hot- dipped galvanized steel; complying with ASTM A1003 and ASTM A653 G40 or equivalent corrosion resistant coating, depth as detailed: 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dietrich UltraSTEEL Framing (20 gauge equivalent). a. UltraSTEEL Fire rated partitions to be installed in accordance with UL V450, V438, or V419. 2. Thickness: Interior - 20 gauge or as identified in drawings – wall types).
B. Runners: Of same material and thickness as studs, bent leg retainer notched to receive studs with provision for crimp locking to stud. Ceiling Runners: With extended leg retainer.
09 11 10-2 METAL STUD FRAMING SYSTEM GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs C. Deflection Track Slotted: Manufacturer’s single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track: punched with vertical slots in both legs. Steel Sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection from structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide: Dietrich Metal Framing, SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track by Brady Innovations or equivalent.
D. Channel Bridging or Bracing: U-Channel Assembly; Base metal thickness of .0538 inch and minimum ½ inch wide flanges. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dietrich Metal Framing: Spazzer 5400 Bridging and Bracing Bar (SPZS) and Spazzer Bar Guard (SPBG). 2. U-Channel Assembly: 1 ½ inches a. Dietrich Metal Framing; Easy Clip U-Series Clip Angle or equivalent. E. Furring and Bracing Members: Of same material as studs; thickness to suit purpose.
F. Fasteners: GA 203. Self drilling, self tapping screws.
G. Sheet Metal Backing: 18 gage galvanized steel for reinforcement.
H. Anchorage Devices: Power actuated. Drilled expansion bolts. Screws with sleeves.
I. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC - Paint 20 Type I Inorganic zinc rich.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate assemblies to sizes and profiles required; with framing members fitted, reinforced, and braced to suit design requirements.
B. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site, ready for installation.
2.3 FINISHES
A. Studs and Track: Galvanize to G40 (minimum) coating class.
B. Headers: Galvanize to G90 coating class.
C. Accessories: Same finish as framing members. ASTM A123, hot dip galvanized to 1.25 oz/sq ft.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01 31 00.
B. Verify that conditions are ready to receive work.
C. Verify that rough-in utilities are in proper location.
3.2 ERECTION
A. Installation Standard: Comply with ASTM C 754
GCPS Southern High School METAL STUD FRAMING SYSTEM 09 11 10-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs B. Align and secure top and bottom runners at 24 inches oc.
C. Fit runners under and above openings; secure intermediate studs to same spacing as wall studs.
D. Install studs vertically at 16 inches oc.
E. Align stud web openings horizontally.
F. Secure studs to tracks using crimping method. Do not weld.
G. Stud splicing not permissible.
H. Fabricate corners using a minimum of three studs.
I. Double stud at wall openings, door and window jambs, not more than 2 inches (50 mm) from each side of openings.
J. Brace stud framing system rigid.
K. Coordinate erection of studs with requirements of door frames, window frames, and markerboards, chalkboards and tackboards; install supports and attachments.
L. Coordinate installation of wood bucks, anchors, and wood blocking with electrical and mechanical work to be placed within or behind stud framing.
M. Blocking: Secure wood blocking to studs. Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, hardware, and chalkboards, markerboards and tackboards.
N. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending to finished ceiling only and for partitions extending through the ceiling to the structure above. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. Provide extended leg ceiling runners.
O. Coordinate placement of insulation in stud spaces made inaccessible after stud framing erection.
END OF SECTION
09 11 10-4 METAL STUD FRAMING SYSTEM GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 09 26 00 – GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum board; patching and repair. 2. Tile backing panels at restrooms.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05 40 00 – Cold Formed Metal Framing
B. Section 06 11 40 – Wood Blocking and Curbing
C. Section 09 11 10 – Metal Stud Framing System
D. Section 09 31 00 – Ceramic Tile
E. Section 09 51 00 – Suspended Acoustical Ceilings
F. Section 09 65 00 – Resilient Flooring: Base.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. GCPS Southern High School GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09 26 00-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELS, GENERAL
A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.
2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. G-P Gypsum. b. Lafarge North America Inc. c. National Gypsum Company. d. USG Corporation.
B. Regular Type: 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.
C. Type X: 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.
D. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.
E. Abuse-Resistant Type: Manufactured to produce greater resistance to surface indentation, through-penetration (impact resistance), and abrasion than standard, regular-type and Type X gypsum board. 1. Core: Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.
F. High-Impact Type: Manufactured with Type X core, plastic film laminated to back side for greater resistance to through-penetration (impact resistance). 1. Core: 5/8 inch thick. 2. Plastic-Film Thickness: 0.010 inch.
G. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces. 1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.
09 26 00-2 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 2.3 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: 1. Complying with ASTM C 1178/C 1178M. a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "DensShield Tile Guard" by G-P Gypsum. 2. Complying with ASTM C1177/C 1177M. a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "DensArmor Plus Interior Guard" by G-P Gypsum. 3. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.
2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.
2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint. g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gordon, Inc. c. Pittcon Industries. 2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5. 3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified.
2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. GCPS Southern High School GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09 26 00-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer. 2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.
2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.
D. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 07 90 00 – Joint Sealers.
E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow- metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
09 26 00-4 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch wide joints to install sealant.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
B. Multilayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints
GCPS Southern High School GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09 26 00-5 Façade Renovations & Repairs 1 framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.
C. Curved Surfaces: 1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible, across curved surface plus 12-inch long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them. 2. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches o.c.
3.4 APPLYING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS
A. Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports. 1. Install with 1/4-inch open space where panels abut other construction or structural penetrations. 2. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.5 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile and where indicated. Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.
B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile.
C. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.
3.6 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Professional for visual effect.
C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 09 26 00-6 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 3. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.
D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.
3.7 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.
D. Provide the following level of finish in accordance with the Gypsum Construction Handbook – Latest Edition. 1. Level of Finish Schedule: a. Level 0 – Temporary Construction. b. Level 1 – Plenum areas above ceilings or areas not exposed to view. c. Level 2 – WR Gypsum backing board being used for tile substrate. d. Level 3 – Gypsum board scheduled to relieve heavy textured finishes or commercial grade wall coverings. e. Level 4 – Gypsum board scheduled to receive light textured finishes or residential grade wall coverings. f. Level 5 – All gypsum board scheduled to receive paint finish.
E. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION
GCPS Southern High School GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09 26 00-7 Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 09 31 00 – CERAMIC TILE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following: 1. Ceramic wall tile and base. 2. Metal edge strips installed as part of tile installations.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07 90 00 – Joint Sealers
B. Section 09 26 00 – Gypsum Board Systems
C. Section 09 51 00 – Suspended Acoustical Ceilings
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus joint width indicated.
B. Facial Dimension: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499).
C. Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI A137.1.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.
D. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer.
E. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.
F. Qualification Data: For Installer.
G. Closeout Documents: Operations and Maintenance submit cleaning maintenance of products.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tile of same type from one source or producer.
GCPS Southern High School CERAMIC TILE 09 31 00-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs 1. Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.
B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.
C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section through one source from a single manufacturer for each product: 1. Stone thresholds. 2. Joint sealants. 3. Metal edge strips.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 31 00.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.
B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.
D. Store liquid latexes and emulsion adhesives in unopened containers and protected from freezing.
E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
09 31 00-2 CERAMIC TILE GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Daltile Corp. (Basis of Design)
B. American Olean
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified in Part 1 "Definitions" Article.
B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards referenced in "Setting and Grouting Materials" Article.
C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements: 1. As selected by Professional from manufacturer's full range.
D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.
E. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.
2.3 TILE PRODUCTS
A. Ceramic Wall Tile (W4): (Match existing.) Provide tile complying with the following requirements: 1. Daltile Semi-Gloss, 2” x 2”, Field: Price Groups 1 and 2; Accents: Price Groups 1, 2, or 4. 2. Nominal Thickness: 5/16 inch 3. Face: Plan with cushioned edge 4. Ceramic base to match characteristics
B. Tile Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to comply with following requirements:
GCPS Southern High School CERAMIC TILE 09 31 00-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs 1. Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. 2. Shapes: As follows, selected from manufacturer’s standard shapes: a. Base: Coved. b. Wainscot Cap for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose. c. External Corners for Thinset Installations: Surface bullnose. d. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners, except use coved base and cap angle pieces designed to member with stretcher shapes.
C. Accessories for Glazed Wall Tile: Provide vitreous china accessories of type and size indicated, in color and finish to match adjoining wall tile, and intended for installing by same method as adjoining wall tile.
2.4 CRACK-SUPPRESSION MEMBRANES FOR THIN-SET TILE INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10, selected from the following.
B. Chlorinated-Polyethylene-Sheet Product: Nonplasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with high-strength, nonwoven polyester fabric, for adhering to latex-portland cement mortar; 60 inches wide by 0.030-inch nominal thickness. 1. Available Product: Noble Company (The); Nobleseal TS.
2.5 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1. 1. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar that complies with Paragraph C-4.6.1 in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.1.
B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4, consisting of the following: 1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive to which only water must be added at Project site. 2. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene- butadiene-rubber liquid-latex additive. a. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar that complies with Paragraph F-4.6.1 in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.
C. Standard Sanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated.
D. Standard Unsanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated.
E. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7, color as indicated. 1. Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix. a. Unsanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch and narrower. b. Sanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch and wider.
F. Grout for Pregrouted Tile Sheets: Same silicone rubber used in factory to pregrout tile sheets.
09 31 00-4 CERAMIC TILE GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 2.6 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints, unless otherwise indicated.
C. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures. 1. Available Products: a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786. b. GE Silicones; Sanitary 1700. c. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant. d. Tremco, Inc.; Tremsil 600 White.
D. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 1. Available Products: a. Bostik; Chem-Calk 550. b. Mameco International, Inc.; Vulkem 245. c. Pecora Corporation; NR-200 Urexpan. d. Tremco, Inc.; THC-900.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.
B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications, white zinc alloy exposed-edge material.
C. Temporary Protective Coating: Either product indicated below that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile. 1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with a melting point of 120 to 140 deg F per ASTM D 87. 2. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile.
D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.
GCPS Southern High School CERAMIC TILE 09 31 00-5 Façade Renovations & Repairs 2.8 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for installations indicated. 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile. 3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.
B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards. 1. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. 2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat
09 31 00-6 CERAMIC TILE GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.
F. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
G. Refer to TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" and to ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for data on expansion joints. Both require joint locations to be indicated on Drawings. There is no substitute for showing all joints on Drawings.
H. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 90 00 – Joint Sealers.
I. Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards: 1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement; dry-set, commercial portland cement; and latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10.
GCPS Southern High School CERAMIC TILE 09 31 00-7 Façade Renovations & Repairs J. At toilet stalls and where indicated, install cementitious backer units and treat joints to comply with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated.
3.4 CRACK-SUPPRESSION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.
B. Install crack-suppression membrane to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.
C. Provide crack isolation sheets over the entire concrete subfloor to receive tile work.
D. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight.
3.5 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION (N/A)
A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Floor Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards. 1. For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage. a. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. b. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.
B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with 1/8 inch joint widths.
C. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would otherwise be exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish.
D. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.
3.6 WALL TILE INSTALLATION
A. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the Wall Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI setting-bed standards.
B. Install metal lath and scratch coat for walls to comply with ANSI A108.1A, Section 4.1.
C. Joint Widths: Install tile on walls with the following joint widths: 1. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch. 2. Glass Tile: 1/16 inch.
09 31 00-8 CERAMIC TILE GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. 3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains.
B. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.
C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed.
D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.
3.8 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE (N/A)
A. Tile Installation: Interior floor installation on concrete; thin-set mortar; TCA F113 and ANSI A108.5. 1. Tile Type: Unglazed ceramic mosaic tile. 2. Thin-Set Mortar: Dry-set portland cement mortar. 3. Grout: Standard sanded cement grout.
B. Tile Installation: Interior floor installation on crack-suppression membrane over concrete; thin-set mortar; TCA F122 and ANSI A108.5. 1. Tile Type: Unglazed ceramic mosaic tile. 2. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. 3. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout.
3.9 WALL TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Tile Installation: Interior wall installation over sound, dimensionally stable masonry or concrete; thin-set mortar; TCA W202 and ANSI A108.5. 1. Tile Type: Glazed wall tile. 2. Thin-Set Mortar: Dry-set portland cement mortar. 3. Grout: Standard unsanded cement grout.
B. Tile Installation: Interior wall installation over gypsum board; thin-set mortar; TCA W243 and ANSI A108.5. 1. Tile Type: Glazed wall tile. 2. Thin-Set Mortar: Dry-set portland cement mortar. 3. Grout: Standard unsanded cement grout.
GCPS Southern High School CERAMIC TILE 09 31 00-9 Façade Renovations & Repairs C. Tile Installation: Interior wall installation over cementitious backer units; thin-set mortar; TCA W244 and ANSI A108.5. 1. Tile Type: Glazed wall tile. 2. Thin-Set Mortar: Dry-set portland cement mortar. 3. Grout: Standard unsanded cement grout.
D. Tile Installation: Interior wall installation over glass-mat, water-resistant backer board; thin-set mortar; TCA W245 and ANSI A108.5. 1. Tile Type: Glazed wall tile. 2. Thin-Set Mortar: Dry-set portland cement mortar. 3. Grout: Standard unsanded cement grout.
END OF SECTION
09 31 00-10 CERAMIC TILE GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 09 51 10 - SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system and perimeter trim.
B. Acoustical tile.
C. Remove and re-install existing tile and ceiling grid as required for exterior wall reconstruction.
D. Non-fire rated assembly.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 09 26 00 – Gypsum Board Systems.
B. Section 09 90 00 – Painting.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.
B. ASTM C636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels.
C. ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.
D. ASTM E580 - Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint.
E. ASTM E1264 - Classification of Acoustical Ceiling Products.
F. Ceilings and Interior Systems Contractors Association (CISCA) - Acoustical Ceilings: Use and Practice.
G. UL - Fire Resistance Directory and Building Material Directory.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Suspension system to rigidly secure acoustical ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
GCPS Southern High School SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 51 10-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs B. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other work or ceiling finishes, interrelation of mechanical and electrical items related to system.
C. Product Data: Provide data on metal grid system components, and acoustical units.
D. Samples: Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating material and finish of acoustical units.
E. Samples: Submit two samples each, 12 inches long, of suspension system main runner, cross runner, and edge trim.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Grid Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for combustibility requirements for materials.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation.
1.9 SEQUENCING
A. Sequence work under the provisions of Section 01 31 00.
B. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved.
C. Install acoustical units after interior wet work is dry.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01 73 00.
B. Provide two (2) full cartons of acoustical unit area of each type of extra tile to Owner.
09 51 10-2 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs C. Replace any tile used from Owner’s stock.
D. Replace any damaged tile as caused as a result of work of this project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS - SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Specified Manufacturer: Armstrong. (Match existing)
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM MATERIALS
A. Non-fire Rated Grid: ASTM C635, intermediate duty; exposed T paired access T; components die cut and interlocking. 1. Use Armstrong's Prelude 15/16 inch w/ Type 1 and Type 2 ceilings.
B. Grid Materials: Cold rolled steel. 1. Prelude Plus 15/16 inch: Galvanized and coated steel with aluminum cap as required.
C. Exposed Grid Surface Width: 15/16 inch.
D. Grid Finish: color as selected.
E. Accessories: Stabilizer bars clips splices edge moldings and hold down clips required for suspended grid system.
F. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application and ceiling system flatness requirement specified.
G. Perimeter Trim: Match existing.
2.3 MANUFACTURERS - ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A. Specified Manufacturer: Armstrong (Match existing)
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
2.4 ACOUSTICAL UNIT MATERIALS
A. Acoustical Panels: (C1) Type 1 - Armstrong Fine Fissured 895/915 Residential (match existing), Type III, Form 2, Pattern CD, Fire Class A; conforming to the following: 1. Size: 24 x 48 inches. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inches. 3. Composition: Wet-Formed Mineral Fiber. 4. Density: 1.09 lb/sq ft. 5. Light Reflectance: 82 percent.
GCPS Southern High School SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 51 10-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs 6. CAC: 35 7. NRC Range: .55 8. Fire Spread: 0-25 per ASTM E1264. (UL Class A) 9. Edge: Square. 10. Surface Color: White 11. Surface Finish: Factory applied latex paint. 12. Suspension System: Prelude 15/16” Fireguard.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01 31 00.
B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
3.2 EXISTING WORK
A. Remove existing tile and grid as required to access work areas. storage and protect for re-installation.
B. Extend existing acoustical ceiling installations using materials and methods as specified.
C. Clean and repair existing acoustical ceilings which remain or are to be reinstalled.
D. Replace all cracked, chipped, or damaged tile in areas of work.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Lay-In Grid Suspension System: 1. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C635, ASTM C636 and as supplemented in this section. 2. Install system in accordance with ASTM E580. 3. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to deflection of 1/360 maximum. 4. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan. 5. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate location of hangers with other work. 6. Install hanger clips during steel deck erection. Install additional hangers and inserts as required. 7. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. 8. Where ducts or other equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers, reinforce nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span extra distance.
09 51 10-4 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 9. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners when weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner; or support components independently. 10. Do not eccentrically load system or produce rotation of runners. 11. Perimeter Molding: a. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces into bed of acoustic sealant. b. Use longest practical lengths. c. Overlap and rivet corners. d. Install at junctions with other interruptions. 12. Form expansion joints as detailed. Form to accommodate plus or minus 1- inch movement. Maintain visual closure.
B. Acoustic Units: 1. Fit acoustic units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. 2. Lay directional patterned units one way with pattern parallel to shortest room axis. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. 3. Install units after above ceiling work is complete. 4. Install acoustic units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. 5. Cutting Acoustic Units: a. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. b. Cut square reveal edges to field cut units. 6. Where round obstructions occur, install preformed closures to match perimeter molding. 7. Install hold-down clips to retain panels tight to grid system within 20 ft of exterior door.
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.
END OF SECTION
GCPS Southern High School SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 51 10-5 Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 09 65 00 - RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Vinyl tile: Replace tile damaged due to work from project.
C. Resilient base.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Floor substrate surface.
B. Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry.
C. Section 06 41 00 – Custom Casework.
D. Section 09 26 00 – Gypsum Board Systems.
E. Section 09 68 80 – Carpet-Glue Down
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
B. FS L-F-1641 - Floor Covering, Translucent or Transparent Vinyl Surface, with Backing.
C. FS L-F-475 - Floor Covering, Vinyl Surface (Tile and Roll), with Backing.
D. FS RR-T-650 - Treads, Metallic and Non-metallic, Non-skid.
E. FS SS-T-312 - Tile, Floor: Asphalt, Rubber, Vinyl, Vinyl Composition.
F. FS SS-W-40 - Wall Base: Rubber and Vinyl Plastic.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for flame/ fuel/smoke rating requirements of in accordance with ASTM E84.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Provide product data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics, sizes, patterns and colors available.
C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
D. Submit two samples 3 x 3 inches in size, illustrating color and pattern for each floor material specified.
E. Submit two 3 inch long samples of base material for each color specified.
GCPS Southern High School RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs F. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit cleaning and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01 73 00.
B. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability.
B. Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer three days prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of materials.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide 10 sq ft of each color of selected flooring and 10 ft of each base color of each material specified under provisions of Section 01 73 00.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS – SOLID VINYL TILE
A. Armstrong. (Basis of Design)
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
2.2 TILE FLOORING MATERIALS
A. Vinyl Tile (F1): Equal to Armstrong, 12” x 12”, 1/8” thick, ASTM F1066, Class 1. Colors selected from standards to match existing. Match existing tile colors. 1. General: No. 52515 – Coaster Greige – multicolor 2. Main Office: No. 51915 – Charcoal, imperial texture and No. 52513 – Cirque White, multicolor 3. Conference, Health, and Other Areas: No. 51879 – Etruscan Red (verify)
2.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - BASE MATERIALS
A. Flexco.
B. Johnsonite.
C. Mercer.
D. Roppe
E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
2.4 BASE MATERIALS
A. Base: (B1) FS SS-W-40, extruded rubber; 4 inch high; 1/8 inch thick; coiled stock, (120 lineal feet per coil); top set coved. Corners field fabricated with minimum 12 inch returns. Match existing colors. (Tan, Brown typical)
09 65 00-2 RESILIENT FLOORING GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs B. Base Accessories: Premolded end stops of same material, size, and color as base.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer.
B. Primers and Adhesives: types recommended by flooring manufacturer. Adhesive shall be equal to Armstrong's S-89 or S-90 Resilient Tile Adhesive.
C. Edge Strips: Flooring material.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 ft. and are ready to receive Work.
B. Verify concrete floors are dry to a maximum moisture content of 7 percent, and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate and site conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with subfloor filler.
B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave a smooth, flat, hard surface.
C. Prohibit traffic from area until filler is cured.
D. Vacuum clean substrate.
E. Apply primer to surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION - TILE MATERIAL
A. Install in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
B. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent.
C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.
D. Set flooring in place; press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.
E. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile patterns.
F. Install tile to square grid pattern with all joints aligned and with pattern grain parallel for all units and parallel to width of room. Allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area perimeter.
G. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar.
GCPS Southern High School RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs H. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, and where flooring terminates.
I. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints.
J. Install flooring in pan type floor access covers. Maintain floor pattern.
K. Install flooring under movable partitions without interrupting floor pattern.
L. Install feature strips, and floor markings where indicated. Fit joints tightly.
3.4 INSTALLATION - BASE MATERIAL
A. Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between joints.
B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends use premolded units.
C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tight to wall and floor surfaces.
D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Refer to Section 01 73 00- Execution Requirements.
B. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage to finish.
C. Striping, sealing, wax, and polish of floor finishes by Owner.
END OF SECTION
09 65 00-4 RESILIENT FLOORING GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 09 68 80 - CARPET-GLUE DOWN
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Carpet repair/ replacement of existing damaged due to work of project.
B. Accessories.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 09 26 00 - Gypsum Board Systems.
B. Section 09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring: Base finish and transition strips.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM E648 - Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.
B. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
C. FS DDD-C-95 - Carpets and Rugs, Wool, Nylon, Acrylic, Modacrylic.
D. FS DDD-C-0095 - Carpet and Rugs, Wool, Nylon, Acrylic, Modacrylic, Polyester, Polypropylene.
E. FS DDD-C-1559 - Carpet, Loop, Low Pile Height, High Density, Woven or Tufted with Attached Cushioning.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Indicate seaming plan, method of joining seams, and direction of carpet.
C. Provide product data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.
D. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
E. Submit two (2) samples 12” x 12” in size illustrating color and pattern for each carpet material specified.
F. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01 73 00.
GCPS Southern High School CARPET-GLUE DOWN 09 68 80-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs B. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning and shampooing.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer shall provide a full 10 year wear limited warranty on materials, workmanship, texture retention, and lifetime static warranty, lifetime wear warranty, lifetime edge ravel and zippering warranty, and a colorfast warranty.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in woven tufted carpet with ten (10) years minimum experience.
B. Installer: Company with ten (10) years minimum documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for carpet flammability requirements in accordance with ASTM E84.
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability.
B. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F ambient temperature three days prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS – CARPET
A. Specified Manufacturer-Textile Composite 1. Carpet Tile: Mohawk Group Bigelow Wild Style and Rebel.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
2.2 MATERIALS – CARPET
A. Carpet Tile (F6): Equal to Philadelphia Carpets Style: Mainstreet (match existing style) conforming to the following criteria: 1. Wear Level Textured Loop 2. Dye Method Solution Dyed 3. Size 12’ wide 4. Gauge 1/8” 5. Stitches 9 per inch 6. Density 5288 oz./yd 3 7. Tufted Weight 26 oz/yd 3 8. Fiber Type Solution Q Nylon 9. Backing Synthetic, with stalock pattern 10. Flammability ASTM E648, Class 1 11. Smoke Density less than 450 09 68 80-2 CARPET-GLUE DOWN GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 12. Color As selected from manufacturer's standard color palette by the Architect. Match existing
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Sub-Floor Filler: White premix latex premium; type recommended by carpet manufacturer.
B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; of types recommended by carpet manufacturer. Low VOC content, mildew resistant, meeting current indoor air quality standards.
C. Edge Strips: Vinyl type, color as selected.
D. Base Gripper: Vinyl type, color as selected.
E. Seam Sealer: Solvent type as recommended by the carpet manufacturer.
2.4 WARRANTIES
A. Mohawk Lifetime Modular Warranty, Lifetime Limited Colorfastness to light, 10 year Limited Colorfastness to Atmospheric Contaminants, 10 year Stain Warranty, Lifetime Static.
B. Roppe Lifetime Delamination Warranty.
C. J&J Invision Lifetime Fiber Performance for wear, Lifetime Fiber Performance for static, Lifetime protection for tuft bind strength, and Lifetime protection from delamination failure.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 ft and are ready to receive work.
B. Verify concrete floors are dry to a maximum moisture content of 7 percent; and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler.
B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave smooth, flat, hard surface.
C. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.
D. Vacuum floor surface.
GCPS Southern High School CARPET-GLUE DOWN 09 68 80-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs E. Coordinate with mechanical contractor for maintaining proper ventilation during and after installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Prior to installation, unwrap and unroll carpet in a well-ventilated location. Permit carpet to air 24 to 48 hours before actual installation. 1. Airing can occur in the finished space through opening of the new windows and doors.
B. Continuously operate the building ventilation system at normal temperature and maximum outdoor air during installation and 72 hours after installation is complete.
C. Apply carpet and low VOC adhesive in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, with proper trowel as recommended by C.R.I.
D. Lay out rolls of carpet for approval.
E. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots.
F. Double cut carpet, to allow intended seam and pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed. Edge seam carpet.
G. Locate seams in area of least traffic.
H. Fit seams straight, not crowded or peaked, free of gaps.
I. Lay carpet on floors with run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic.
J. Do not change run of pile in any room where carpet is continuous through a wall opening into another room. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline.
K. Cut and fit carpet around interruptions.
L. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove access adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.
B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces per manufacturer’s maintenance instructions.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic from carpet areas for 24 hours after installation.
END OF SECTION
09 68 80-4 CARPET-GLUE DOWN GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
SECTION 09 90 00 – PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and field application of paints, and other coatings.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel: Field finish. B. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Shop primed items. C. Section 08 11 10 - Steel Doors and Frames. D. Section 09 26 00 - Gypsum Board Systems.
1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products. 2. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood-Base Materials. 3. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. Painting and Decorating Contractors of America: 1. PDCA - Architectural Painting Specification Manual. D. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings: 1. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Manual. E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.
1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data on all finishing products. C. Samples: Submit two color paper chip selection catalogs illustrating range of colors available for each surface finishing product scheduled. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special surface preparation procedures, substrate conditions requiring special attention.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
GCPS Southern High School PAINTING 09 90 00-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface Burning Characteristics: 1. Fire Retardant Finishes: Maximum 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 & NFPA 255.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum ten (10) years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum five (5) years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.9 MOCKUP A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Mock-up requirements. B. Construct mockup panel, 4 feet long by 4 feet wide, illustrating coating color, texture, and finish. C. Construct door and frame assembly illustrating [paint] coating color, texture, and finish. D. Locate where directed by Architect/Engineer. E. Incorporate accepted mockup as part of Work.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. C. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. D. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside temperature ranges required by paint product manufacturer. C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow when relative humidity is outside humidity ranges, or moisture content of surfaces exceed those required by paint product manufacturer. D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
09 90 00-2 PAINTING GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. F. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candle measured mid-height at substrate surface.
1.12 WARRANTY A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish five-year manufacturer warranty for paints and coatings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers - Paint 1. PPG. 2. Duron. 3. Sherwin-Williams. 4. Benjamin Moore. B. Manufacturers - Primer Sealers 1. PPG - 6 Line. 2. Benjamin Moore. 3. Sherwin-Williams. 4. Duron C. Manufacturers Block Filler 1. PPG Line. 2. Benjamin Moore. 3. Sherwin Williams/Duron.
D. Epoxy Paint: 1. PPG Architectural Finishes. 2. Sherwin Williams. 3. Benjamin Moore E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
2.2 COMPONENTS A. Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Prepare coatings: 1. To soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to homogeneous coating. 2. For good flow and brushing properties. 3. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. B. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve finishes specified; commercial quality. C. Patching Materials: Latex filler. D. Fastener Head Cover Materials: Latex filler.
GCPS Southern High School PAINTING 09 90 00-3 Front Façade Renovation
2.3 FINISHES A. Refer to schedule at end of section for surface finish schedule. Colors will be selected during construction.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify surfaces and substrate conditions are ready to receive Work as instructed by product manufacturer. C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report conditions capable of affecting proper application. D. Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard:12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 4. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 5. Concrete Floors: 8 percent.
3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Appurtenances: Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. B. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces capable of affecting work of this section. Remove or repair existing coatings exhibiting surface defects. C. Marks: Seal with shellac those which may bleed through surface finishes. D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. E. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove foreign particles to permit adhesion of finishing materials. Apply compatible sealer or primer. F. Concrete Floors: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with clear water. Verify required acid-alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry. G. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. H. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. I. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.
09 90 00-4 PAINTING GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs J. Plaster Surfaces: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces. K. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand or power tool wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs. L. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Prime metal items including shop primed items. M. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. N. Exterior Wood Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior paintable caulking compound after prime coat has been applied. O. Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces.
3.3 EXISTING WORK A. Extend existing paint and coatings installations using materials and methods compatible with existing installations and as specified.
3.4 APPLICATION A. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. B. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless specified otherwise. C. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish. D. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. E. Prime concealed surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint.
3.5 CLEANING A. Section 01 74 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Collect waste material which may constitute fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site.
3.6 SCHEDULE - INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS. A. Ferrous Metals: 1. 1st Coat: Primer - Speedhide Water Base Inhibitive Metal primer 90-712 white WFT 4.8 mils. 2. 2nd & 3rd Coat: Pitt-Glaze Acrylic-Epoxy Semi-gloss coating, 16 line, WFT 6.0 mils.
GCPS Southern High School PAINTING 09 90 00-5 Front Façade Renovation
B. Exposed Metal Structure Frame and Deck 1. 1st Coat: Primer - Speedhide Water Base Inhibitive Metal primer, 90-712 white, WFT 4.8 mils. 2. 2nd & 3rd Coat: Speedhide latex dry fog flat spray paint, 6-715, white WFT 6.0 mils per coat. C. New / Existing Masonry: 1. 1st Coat: Latex masonry block filler (PPG 6 7) 2. 2nd & 3rd Coats: Latex Semi-gloss Enamel (PPG 6 510) 3.6 WFT/coat D. Gypsum Board & Plaster: 1. 1st Coat: Latex flat enamel (PPG 6 2): 3.6 WFT 2. 2nd & 3rd Coats: Eggshell Latex enamel (PPG 6 411): 2.6 WFT/coat E. Wood Painted 1. lst Coat (Primer): Enamel Undercoater (PPG 6 6): 3.5 WFT/coat. 2. 2nd & 3rd Coats: Semi-gloss Alkyd Oil Based Enamel (PPG 6 90): 3.6 WFT/coat. F. Metal Doors, Trim & Exposed Structural Steel 1. Touch up existing primer. 2. 2nd & 3rd Coats: Alkyd Lo luster enamel (PPG 6 90) 3.5 WFT/coat.
3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS A. Ferrous metals (normal use and atmosphere). 1. Location: All structural and miscellaneous steel, hollow metal doors and frames and fire hydrants and masonry lintels. 2. System: Oil Alkyd (Low oil gloss). a. First Coat: Touch-up Primer: PPG 6-212 WFT 3.6 b. Second and Third Coat: PPG Speedhide all-purpose house paint WFT 4.0 mils per coat. B. Zinc Coated Metal - Galvanized Steel 1. Location: All exterior zinc coated or galvanized steel miscellaneous metals and lintels. 2. System: Urethane/Acrylic a. Surface: Preparation SPG-9E b. Primer: Pitt-Tech 90-708 @ 5.1 WFT c. Finish (2 coats): Manor Hall 75-line @ 3.2 WFT per coat.
C. Ferrous Metals: (steel columns and support lintels) 1. 1st Coat: Primer - Speedhide Water Base Inhibitive Metal primer 90-712 white WFT 4.8 mils. 2. 2nd & 3rd Coat: Pitt-Glaze Acrylic-Epoxy Semi-gloss coating, 16 line, WFT 6.0 mils
3.8 COLORS
A. Exterior Doors and Frames: Bronze to match window/storefront color
B. Interior: Equal to Sherwin Williams – Semi-gloss Coconut
C. Other colors as selected by Owner/Architect.
END OF SECTION 09 90 00-6 PAINTING GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
DIVISION 10
SPECIALTIES
BUSHEY FEIGHT MORIN ARCHITECTS INC. 473 NORTH POTOMAC STREET HAGERSTOWN, MARYLAND 21740 301-733-5600 FAX: 301-733-5612
SECTION 10 10 50 - VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Removal and re-installation of existing marker boards, tack boards, and display rail (tack strip).
B. Trim, Chalkrail, and accessories.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06 11 40 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood grounds.
B. Section 05 40 00 – Cold Formed Metal Framing.
C. Section 09 11 10 – Metal Stud Framing Systems.
D. Section 09 26 00 – Gypsum Board Systems.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. AHA A135.4 - Basic Hardboard.
B. ASTM A424 - Steel Sheets for Porcelain Enameling.
C. ASTM A526 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Commercial Quality.
D. ASTM B209 - Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
E. ASTM B221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes.
F. ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard.
G. ASTM C208 - Insulation Board (Cellulose Fiber) Structural and Decorative.
H. ASTM C543 - Slate Blackboards.
I. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
J. FS CCC-W-408 - Wall Covering, Vinyl-Coated.
K. FS L-P-1040 - Plastic Sheets and Strips, Polyvinyl Fluoride.
L. HPMA HP - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
M. NPA A208.1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard.
N. PEI (Porcelain Enamel Institute) - Performance Specifications for Porcelain Enamel Chalkboards.
GCPS Southern High School VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10 10 50-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs O. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate wall elevations, dimensions, joint locations, special anchor details.
C. Product Data: Provide data on markerboards, tackboards, tackboard surface covering, and trim and accessories.
D. Samples: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating materials and finish, color and texture of markerboard, tackboard, and tackboard surfacing.
1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 73 00.
B. Maintenance Data: Include data on regular cleaning, and stain removal.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for flame/smoke rating for vinyl fabric covered tackboards in accordance with ASTM E84.
17 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten (10) years documented experience.
1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
1.9 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
A. Refer to drawings for schedule and location.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Section 01 74 00.
B. Warranty: Include coverage of markerboard surface from discoloration due to cleaning, crazing or cracking, or staining.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Match existing, replace in kind if existing is damaged.
B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
10 10 50-2 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
1. Polyvision. 2. Ghent. 3. Newline Products Inc.
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
2.2 MARKERBOARD MATERIAL
A. Markerboards shall be equal to Claridge LCS II 24 gauge porcelain enamel steel with #75 low gloss white writing surface to be used with LCS markers and finish firing not to exceed 1000 degrees F.
B. Core Material: Medium density fiberboard (MDF)
C. Foil Backing: Aluminum Sheet, 0.015 inch thick.
D. Module: 4’ x 4’ or 4’ x 8’ sizes.
2.3 TACKBOARD MATERIAL
A. Equal to Claridge 1100 Series 1/4" self-healing burlap backed cork on 1/4" hardboard backing, color as selected.
2.4 DISPLAY RAIL (TACK STRIP)
A. Equal to Claridge's No. 274A Deluxe Map and Display rail with two (2) No. 76FH flag holders, six (6) No. 76M display hooks and four (4) No. 76RB roller brackets per instructional room/ office.
2.5 FRAME MATERIALS
A. Frame and Chalkrail: Aluminum extrusions, ASTM B221, 6061 alloy, T5 temper. Equal to Claridge 271A Chalkrail with No. 273A frame trim.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesives: Type used by manufacturer.
B. Map Rail (Tackstrip): Extruded Aluminum with cork insert. Map rails shall be continuous over all tackboards and all chalkboards. Independent installation shall occur as detailed i.e. corridors.
C. Flag Holders: Cast aluminum bored to receive 1 inch diameter flag staff, bracketed to fit top rail of markerboard. Provide minimum two flag holders per room.
D. Cleaning Instruction Plate: Provide instructions for cleaning on a metal plate fastened to perimeter frame near chalkrail.
2.7 FABRICATION - MARKERBOARDS
A. Face Sheet: Porcelain enamel steel.
B. Writing Surface: LCS II #75 low gloss white.
GCPS Southern High School VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10 10 50-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs C. Core: 7/16" Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF)
D. Backing Surface: Aluminum sheet, 0.015 inch thick.
E. Splice Joint: Concealed spline of sheet steel.
2.8 FABRICATION - TACKBOARDS
A. Modular Tackboard System (Equal to Claridge 1100 Series) 1. Outer Facing: 1/4" self-healing burlap backed cork, color as selected. 2. Backing Surface: 1/4" hardboard
2.9 FABRICATION - FRAME AND TRIM
A. Aluminum Frame: Series 3 profile; concealed fasteners, over markerboard.
B. Aluminum Chalkrail: one piece full length of chalkboard, closed ends; concealed fasteners. Chalkrail shall be provided at chalkboards and markerboards. 1. No chalkrail required in gymnasium.
2.10 FINISHES
A. Porcelain Enamel: Glass fibered enamel, baked to vitreous surfaces; Porcelain Enamel Institute Type A; color as selected.
B. Tackboard Surface: 1/4" self-healing burlap backed Claridge cork.
C. Aluminum Frame, Chalkrail, and Accessories: Anodized aluminum clear finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01 31 00.
B. Verify that internal wall blocking is ready to receive work and positioning dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.
C. Verify flat wall surface for frameless adhesive applied type.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install chalkboards, markerboards, and tackboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Establish top of chalk rail at 30 inches above finished floor.
C. Secure units level and plumb.
D. Markerboards: Butt panels tight with concealed spline to hairline joint.
10 10 50-4 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean work under provisions of 01 73 00.
B. Clean markerboard surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Cover markerboard surfaces with protective cover, taped to frame.
D. Remove temporary protective cover at date of Substantial Completion.
3.4 SCHEDULE
A. Refer to Drawings.
B. Re-install in same locations as previously mounted.
END OF SECTION
GCPS Southern High School VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10 10 50-5 Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 10 35 00 - FLAGPOLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Two (2) aluminum flagpole, ground mounted.
1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of anchor devices and foundation sleeve.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete base and foundation construction.
B. Division 26 – Electrical: Lighting
1.4 REFERENCES
A. AASHTO M-36 - Corrugated Metal Culvert Pipe.
B. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.
C. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
D. ASTM A312 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe.
E. ASTM B221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube.
F. ASTM B241 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube.
G. CDA (Copper Development Association) - Handbook.
H. NAAM/ANSI - Flagpole Industry Standards.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Flagpole with Flag Flying: Resistant without permanent deformation to 90 miles/hr. wind velocity (industry standard); non-resonant with a NAAM/ANSI safety factory (industry standard).
B. Foundation and Connections: Resistant to flagpole with (1) flag flying to 90 mph wind velocity (flagpole industry standard) with a safety factor as required by the local building code and recognized engineering norms.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate detailed dimensions, base attachment details, anchor requirements, and imposed loads.
GCPS Southern High School FLAGPOLES 10 35 00-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs C. Product Data: Provide data on pole, accessories, and configurations.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Design flagpole foundation under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State of Maryland.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
B. Spiral wrap flagpole with protective covering and pack in protective shipping tubes or containers.
C. Protect flagpole and accessories from damage or moisture.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. American Flagpoles.
B. Baartol Flagpoles.
C. John Ewing & Co., Inc.
D. Pole-Tech Co., Inc., East Setauket, NY (800) 633-6733
E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
2.2 POLE MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: ASTM B241, 6063 alloy, T6 temper.
2.3 POLE CONFIGURATION
A. Outside Butt Diameter: 8 inches.
B. Outside Tip Diameter: 4 inches.
C. Nominal Wall Thickness: .250 inch.
D. Nominal Height: 30 ft; measured from top of base.
E. Flagpole: Ground mounted type.
F. Flagpole Design: Venetian entasis tapered.
G. Halyard: Interior with hand crank, 48" max. above grade.
2.4 COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Finial: Ball, 6" diameter, aluminum gold anodized.
B. Truck Assembly: Stainless steel; revolving, stainless steel ball bearings, non-fouling.
10 35 00-2 FLAGPOLES GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs C. Flags: United States and State of Maryland, 60 x 96 size, nylon fabric, brass grommets, hemmed edges. GCPS to obtain Garrett County flag.
D. Primer: Zinc chromate type.
2.5 OPERATOR
A. Hand Crank: Removable type.
2.6 MOUNTING COMPONENTS
A. Pole Base Attachment: Counterbalanced Box System.
B. Lighting Ground Rod: 36 inch long copper rod, 3/4 inch diameter.
2.7 FINISHES
A. Metal Surfaces in Contact with Concrete: Asphaltic paint.
B. Concealed Steel Surfaces: Galvanized to ASTM A123, 1.25 oz/sq ft.
C. Exposed to View Steel Surfaces: Galvanized to ASTM A123 2.0 oz/sq. ft.
D. Aluminum: Clear Anodized
E. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin finish.
F. Finial: Gold anodized finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01 31 00.
B. Verify that concrete foundation supports are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coat metal sleeve surfaces below grade and surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials with asphaltic paint.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install flagpole, base assembly, and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Fill foundation tube sleeve with concrete specified in Section 03 30 00.
C. Install foundation plate, centering wedges, and welded base for flagpoles base set in concrete base and fasten.
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1 inch.
GCPS Southern High School FLAGPOLES 10 35 00-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs 3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 73 00.
B. Adjust operating devices so that halyard and flag function smoothly.
END OF SECTION
10 35 00-4 FLAGPOLES GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
SECTION 10 44 10 - SIGNAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Building Signage.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05 40 00 – Cold Formed Metal Framing.
B. Section 07 41 00 – Preformed Metal Wall and Soffit Panels: Metal siding panels.
C. Section 09 26 00 – Gypsum Board Systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Submit shop drawings listing sign styles, lettering and locations, and overall dimensions of each engraved sign.
C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
D. Submit two samples illustrating full size sample sign, of type, style and color specified including method of attachment.
E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
F. Include installation template and hardware.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
C. Package signs, labeled in name groups.
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install signs when ambient temperature is below 70 oF. Maintain this minimum during and after installation of signs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 BUILDING SIGNAGE (Backlit Channel Letters)
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. ASI – Modulex, Baltimore, MD LPS Series 2. Matthews, Pittsburgh, PA 3. Metallic Arts, Spokane, WA
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
GCPS Southern High School SIGNAGE 10 44 10-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs
C. Exterior building signage shall be individually fabricated letter from cut aluminum. Letters to be completely sanded, etched and degreased by immersion to receive baked enamel or satin anodized finish as selected. 1. Depth 3” aluminum return with drainage weeps. 2. .090 aluminum face 3. Offset from wall 1-1/2” 4. Height: Minimum 16” high
D. Letters to be back lite with LED lights with polycarbonate backing. (Wire connection in gabled area.)
E. Mounting to building with nutsert with aluminum threaded rod. Spaces and wall busters.
F. Letter style shall be as selected by Owner/Architect. Arial or sans-serif style.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install signs after doors and surfaces are finished, in locations scheduled.
3.3 SCHEDULES
A. Letters on building “Southern High School”
END OF SECTION
10 44 10-2 SIGNAGE GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 10 80 00 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Toilet and washroom accessories to be removed and re-installed.
B. Includes toilet partitions.
1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 06 11 40 - Wood Blocking and Curbing.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05 40 00 - Cold Formed Metal Framing.
B. Section 06 11 40 - Wood Blocking and Curbing.
C. Section 09 11 10 - Metal Stud Framing System.
D. Section 09 26 00 - Gypsum Board System.
E. Section 09 31 00 - Ceramic Tile: Ceramic accessories.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A117.1 - Safety Standards for the Handicapped.
B. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
C. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
D. ASTM A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service.
E. ASTM A366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality.
F. ASTM B456 - Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium.
G. NEMA LD-3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
GCPS Southern High School TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 80 00-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to ANSI A117.1 code for access for the handicapped.
1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on product data and instructed by the manufacturer.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 31 00.
B. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Bobrick. Existing items to be removed and re-installed. Replace damaged items as required.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A366.
B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304.
C. Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel.
D. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper-proof, and security type.
E. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate.
F. Toilet partition to match existing. Remove and re-install.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Weld and grind joints of fabricated components, smooth.
B. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain surfaces without scratches or dents.
C. Fabricate grab bars of tubing, free of visible joints, return to wall with end attachment flanges. Form bar with 1 1/2 inches clear of wall surface. Knurl grip surfaces.
D. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings.
10 80 00-2 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs E. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: ASTM A123 to 1.25 oz/sq yd. Galvanize ferrous metal and fastening devices.
B. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake.
C. Enamel: Pretreat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats electrostatic baked enamel.
D. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, Type SC 2 satin finish.
E. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin luster finish.
F. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01 31 00.
B. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings and instructed by the manufacturer.
C. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.
B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, ANSI A117.1, and MD Accessibility requirements.
B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
3.4 SCHEDULE (See drawings for locations).
1. Toilet Paper Dispenser Removed and re-installed 2. Grab Bars (Toilet): a. 36” Grab Bar Bobrick B-6806-36 (remove and re-install) b. 42” Grab Bar Bobrick B-6806-42 (remove and re-install) 3. Sanitary Napkin Disposal Bobrick B-270 (remove and re-install) 4. Toilet Partitions Remove and re-install
END OF SECTION
GCPS Southern High School TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 80 00-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs
DIVISION 11
EQUIPMENT
BUSHEY FEIGHT MORIN ARCHITECTS INC. 473 NORTH POTOMAC STREET HAGERSTOWN, MARYLAND 21740 301-733-5600 FAX: 301-733-5612
SECTION 11 66 00 - CLASSROOM CASEWORK
PART 1 ─ GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Existing classroom casework to be removed, stored and re-installed. B. Computer Classroom: Existing counters to eb removed and discarded. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06 11 40 - Wood Blocking and Curbing. B. Section 06 41 00 – Custom Casework. C. Section 09 26 00 – Gypsum Board Systems. D. Section 09 90 00 - Painting: Field painting of exposed metal frame. E. Division 26 - Electrical - Equipment Wiring Systems: Conduit and electrical power to equipment. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate equipment locations, large scale plans, elevations, cross sections, rough-in and anchor placement dimensions and tolerances, and clearances required. C. Product Data: Provide equipment dimensions and construction, equipment capacities, physical dimensions, utility and service requirements and locations, and point loads. D. Samples: Submit two samples of exposed finish surfaces, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating color and finish. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation requirements. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 73 00. B. Record actual locations of concealed utility connections. 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 73 00. B. Operation Data: Include description of equipment operation, adjusting and testing required.
GCPS Southern High School CLASSROOM CASEWORK 11 66 00-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs C. Maintenance Data: Identify system maintenance requirements, servicing cycles, lubrication types required and local spare part sources. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten (10) years documented experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for equipment. B. Conform to UL requirements for fabrication and installation of equipment. C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of installation. 1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section, under provisions of Section 01 31 00. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00. B. Leave building openings of sufficient size to permit transport of unit to final position. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 31 00. B. Coordinate equipment installation with size, location and installation of service utilities. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Provide three year warranty under provisions of Section 01 74 00.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Specified or Scheduled Manufacturers: 1. Stevens Laminate Casework – 1200 tradition - 3mm PVC full overlay; Teutopolis, IL 1-217-857-6411 B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. TMI Systems Design Corp. 2. LSI Corporation of America, Inc. 3. Cabinets by Design, Inc. 11 66 00-2 CLASSROOM CASEWORK GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00. 2.2 MATERIALS (LAMINATE CASEWORK) A. Core Material. 1. Cabinet components shall be industrial grade particleboard core material meeting ANSI A208.1 1993 standards as tested in accordance with ASTMD 1037-91A standards. 2. Medium density fiberboard (MDF) shall be used in all drawer components and shall be tested in accordance with ANSI A208.2 1994 standards. 3. Industrial hardboard shall be pre-finished 1/4" thickness composed of wood fibers, phenolic resin binders and moisture inhibitors that meet or exceed the hardboard product standard ANSI/AHA A135.4 1988. B. Surface Materials. 1. Exposed exteriors shall be high pressure decorative plastic laminate, thermoset to core using catalyzed PVA glue with a minimum average pressure of 90 PSI and average 180 degree F. temperature. High pressure decorative plastic laminate shall meet NEMA LD 3-1995, VGS.028 specification standards. 2. Exposed doors and drawer fronts shall be high pressure decorative plastic laminate, thermoset to core using catalyzed PVA glue with a minimum average pressure of 90 PSI and average 180 degree F. temperature. High pressure decorative plastic laminate shall meet NEMA LD 3-1995, VGS.028 specification standards. 3. Exposed interiors shall be permanently thermofused melamine laminate, fused to core using a minimum average pressure of 320 PSI and average 320 degree F. temperature. Thermofused melamine laminate shall be tested against the high pressure laminate NEMA LD 3-1995, VGS.028 specification standards. (Warranted for life against delamination.) 4. Semi-exposed and concealed surfaces shall be permanently thermofused melamine laminate or high pressure decorative plastic laminate cabinet liner, 0.020" thickness for balanced construction. Thermofused melamine laminate shall be tested against the high pressure laminate NEMA LD 3-1995, VGS.028 specification standards. 5. Exposed backs shall be permanently thermofused melamine laminate, fused to core using a minimum average pressure of 320 PSI and average 320 degree F. temperature. Thermofused melamine laminate shall be tested against the high pressure laminate NEMA LD 3-1995, VGS.028 specification standards. (Warranted for life against delamination.) C. Edgings. 1. Exposed exterior cabinet front edges shall be banded with a contrasting or matching Flat Edge rigid PVC extrusion, resistant to chip, crack and high impact for additional durability. Edging shall have a satin finish. Edgebanding shall be applied with hot melt adhesive. 2. Door and drawer front edges shall be edged with a contrasting or matching rigid PVC extrusion, 3MM (1/8") in thickness, resistant to chip, crack and high impact for additional durability. Edging shall have a satin finish. The 3MM thick edging shall be applied with hot melt adhesive and shaped to provide radiused edges and radiused corners. 3. Adjustable shelves shall be banded with PVC extrusion, resistant to chip, crack and high impact for additional durability. Edging shall have a satin finish. Edging shall be applied with hot melt adhesive. Flat Edge PVC edging shall be applied to four (4) edges of adjustable shelf.
GCPS Southern High School CLASSROOM CASEWORK 11 66 00-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs 4. All other interior components, including drawers, shall be banded with a Flat Edge PVC extrusion, resistant to chip, crack and high impact for additional durability. Edging shall have a satin finish. Edging to be machine applied with hot melt adhesive. D. Hardware. 1. Hinges shall be fully concealed from view when door is closed and shall permit 165 degree door swing. Hinge crank shall be heavy steel with a concealed, integral self-closing spring mechanism. Hinge boss shall be heavy stamp steel. Nylon inserts shall be provided in the door for positive screw attachment. Hinge attachment to sides of cabinet shall employ special 5MM threaded fasteners for additional strength. Hinges shall have three dimensional adjustment capability. Hinge shall have a lifetime guarantee warranted by the hinge manufacturer. Doors less than 48" in height shall have two (2) hinges each door; doors 48"-63" in height shall have three (3) hinges each door; all doors greater than 63" in height shall have four (4) hinges each door. 2. Door catches shall be heavy duty, spring loaded, large diameter (-11/16") roller type catch mounted at bottom edge. All doors over 48" in height shall be provided with roller catch at both top and bottom of door. 3. Catch strike plates shall be injection molded ABS, with an integral molded engagement ridge. Strike plate shall also provide a wide face bumper ensuring a positive door stop. 4. Pulls shall be from Stevens Advantage Artisans Collection Arch 128, 4" length, in matte nickel finish. 5. Drawers and slide out shelves shall be suspended with bottom mount, side and bottom attached nylon roller epoxy coated steel slides to ensure quiet, smooth operation. Lateral stability is achieved through a special formed captive profile. Slides shall have 100 lb. load rating, with both in and out drawer stop, 3" self-close feature and a side adjustment cam allowing 3MM side to side alignment. 6. Drawers specifically noted for full extension file use shall be suspended with bottom mount, side and bottom attached, nylon roller epoxy coated steel slides to ensure quiet, smooth operation. Lateral stability is achieved through a special formed captive profile. Slides shall have 150 lb. load rating, with both in and out drawer stop, and 3" self-close feature. File drawer shall include extruded top mounted molded side rails to accept standard hanging file folders. 7. Knee space, pencil drawers and keyboard trays shall be designed to permit under counter or support frame mounting, with 100 lb. nylon roller epoxy coated steel slides. 8. Hanger bars shall be heavy chrome plated tubing. Bars shall be securely affixed to cabinet shelves. 9. Tote trays shall be of high impact polystyrene with smooth edges. Each tray to include an identification card holder and shall be suspended from rails securely attached to cabinet verticals. 10. Shelf support clips shall be injection molded clear polycarbonate. Support clips shall incorporate integral molded lock tabs to retain shelf from tipping or inadvertently being lifted out. Support clip shall have 5MM diameter double pin engagement into precision bored hole pattern in cabinet vertical members. Clips shall have a molded ridge which provides pressure against edge of shelving to maintain positive pin engagement. Clip shall be designed in such a manner to provide means for permanent attachment to shelf. Static test load must exceed 200 lb. per clip. 11. Dividers that are 1/4" thick shall be fully adjustable and retained with injection molded clear polycarbonate clip.
11 66 00-4 CLASSROOM CASEWORK GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 12. Locks shall be cylinder type, die cast, with five (5) disc tumbler mechanism. Each lock shall be provided with milled brass key. Master-keying shall be available. Cabinets with multiple locks installed shall be keyed alike by room, with each cabinet keyed differently unless otherwise specified. Locks shall be Remov-A-Core to give flexibility for different pass key options. Locks shall be provided where indicated on drawings. 13. Teacher wardrobe mirrors shall be 1/8" (3.2MM) thick acrylic shatter resistant mirror. E. Work Surfaces. 1. Plastic laminate countertops shall be surfaced with general purpose .050” thick plastic laminate meeting NEMA spec. LD3-1985. Countertop cores shall be 1-1/8" full thickness 45 lb. density industrial grade particle board. Exposed edges shall be covered with same laminate as top surface. Tops shall include backing sheet on underside. 2. Backsplashes and endsplashes shall be provided as indicated on drawings and shall be surfaced with same laminate as top.
F. Color Selections. 1. Exposed cabinet exteriors shall be chosen from high pressure decorative plastic laminate selections as described in casework manufacturer’s color selector guide. 2. Exposed doors and drawer fronts shall be chosen from high pressure decorative plastic laminate selections as described in casework manufacturer’s color selector guide. 3. Semi-exposed and concealed surfaces, including drawer box components, shall be finished in either pearl or grey, as selected from casework manufacturer’s standard interior color selections. 4. Exposed interior components, including both faces of shelves and interior face of backs to be as selected from casework manufacturer. 5. Door and drawer front edges shall be chosen from 3MM thick PVC in contrasting or matching colors as described in manufacturer's color guide. 6. Exposed front edges of cabinets, including exposed interior edges in Flat Edge PVC in contrasting or matching colors as described in manufacturer's color guide, or commercial match to selected exposed exterior color, based on availability. 7. Semi-exposed edges of cabinet components, including drawers, shall be standard interior color selections. 8. Five knuckle hinges shall be available with black, pearl or chrome epoxy finish. 9. Solid metal bent wire pulls shall be available in chrome or brass finish; and injection molded pulls in either bent wire or contour design to be available in twenty (20) colors as selected from manufacturer's color selector. 10. Casework of substitute brands with lesser amounts or more restrictive selection requirements will not be considered equal and shall be rejected. 11. Finishes to be laminate manufacturer’s matte, suede or equivalent finish as approved by architect. Samples will be reviewed by architect for color, texture and pattern only.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify equipment rough-in under provisions of Section 01 31 00. B. Verify that rough-in frames, anchors and supports are accurately placed.
GCPS Southern High School CLASSROOM CASEWORK 11 66 00-5 Façade Renovations & Repairs 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide rough-in frame and anchors for placement. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with standards required by authority having jurisdiction. C. Anchor equipment securely in place. D. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. E. Touch-up minor damaged surfaces caused during installation. Replace damaged components as directed by Architect/Engineer. 3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Prepare and start equipment under provisions of Section 01 40 00. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 73 00. B. Adjust operating equipment to efficient operation. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Section 01 73 00. B. Demonstrate equipment operation and maintenance. 3.7 SCHEDULES A. General: All existing cabinets along exterior wall shall be removed intact, if cabinets/casework is damaged, replace with like material. B. Contractor shall coordinate actual elevations of cabinets and styles as shown. Contractor shall provide all fillers at all openings, finished end panels as required, fascia and aprons. Height indicated is nominal including counter for base cabinets.
END OF SECTION
11 66 00-6 CLASSROOM CASEWORK GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
DIVISION 12
FURNISHINGS
BUSHEY FEIGHT MORIN ARCHITECTS INC. 473 NORTH POTOMAC STREET HAGERSTOWN, MARYLAND 21740 301-733-5600 FAX: 301-733-5612
SECTION 12 49 80 - ROLLER SHADES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Shade Type 3 (WT-3): Manually operated chain drive interior roller-screen solar shades.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 40 00 – Cold Formed Metal Framing. 2. Section 06 11 40- Wood Blocking and Curbing: Blocking for support of window shade brackets or pocket assemblies. 3. Section 08 52 00 - Aluminum Windows: Substrate for window shade systems. 4. Section 09 26 00 - Gypsum Board Systems: Substrate for window shade systems. 5. Section 09 51 10 - Acoustical Panel Ceilings: Substrate for window shade systems. 6. Division 26 - Electric service for EDU’s, and EDU controls, internal communication, low voltage wiring and data transfer, and connection to the internet and require.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire: Provide shade fabrics tested in accordance with: 1. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Passes NFPA 701-99 small and large- scale vertical burn. Materials tested shall be identical to products proposed for use.
B. Toxicity: Provide shade fabrics tested in accordance with University of Pittsburgh Toxicity Protocol including LC50 analysis and toxicity characteristics.
C. Anti-microbial: 1. ASTM G-22-80 results for ATCC6538 ( Staphylocaoccus aureus ) and ATCC13388 ( Psuedomonas aeroginosa ) indicating minimum 5mm (0.197 inches) ‘No Growth Contact Area’. 2. ASTM G-21-85 results for ATCC9642, ATCC9644, ATCC9348 and ATCC9645 indicating ‘No Growth’.
D. Electrical Components: NFPA Article 100 listed and labeled by either UL or ETL or other testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, marked for intended use, and tested as a system. Individual testing of components will not be acceptable in lieu of system testing. Where applicable, system components shall be FCC compliant.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s product data sheets, performance data, and installation instructions for each item required per section 01 33 00 shall include typical wiring diagrams including integration of EDU controllers with building management system, audiovisual and lighting control systems as applicable.
GCPS Southern High School ROLLER SHADES 12 49 80-1 Front Façade Renovation B. Shop Drawings: 1. Interior Elevations scale min indicating shade layout, seam / batten locations and coordination with surrounding conditions. 2. Floor plans or reflected ceiling plans showing overall arrangement of shades and control locations. 3. Head, Jamb and sill details as necessary to coordinate work with surrounding conditions and construction. 4. Shade schedule coordinating room number, window type, opening size(s), quantities and key to details. 5. Prepare control wiring diagrams based on switching and operational requirements. 6. Include one-line diagrams, wire counts, coverage patterns, and physical dimensions of each item.
C. Samples: 1. Selection samples: a. 3” X 5” shade cloth fabric swatches for initial fabric color selection from manufacturer’s full range of available fabrics. b. Standard aluminum finish color samples from manufacturer’s range of standard colors. 2. Verification samples: a. One fully operational window shade sample of each type required 30” X 30” complete with selected shade cloth including sample of seam / batten when applicable. Disassemble sample to demonstrating compliance with PART 2. b. One complete set of all shade components, unassembled, demonstrating compliance with PART 2.
D. Design Data, Test Reports, and Certificates: Current reports from independent testing laboratories demonstrating compliance with article 1.2.
E. Manufacturers’ Instructions: Manufacturer’s standard installation instructions.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: 20 years minimum experience manufacturing products comparable to those specified in this section. 2. Installer: 10 years minimum experience installing products comparable to those specified in this section. Shall be trained and certified by the manufacturer.
B. Do not fabricate shades without obtaining field dimensions for each opening. Coordinate construction of surrounding conditions to allow for timely field dimension verification.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Protection: 1. Do not deliver items to the project until all concrete, masonry, plaster, painting and other wet work has been completed and is dry. 2. Deliver shades to project in labeled protective packaging. Uniquely labeled to identify each shade for each opening. Schedule delivery to prevent delays to completion of work but to minimize on site storage time. 3. Store materials in a dry secure place. Protect from weather, surface contaminants, corrosion, construction traffic and all other potential damage.
12 49 80-2 ROLLER SHADES GCPS Southern High School Front Façade Renovation 1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: 1. Manual Operating Components: Provide Manufacturer’s warranty under provisions of Section 01 74 00. Warranty period to be warranted from Date of Substantial Completion and contain provisions that installation is to remain operational without fault for the full warranty period and include all operating parts, including shade cloth, except for the bead chain which is not covered by the warranty and is deemed to be a maintenance / service item. a. b. Manual Hardware: 10 years 2. Installation: Provide Contractor’s warranty under provisions of Section 01 74 00 that installation shall be free from defects for a period of not less than 1 year. 3. In the event of a warranted product failure, the Shade Contractor will, at no cost to Owner, facilitate acquisition, deliver, and install of all necessary components.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Basis of Design - MechoShade Systems, Inc., Long Island City, NY., USA, Phone: 718-729-2020, Fax: 718-729-2941. 1. Alternate products complying with the performance criteria detailed in Section 2.2. must be an equal product as determined by the Owner and Architect.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Roller Shade Schedule: 1. Shade Type WT-3: Manually operated interior roller-screen solar shades in exterior window openings or interior corridor borrowed lites. a. Shade pockets. b. Fascias.
B. Bid Requirements for Roller Shade Installer/Contractor: 1. Roller Shade Hardware, shade fabric, and all related controls shall be furnished and installed as a complete assembly. Roller Shade Installer/Contractor shall list all components included in their bid.
2.3 SHADE CLOTH
A. Visually Transparent Single-Fabric Shadecloth: MechoShade Systems, Inc., ThermoVeil group, single thickness non-raveling 0.030-inch thick vinyl fabric, woven from 0.018-inch diameter extruded vinyl yarn comprising of 21 percent polyester and 79 percent reinforced vinyl, in colors selected from manufacturer's available range. 1. Dense "3000 Series" visually translucent, twill-weave pattern all at 2 percent open. 2. Color: Selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
GCPS Southern Middle School ROLLER SHADES 12 49 80-3 Security Vestibule & Gen. Office Addition 2.4 SHADE BAND A. Shade Bands: Construction of shade band includes the fabric, the enclosed hem weight, shade roller tube, and the attachment of the shade band to the roller tube. Sewn hems and open hem pockets are not acceptable. 1. Concealed Hembar: Shall be continuous extruded aluminum for entire width of shade band and with the following characteristics: a. Hembar shall be heat sealed on all sides. b. Open ends shall not be accepted. 2. Shade band and Shade Roller Attachment: a. Use extruded aluminum shade roller tube of a diameter and wall thickness required to support shade fabric without excessive deflection. b. Provide for positive mechanical attachment of shade band to roller tube; shade band shall be made removable / replaceable with a "snap- on" snap-off" Spline mounting, without having to remove shade roller from shade brackets. c. Mounting Spline shall not require use of adhesives, adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets. d. Any method of attaching shade band to roller tube that requires the use of adhesive, adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets, does not meet the performance requirements of this specification and shall not be accepted.
2.5 SHADE FABRICATION A. Fabricate shadecloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion. Fabricate with heat-sealed trimmed edges to hang straight without curling or raveling. Fabricate unguided shadecloth to roll true and straight without shifting sideways more than 1/8 inch (3.18 mm) in either direction per 8 feet (2438 mm) of shade height due to warp distortion or weave design. Fabricate hem as follows: 1. Bottom hem weights
B. For railroaded shadebands, provide seams in railroaded multi-width shadebands as required to meet size requirements and in accordance with seam alignment as acceptable to Architect. Seams shall be properly located. Furnish battens in place of plain seams when the width, height, or weight of the shade exceeds manufacturer's standards. In absence of such standards, assure proper use of seams or battens as required to, and assure the proper tracking of the railroaded multi-width shadebands.
2.6 COMPONENTS
A. Access and Material Requirements: 1. Provide shade hardware allowing for the removal of shade roller tube from brackets without removing hardware from opening and without requiring end or center supports to be removed. 2. Provide shade hardware that allows for removal and re-mounting of the shade bands without having to remove the shade tube, drive or operating support brackets. 3. Use only Delrin engineered plastics by DuPont for all plastic components of shade hardware. Styrene based plastics, and /or polyester, or reinforced polyester shall not be accepted.
12 49 80-4 ROLLER SHADES GCPS Southern High School Front Façade Renovation B. Manually Operated Hardware and Shade Brackets: 1. Provide for regular and offset drive capacity (chain fall at front or rear of bracket) on all shade drive end brackets. 2. Provide shade hardware system that allows for removal of shade roller tube from brackets without removing hardware from opening. 3. Provide shade hardware that allows for removal and re-mounting of the shade band without having to remove shade tube, drive or operating support brackets. 4. Provide hardware for installation of a removable fascia, regular or reverse roll, which shall be installed without exposed fastening devices of any kind. 5. Provide shade hardware system that allows for a removable regular and / or reverse roll fascia(s) to be mounted continuously across two or more shade bands without requiring exposed fasteners of any kind; 6. Provide shade hardware system that allows for operation of multiple shadebands by a single chain (Multi-banded shades) operator subject to manufacturer’s design criteria. Connectors shall be offset to assure alignment from the first to the last shade band. 7. Provide shade hardware system that allows multi-banded manually operated shades to be capable of smooth operation when the axis is offset a maximum of 6 ° on each side of the plane perpendicular to the radial line of the curve (12 ° total offset). 8. Provide positive mechanical engagement of drive mechanism to shade roller tube. Friction fit connections for drive mechanism to shade roller tube shall not be accepted. 9. Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8” (3.18 mm) thick cadmium plated steel or heavier as required to support 150% of the full weight of each shade. 10. Provide only Delrin engineered plastics by DuPont for all plastic components of the shade hardware. Styrene polyester and ABS based plastics are not acceptable. 11. Drive Bracket/Brake Assembly: a. MechoShade Drive Bracket model 5 shall be fully integrated with all MechoShade Wide accessories and brackets, including but not limited to Fascia, Black Out channels center supports and connectors for multi-band shade operation etc. b. M5 bracket shall use the standard 1/8 inch (3.175mm) steel plate for mounting and support of the assembly. The drive sprocket and brake assembly shall rotate and be supported on a welded 3/8 inch steel pin (9.525mm). c. The brake means shall be an over running clutch design which shall disengage to 90% during the raising and lowering of a shade. The brake shall with stand a pull force of 50 lbs. (22kg) in the stopped position. d. The braking (patent pending) means shall be applied to a oil impregnated hub on to which the brake system is mounted. The oil impregnated hub design includes an articulated brake assembly which assures smooth, non-jerky operation in raising and lowering the shades. The brake assembly is warranted for the life of the system, which is in itself warranted to be fit for the use intended. e. The entire MechoShade 5 assembly shall be fully mounted on the steel support bracket, and fully independent of the shade tube assembly, which may be removed and reinstalled without effecting the roller shade limit adjustments. f. Drive Chain: #10 Qualified stainless steel chain rated to 90 pound (41 kg) minimum breaking through.
GCPS Southern Middle School ROLLER SHADES 12 49 80-5 Security Vestibule & Gen. Office Addition 2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Fascia: 1. Continuous removable extruded aluminum fascia that attaches to shade mounting brackets without the use of adhesives, magnetic strips, or exposed fasteners. 2. Fascia shall be able to be installed across two or more shade bands in one piece. 3. Fascia shall fully conceal brackets, shade roller and fabric on the tube. 4. Provide bracket / fascia end caps where mounting conditions expose outside of roller shade brackets.
B. Shade Pockets: 1. Provide extruded aluminum shade pocket with exposed flush mounted extruded aluminum removable closure panel to provide access to shades and an exposed flush mounted tile support for acoustical tile or dry wall soffits and ceilings. 2. Provide extruded aluminum shade pocket with exposed flush mounted extruded aluminum removable closure panel to provide access to shades. 3. Provide extruded aluminum pocket closure assembly(ies) for use with drywall or other framed shade pocket construction as shown in the drawings. Closure panel shall be 2” wide or 3” wide or 5” wide or custom width as indicated in the drawings.
C. Room Darkening Side and Sill Channels: 1. Extruded aluminum with polybond edge seals and SnapLoc-mounting brackets and with concealed fastening. Exposed fasting is not acceptable. Channels shall accept one-piece exposed blackout hembar with vinyl seal to assure side light control and sill light control. a. MechoSystems side channels, 1-15/16 inches wide by 1-3/16 inches deep, two-band center channels, 2-5/8 inches wide by 1-3/16 inches deep. The 2-5/8-inch double-center channels may be installed at center-support positions of multi-band-shade ElectroShades. MechoSystems side channels 2-5/8 inch may be used as center supports for ElectroShades; shade bands up to 8 high. For shade bands over 8 feet, provide ElectroShade side channels. b. ElectroShade side channels, 2-1/2 inches wide by 1-3/16 inches deep; two-band center channels 5 inches wide by 1-3/16 inches deep. The 2-5/8-inch double-center channels may be installed at center-support positions of multi-band-shade ElectroShades. MechoSystems side channels 2-5/8 inches may be used as center supports for ElectroShades. Also provide for use with manually operated room darkening MechoSystems’s over 8 feet in height. c. Color: Selected from manufacturer’s standard colors or custom color as selected by Architect.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrate and conditions for installation. Do not commence installation until conditions are satisfactory. Commencement of installation indicates acceptance of site conditions by Contractor. Notify the Architect upon inspection
12 49 80-6 ROLLER SHADES GCPS Southern High School Front Façade Renovation when the project conditions are unacceptable for shade installation. "Beginning of installation" means acceptance of substrate and project conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install units to comply with the Manufacturer's instructions for the type of mounting and operation required. Provide units plumb, true, and securely anchored in place with recommended hardware and accessories to provide smooth operation without binding.
B. Install units within the following tolerances: 1. Maximum variation of gap at window opening perimeter: 1/4 inch, per 8 feet (+/- 1/8 inch) of shade height. 2. Maximum offset from level: 1/16 inch per 5 feet of shade width.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust drive / brake mechanism of units for smooth operation. Adjust shade and shadecloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion. Replace any units or components which do not hang properly or operate smoothly.
B. Installer shall set Upper, Lower and up to 3 intermediate stop positions of all motorized shade bands and assure alignment in accordance with the above requirements.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Touch up damaged finishes and repair minor damage in order to eliminate evidence of repair. Remove and replace work that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
B. Clean exposed surfaces, including metal and shadecloth, using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by the Shadecloth Manufacturer. Remove and replace work which cannot be satisfactorily cleaned.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate operation method and instruct Owner's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the window shade systems.
3.6 SCHEDULES
A. Refer to Drawings.
C. (WT-3) Exterior Windows at Classrooms, Offices, etc. for new or existing windows.
END OF SECTION
GCPS Southern Middle School ROLLER SHADES 12 49 80-7 Security Vestibule & Gen. Office Addition SECTION 12 51 20 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Horizontal slat louver blinds.
B. Operating hardware.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06 11 40 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wall opening head support blocking.
B. Section 08 11 00 - Steel Doors and Frames.
C. Section 08 41 00 - Aluminum Framed Storefront.
D. Section 08 52 00 - Aluminum Windows.
E. Section 09 26 00 - Gypsum Board Systems.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. FS AA-V-00200 - Venetian Blinds.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Horizontal metal slat louver blinds installed at window openings, manual control of raising and lowering by cord blade angle adjustable by control wand.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Submit shop drawings indicating opening sizes, tolerances required, installation of blind at window opening, method of attachment, clearances, and operation.
C. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
D. Submit product data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics, and operating features.
E. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
F. Submit two samples 18 inch long illustrating slat materials and finish, color, cord rod type and color.
G. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with ten (10) years documented experience.
GCPS Southern High School HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12 51 20-1 Façade Renovations & Repairs 1.7 FIELD SAMPLES
A. Provide samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Construct a field sample panel, one window unit, as selected illustrating complete blind assembly with operable hardware and accessories.
C. Provide field sample after submitted shop drawings are approved.
D. Locate where directed.
E. If accepted, field sample will demonstrate minimum standard for the Work. Field sample may remain as part of the Work.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
B. Deliver blinds wrapped and crated in a manner to prevent damage to components or marring of surfaces.
C. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
D. Store in a clean, dry area, laid flat and blocked off ground to prevent sagging, twisting, or warping.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish two additional complete blind assemblies of each size per Section 01 73 00.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Hunter Douglas – Modern Precious Metal – 2” slat width.
B. Levolor Model Riviera – 2” slat width.
C. Bali
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Louver Slats: Two inch wide; .009 inch thick spring tempered prefinished aluminum horizontal slats, with manufacturing burrs removed; radiused slat corners and with thermostop.
B. Slat Support: Woven polypropylene, ladder configuration.
C. Head Rail Housing: Prefinished, formed steel box, internally fitted with hardware, pulleys and bearings for blind operation.
D. Cord: Braided polypropylene, continuous loop, looped through wall mounted spring tensioned pulley.
12 51 20-2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS GCPS Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs E. Control Wand: Square shape, non-removable type, length of window opening height less 12 inches.
F. Accessory Hardware: Type recommended by blind manufacturer.
2.3 FACTORY FINISHING
A. Blind Slat and Head Rail Housing: color as selected with same color on both sides of slat.
B. Cord and Control Wand: color as selected.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that openings are ready to receive the work.
B. Do not commence fabrication until field measurements are confirmed.
C. Ensure structural supports are correctly placed.
D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Secure in place with concealed fasteners.
3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 1/4 inch.
B. Maximum Offset from Level: 1/8 inch.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 73 00.
B. Adjust blinds for smooth operation.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean work under provisions of 01 73 00.
3.6 SCHEDULE
A. Provide at all exterior windows where windows are replaced, new windows are installed.
END OF SECTION
GCPS Southern High School HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12 51 20-3 Façade Renovations & Repairs DIVISION 31
EARTHWORK
BUSHEY FEIGHT MORIN ARCHITECTS INC. 473 NORTH POTOMAC STREET HAGERSTOWN, MARYLAND 21740 301-733-5600 FAX: 301-733-5612
SECTION 31 10 00 – SITE CLEARING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Remove surface debris within the property.
B. Remove designated paving, curbs, and sidewalk.
C. Clear site of vegetation and grass.
D. Remove trees and shrubs.
E. Remove root system of trees and shrubs.
F. Topsoil excavation.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 02 41 10 - Site Demolition
B. Section 31 22 13 - Rough Grading
1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for disposal of debris, and use of herbicides
B. Coordinate clearing Work with utility companies.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. LEED Submittals 1. Product data for Credit MR 5: For on-site reclaimed concrete, documentation indicating the replacement cost if the reclaimed concrete had been virgin material.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
(Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Verify that existing vegetation designated to remain, is tagged or identified.
GCPS: Southern High School SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 1 Façade Renovations & Repairs 3.2 PROTECTION
A. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain, from damage.
B. Protect trees, shrubs, and features designated to remain, as final landscaping.
C. Protect bench marks and property corners and existing structures from damage or displacement.
3.3 CLEARING
A. Clear areas required for access to site and execution of Work.
B. Remove paving, curbs, and sidewalks as indicated on the plans and as necessary to complete the project.
C. Remove trees and shrubs within marked areas indicated or as necessary for construction. Remove stumps or main root mass.
D. Clear undergrowth and deadwood, without disturbing subsoil.
3.4 REMOVAL
A. Remove debris, rock, and extracted vegetation from site.
3.5 TOPSOIL EXCAVATION
A. Excavate topsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded.
B. Stockpile in area designated on site to depth not exceeding 10 feet. Protect from erosion.
C. Do not excavate wet topsoil.
END OF SECTION
31 10 00-2 SITE CLEARING GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
SECTION 31 22 13 – ROUGH GRADING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Removal of topsoil and subsoil.
B. Cutting, grading, filling and rough contouring the site.
C. Crushing on-site concrete
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 30 00 - Submittals
B. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements
C. Section 01 73 00 - Closeout Submittals
D. Section 02 41 10 – Site Demolition
E. Section 31 10 00 - Site Clearing
F. Section 31 23 16 – Excavation
G. Section 31 23 16.13 – Trenching
H. Section 31 23 23.23 – Backfilling
I. Section 31 25 00 – Sediment and Erosion Control
J. Section 31 50 00 - Excavation Support
K. Section 32 92 19 – Seeding
L. Section 33 46 00 – Subdrainage
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM D-698 - Testing for Maximum Dry Density.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00
B. Samples: Submit 40-50 lb. sample of each type of fill to testing laboratory, in air-tight containers at least fourteen (14) days prior to start of construction.
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 78 00.
GCPS: Southern High School ROUGH GRADING 31 22 13 - 1 Façade Renovations & Repairs B. Accurately record actual locations of utilities remaining, by horizontal dimensions, elevations or inverts, and slope gradients.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Topsoil: Excavated material, graded, free of roots, rocks larger than 1 inch, subsoil, debris, and large weed.
B. Screened Topsoil: Excavated or imported material that has been processed to remove roots, rocks, debris and other deleterious material larger than 2 inch.
C. Subsoil: Excavated material, graded, free of lumps larger than 6 inches, rocks larger than 3 inches, and debris.
D. Granular Fill: specified in Section 31 23 23.23.
E. Structural Fill: Fill required to attain design grades should be placed as controlled, compacted fill. Satisfactory fill includes approved on-site excavated materials, off-site borrow material (residual soils, soil/rock mixtures, and soft weathered rock), or well- graded commercial stone such as MDOT GA base aggregate. The fill should be free of trash, wood, coal, topsoil, organics, pyritic material with greater than 0.5 percent by weight of pyritic sulfur, frozen material, and pieces of rock greater than 4 inches in any dimension. Materials classified as MH, CH, OH, OL and Pt based on the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS) are not considered suitable for use as new fill. All fill should be tested and approved prior to placement and compaction.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions.
B. Verify that survey benchmark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.
B. Identify known underground, above ground, and aerial utilities. Stake and flag locations.
C. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities.
D. Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain.
E. Protect plant life, lawns, rock outcropping and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping.
F. Protect bench marks, property corners, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavation equipment and vehicular traffic.
31 22 13-2 ROUGH GRADING GCPS: Souther High School Façade Renovations & Repairs G. Utility notification shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to assure themselves that no hazard exists or damage will occur to utilities. It is required that the Contractor contact "Miss Utility", 72 hours prior to the start of site work at 1-800-257-7777.
H. Before initiating fill placement, the subgrade surface should be proof-rolled with appropriate rubber-tired construction equipment and/or visually evaluated to locate any soft spots or areas of excessive "pumping." Any such areas should be over-excavated to a firm subgrade and replaced with new controlled fill material.
3.3 SUBSOIL EXCAVATION
A. Excavate subsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded.
B. Stockpile in area designated on site. Remove excess sub-soil not being reused, from site at no expense to the Owner.
C. Do not excavate wet subsoil.
D. When excavation through roots is necessary, perform work by hand and cut roots with sharp axe.
3.4 FILLING
A. Fill areas to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials.
B. Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in continuous layers not exceeding 9 inch loose lifts when compacted by heavy compaction requirement and maximum 4 inch loose lifts when compacted by hand-operated tampers or light compaction equipment, compacted to 100 percent of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D-698.
C. Subsoil and Topsoil Fill: Place and compact material in continuous layers not exceeding 10 inch loose lifts when compacted by heavy compaction requirement and maximum 4 inch loose lifts when compacted by hand-operated tampers or light compaction equipment, compacted to 100 percent of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D-698.
D. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to within ± 2% of the optimum moisture content to attain required compaction density.
E. Slope grade away from building minimum 1 inch in 1 ft, for 12 foot distance unless noted otherwise.
F. Make grade changes gradual. Blend slope into level areas.
G. Remove surplus fill materials from site at no expense to Owner.
H. During placement, moisten or aerate each layer of fill, as necessary, to obtain the required compaction. Fill should not be placed on surfaces that are muddy or frozen or have not been approved by prior testing and/or proof-rolling. Free water should be prevented from appearing on the surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. Fill placed on sloping areas should be properly benched or “notched” into the slope face such that a smooth transition between the new fill and existing slope face is not present.
GCPS: Southern High School ROUGH GRADING 31 22 13 - 3 Façade Renovations & Repairs I. Soil material which is removed because it is too wet to permit proper compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Drying can be facilitated by discing, harrowing, or by pulverizing until the moisture content is reduced to an acceptable level. When the soil is too dry, water may be uniformly applied to the subgrade surface or to the layer to be compacted.
J. Fill material compacted by heavy compaction equipment should be placed in loose layers having a 9-inch maximum thickness. Fill compacted with lightweight equipment, such as hand-operated tampers or walk-behind rollers, should be placed in loose layers not exceeding 4 inches in thickness. The compaction equipment utilized should be suitable for the type of material being compacted. Vibratory rollers are best suited to coarse- grained soils, while pad (often called sheepsfoot) rollers are appropriate for finegrained materials.
K. All new fill placed within the structure footprints, top one (1) foot of new pavement subgrade, controlled fill slopes and extending at least five (5) feet beyond their perimeters should be compacted to at least 98 percent of the laboratory maximum dry density as determined by the Standard Proctor method (ASTM D 698). Fill placed outside of these areas should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by the same standard. The placement moisture content of all fill should be within ±3 percentage points of the optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D 698. Granular materials, such as clean sand or aggregate, should be compacted to 85 percent of its relative density, as determined by ASTM D 4253 and D 4254 test methods.
3.5 TOLERANCES
A. Top Surface of Subgrade: Plus or minus 1/10 foot.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and analysis of fill material will be performed in accordance with standard Proctor Moisture - Density Relationship Test and with Section 01400.
B. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D1556 with Section 01 40 00.
C. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner.
D. Frequency of Tests: as specified in Section 31 23 16 – Excavation and Section 31 23 23.23 - Backfilling
END OF SECTION
31 22 13-4 ROUGH GRADING GCPS: Souther High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
SECTION 31 23 17 - TRENCHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Excavate trenches for utilities as indicated on the plans from building to municipal utilities.
B. Compacted bedding under fill over utilities to subgrade elevations.
C. Backfilling and compaction requirements.
D. Compliance with utility specifications.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 30 00 - Submittals
B. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements
C. Section 01 45 16 – Field Quality Control Procedures
D. Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals
E. Section 31 25 00 – Sediment and Erosion Control
F. Section 31 50 00 - Excavation Support
G. Section 32 92 19 – Seeding
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM C136 - Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
B. ANSI/ASTM D1556 - Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method.
C. ANSI/ASTM D 698 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provision of Section 01 30 00.
B. Samples: Submit 40-50 lb sample of each type of fill to testing laboratory, in air-tight containers at least fourteen (14) days prior to the start of construction.
1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that survey benchmark and intended elevations for the Work are as shown on Drawings.
GCPS: Southern High School TRENCHING 31 23 17 - 1 Façade Renovations & Repairs 1.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheet piling, underpinning, or other methods required to prevent cave-in or loose soil from falling into excavation.
B. Underpin adjacent structures which may be damaged by excavation work, including service utilities and pipe chases.
C. Notify Architect/Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue work in affected area until notification to resume work.
D. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundations from frost.
E. Grade excavation top perimeter to prevent surface water run-off into excavation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATION
A. All excavation required shall be UNCLASSIFIED as defined in Section 31 23 16 – Excavation.
2.2 FILL MATERIALS
A. Types A, B, C, Subsoil and Concrete materials as specified in Section 31 23 16 – Excavation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify fill materials to be reused, is acceptable.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Identify required lines, levels, contours and datum.
B. Maintain and protect existing utilities remaining, which pass through work area.
C. Protect plant life, lawns, and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping.
D. Protect benchmarks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavation equipment and vehicular traffic.
E. Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain.
F. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of insitu compaction in their natural and present state. Backfill with Type C fill as specified in Section 31 23 16 and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent backfill material.
3.3 EXCAVATION
A. Excavate subsoil required for utility piping to municipal utilities requirements or as detailed. 31 23 17 - 2 TRENCHING GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
B. Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable installation of utilities and allow inspection. Minimum clearance shall be 6 inches on each side of pipe or conduit.
C. Excavation shall not interfere with normal 30 degree bearing splay of foundations.
D. Hand trim excavation. Hand trim for bell and spigot pipe joints, if required. Remove loose matter.
E. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 1/3 cu yd, measured by volume.
F. Correct unauthorized excavation at no cost to Owner.
G. Correct areas over-excavated by error in accordance with Section 01 23- 16 at no additional cost to the Owner.
H. Stockpile excavated material in area designated on site and remove excess material not being re-used from site at no expense to the Owner.
3.4 BEDDING
A. Support pipe or conduit during placement and compaction of bedding fill.
3.5 BACKFILLING
A. Backfill trenches to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials.
B. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces.
C. Bedding Fill: Place and compact materials in continuous layers not exceeding 4 inches loose lifts when compacted by hand-operated or light compaction equipment.
D. Approved Subsoil Fill: Place and compact material in continuous layers not exceeding 4 inches loose lifts when compacted by hand-operated or light compaction equipment.
E. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage foundation perimeter drainage or conduit in trench.
F. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density.
G. Remove surplus backfill materials from site at no additional cost to Owner.
H. Leave fill material stockpile areas completely free of excess fill materials.
3.6 TOLERANCES
A. Top Surface of Backfilling: Under Paved Areas Plus or minus one inch from required elevations.
B. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus one inch from required elevations.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01 45 16.
GCPS: Southern High School TRENCHING 31 23 17 - 3 Façade Renovations & Repairs B. Tests and analysis of fill material will be performed in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D2487 and with Section 01400.
C. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D1556 and ANSI/ASTM D1557 and Section 01400.
D. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner.
E. Frequency of Tests: Minimum one (1) test every 25 lineal feet of trench, each layer, or as may be determined by Owner.
3.8 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 71 33 -Protection of Adjacent Construction.
B. Recompact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.
3.9 SCHEDULE
A. Water, Gas, and Sanitary Piping: 1. Bedding Fill: Type B (Structural Fill) or as required by the local authority’s Construction Specifications and all addenda, compacted to 95 percent. Minimum depth 6 inches above top of pipe. 2. Cover with Type B (Structural Fill), in 8 inch lifts, compacted to 100 percent.
B. Power Ducts 1. Bedding fill of Type C (Select Fill), in 8 inch lifts, compacted to 100 percent. 2. Remaining fill of Type C (Select Fill), to subgrade elevation, compacted to 100 percent.
C. Storm Drain 1. Wherever rock is encountered, it shall be removed and replaced with a minimum 8 in. (200 mm) of select backfill to provide a constant cushion under the pipe or bell. When unsuitable foundation material is encountered, it shall be removed and replaced with selected backfill for the full width of the trench, as directed by the Engineer. 2. Culverts 48 in. (1220 mm) or more in nominal horizontal diameter shall be bedded in an approved foundation shaped by means of a template which will support the pipe for at least 10 percent of its overall height.
D. General Utility Information 1. All underground utility trenches shall be backfilled as specified and shall have a warning tape at depth as detailed or as by the Owner. 2. All plastic underground utilities shall in addition have a detection wire installed at trench depth indicated or as directed by the Owner.
END OF SECTION
31 23 17 - 4 TRENCHING GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
SECTION 31 23 23.23 - BACKFILLING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Building perimeter and site structure backfilling subgrade elevations.
B. Site filling and backfilling.
C. Fill under slabs-on-grade and paving.
D. Consolidation and compaction.
E. Fill for over-excavation.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 22 11 - Unit Prices
B. Section 01 30 00 - Submittals
C. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements
D. Section 31 22 13 – Rough Grading
E. Section 31 23 16 – Excavation
F. Section 31 23 16.13 – Trenching
G. Section 31 25 00 – Sediment and Erosion Control
H. Section 31 50 00 - Excavation Support
I. Section 32 12 16.16 - Hot Mix Asphalt
J. Section 32 13 13 - Cement Concrete Paving
K. Section 32 92 19 – Seeding
L. Section 33 31 13 - Sanitary
M. Section 33 40 00 - Storm
N. Section 33 46 00 – Subdrainage
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM C136 - Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
B. ANSI/ASTM D698 - Test Methods for Moisture - Density Relations of Soils and Soil - Aggregate Mixtures.
GCPS: Southern High School BACKFILLING 31 23 23.23 - 1 Façade Renovations & Repairs C. ANSI/ASTM D1556 - Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00 - Submittals
B. Samples: Submit 40 lb. dry density sample of each type of fill to testing laboratory, in air-tight containers at least fourteen (14) days prior to the start of construction.
C. Source of Origin: Submit source of origin for all tested samples.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FILL MATERIALS
A. Type A - Coarse Stone: No. 57 Stone Angular, washed natural stone; free of shale, clay, friable material, sand, debris; graded in accordance with ANSI/ASTM C136 within the following limits: Sieve Size Percent Passing 1 2 inch 100 1 inch 95 to 100 2 inch 25 to 60 No. 4 0 to 10
B. Type B - Structural Fill: Suitable materials as outlined in the Geotechnical Report.
C. Type C - Select Fill: MDOT Graded Aggregate Base or CR-6 per details.
D. Subsoil: Reused, Imported, free of gravel larger than 3-inch size, and debris.
E. Fill required to attain design grades should be placed as controlled, compacted fill. Satisfactory fill includes approved on-site excavated materials, off-site borrow material (residual soils, soil/rock mixtures, and soft weathered rock), or well-graded commercial stone such as MDOT GA base aggregate. The fill should be free of trash, wood, coal, topsoil, organics, pyritic material with greater than 0.5 percent by weight of pyritic sulfur, frozen material, and pieces of rock greater than 4 inches in any dimension. Materials classified as MH, CH, OH, OL and Pt based on the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS) are not considered suitable for use as new fill. All fill should be tested and approved prior to placement and compaction.
F. Reclaimed concrete stored on-site and asphalt removed from site during grading operations can be used for fill but may need to be manipulated as per recommendations in the geotechnical report. The following restrictions are to be observed: 1. These materials shall not be used within structural fill areas. 2. The asphalt will need to be broken down to suitable size fragments that meet the criteria for maximum rock particle size. This is necessary to avoid nesting and incorporation of large slabs of asphalt that could preclude proper compaction. Rock size shall have D 100 minus 3 inches. 3. Maintain a minimum of 5 feet clearance from all utility lines. 4. The recycled asphalt and reclaimed concrete should be blended with other soils, as practical, so that there are sufficient fines present in the fill matrix to serve as a binder. 5. Minimum cover shall be three feet under lawn or play fields, two feet elsewhere. 31 23 23.23 - 2 BACKFILLING GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repair G. Recycled Content of Backfill: Provide documentation showing re-use of reclaimed concrete as fill material.
H. Regional Materials: Provide aggregate manufactured and of primary raw materials extracted or recovered within 500 mile radius of Project Site.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify fill materials to be reused are acceptable.
B. Verify foundation perimeter drainage installation has been inspected.
C. Verify underground tanks are anchored to their own foundation to avoid flotation after backfilling.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Generally, compact subgrade to density requirements for subsequent backfill materials.
B. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of insitu compaction. Backfill with Type B fill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent backfill material.
C. Prior to placement of aggregate base course material at paved areas, compact subsoil to 100 percent of its maximum dry density in accordance with the Geo-Technical Engineer’s recommendations.
3.3 BACKFILLING
A. Backfill areas to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials.
B. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces.
C. Soil Fill: Place and compact material in continuous layers not exceeding 10 inches loose depth if compacted with heavy equipment and 4 inches when compacted by hand operated or light compaction equipment.
D. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density.
E. Backfill against supported foundation walls. Do not back-fill against unsupported foundation walls.
F. Backfill simultaneously on each side of unsupported foundation walls until supports are in place.
G. Slope grade away from building minimum 1 unit vertical in 20 units horizontal for a minimum distance of 10 feet, unless noted otherwise.
H. Make grade changes gradual. Blend slope into level areas.
GCPS: Southern High School BACKFILLING 31 23 23.23 - 3 Façade Renovations & Repairs I. Remove surplus backfill materials from site.
J. Leave required fill material stockpile areas completely free of excess fill materials which are to be removed from the site.
K. Additional requirements as outlined in section 02 30 00 Subsurface Drilling and Sampling Information
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Top Surface of Backfilling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus one inch from required elevations.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and analysis of fill material will be performed in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D2487 and with Section 01 45 16 – Field Quality Control Procedures
B. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D1557 and with Section 01 45 16 – Field Quality Control Procedures
C. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner.
D. Frequency of Tests: Provide a minimum of one test per lift for each 500 square feet of backfill or a minimum of four (4) tests per layer of fill or at Owner’s requests.
E. Proof roll compacted fill surfaces under slabs-on-grade pavers and paving.
3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 76 00
B. Recompact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.
3.7 SCHEDULE OF COMPACTION
A. Unless detailed elsewhere in the plans, the following compaction criteria (using Standard Proctor) shall be followed for each case. In the event of conflict, the stricter of the plans, this section, or geotechnical report shall prevail.
B. Interior Slab-On-Grade: 1. Type A fill, 6 inches thick, compacted with plate compactor.
C. Exterior Side of Foundation Walls, Retaining Walls and Over Granular Filter Material and Foundation Perimeter Drainage: 1. Type A fill, to subgrade elevation, each lift, compacted to 95 percent standard proctor.
D. Fill Under Grass Areas: 1. Subsoil fill, to 6 inches below finish grade, compacted to 90 percent.
E. Fill Under Landscaped Areas: 1. Subsoil fill, to 12 inches below finish grade, compacted to 90 percent.
31 23 23.23 - 4 BACKFILLING GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repair F. Fill under Structure and Pavements, below aggregate base course and any fill required to Correct Over-excavation: 1. Type B (Structural fill) fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to 100 percent at structure and 98% at common areas.
G. Sidewalks, concrete walkways, trenches and stoops: 1. 4 inches of Type C (Select fill) fill, to 4 inches below finish paving elevation, compacted to 98 percent.
H. Trench Work (Under landscaped areas) 1. Type C fill to 12 inches below finish grade, compacted to 95 percent.
I. Trench Work (under Asphalt Concrete Paving) 1. 12 inches of Type C fill compacted to 97 percent.
J. Manhole, inlet, underground structure bedding. 1. Type C fill 12 inches deep compacted at 100 percent.
K. Under athletic play areas 1. Subsoil fill compacted at 95 percent to a depth of 6 feet. Subsoil fill compacted at 90 percent beyond 6 feet.
L. In the event that multiple conditions exist, the more stringent criteria shall apply.
END OF SECTION
GCPS: Southern High School BACKFILLING 31 23 23.23 - 5 Façade Renovations & Repairs
SECTION 31 25 00 – SEDIMENT & EROSION CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and perform all soil erosion and sedimentation control work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. The work is more fully described and detailed in the Sediment and Erosion Control Plan (SEC) prepared for this project as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Dust control is addressed for demolition and crushing of Reclaimed concrete Material
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish certificates from the manufacturers of matting for erosion control and fabric for silt barrier fencing that their products meet the requirements of these Specifications.
B. Erosion Control Matting
C. Sediment and Erosion Control aggregates
D. Submit Plan for Dust Control to local Soil Conservation District for review and approval prior to beginning demolition of the building envelope or site items. Narrative shall describe methods to be used to prevent dust from wind erosion as well as demolition and crushing processes.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Publications: 1. Maryland Department of the Environment, Water Management Administration, Soil Conservation Service, 2011 Maryland Standards and Specifications for Soil Erosion and Sediment Control. (2011 SSSESC) 2. Maryland Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Construction and Materials, latest edition. 3. USDA - Soil Conservation Service Technical Release Bulletin No. 55.
B. Reference Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials: a. ASTM C97; Standard Test Methods for Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of Dimension Stone. b. ASTM D751; Standard Test Methods for Coated Fabrics. c. ASTM D1682; Standard Test Methods for Breaking Load and Elongation of Textile Fabrics. d. ASTM D1117; Nonwoven Fabrics, Methods of Testing. 2. Asphalt Institute: Specification designations.
GCPS: Southern High School SEDIMENT & EROSION CONTROL 31 25 00 - 1 Façade Renovation & Repairs
3. Maryland Department of the Environment, 2011 Maryland Standards and Specifications for Soil Erosion and Sediment Control. (2011 SSSESC)
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 All Products shall be in accordance with the 2011 SSSESC.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All installation shall be conducted in accordance with the 2011 SSSESC.
3.2 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance operations shall begin immediately and shall continue throughout the construction period until the Contract has been completed. The sediment control structures shall be inspected and repaired after each storm.
B. Should the MDE Inspector, Owner or Engineer direct the contractor to modify, add or replace any temporary measures for erosion and sediment control, it shall be at the sole cost to the Contractor.
C. Any fines or penalties resulting from the improper installation or maintenance of temporary measures shall be borne solely by the Contractor.
3.3 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION PLAN
A. An approved Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan is shown on the Drawings. Should the Contractor desire to modify any part of the Plan, he shall be responsible for obtaining all necessary approvals therefore, prior to implementing any provisions thereof, all at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. The Contractor will assume all responsibility and liability for Erosion and Sediment Control at the start of the project. The Owner will transfer the MDE Notice of Intent and associated permitting with all of its requirements to the Contractor.
C. After project is complete, the Contractor will transfer NPDES and associated permitting to the Owner.
3.4 DUST CONTROL
A. Refer to Maryland Department of the Environment, 2011 Maryland Standards and Specifications for Soil Erosion and Sediment Control. (2011 SSSESC), Section H-5 Standards and Specifications for Dust Control.
B. Mulches: See Section B-4-2 Soil Preparation, Topsoiling, and Soil Amendments, Section B-4-3
C. Seeding and Mulching, and Section B-4-4 Temporary Stabilization. Mulch must be anchored to prevent blowing.
31 25 00-2 SEDIMENT & EROSION CONTROL GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
D. Vegetative Cover: See Section B-4-4 Temporary Stabilization.
E. Tillage: Till to roughen surface and bring clods to the surface. Begin plowing on windward side of site. Chisel-type plows spaced about 12 inches apart, spring-toothed harrows, and similar plows are examples of equipment that may produce the desired effect.
F. Irrigation: Sprinkle site with water until the surface is moist. Repeat as needed. The site must not be irrigated to the point that runoff occurs.
G. Barriers: Solid board fences, silt fences, snow fences, burlap fences, straw bales, and similar material can be used to control air currents and soil blowing.
H. Chemical Treatment: Use of chemical treatment requires approval by the appropriate plan review authority.
I. After completion of demolition, Contractor shall stabilize stockpiles so that dust is not produced. Duration of stabilization is expected to be 18 months after contract is substantially complete.
END OF SECTION
GCPS: Southern High School SEDIMENT & EROSION CONTROL 31 25 00 - 3 Façade Renovation & Repairs
SECTION 31 50 00 – EXCAVATION SUPPORT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 33 31 13 - Sanitary 2. Section 33 40 00 - Storm 3. Section 33 46 00 – Subdrainage 4. Section 31 22 13 – Rough Grading 5. Section 31 23 16 – Excavation 6. Section 31 23 16.13 – Trenching 7. Section 31 23 23.23 – Backfilling 8. Section 31 25 00 – Sediment and Erosion Control
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes temporary excavation support and protection systems.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design, furnish, install, monitor, and maintain excavation support and protection system capable of supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting soil and hydrostatic pressure and superimposed and construction loads. 1. Provide professional engineering services needed to assume engineering respon- sibility, including preparation of Shop Drawings and a comprehensive engineer- ing analysis by a qualified professional engineer. 2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means. 3. Install excavation support and protection systems without damaging existing buildings, pavements, and other improvements adjacent to excavation.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings for Information: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified pro- fessional engineer for excavation support and protection systems. 1. Include Shop Drawings signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
B. Qualification Data: For Installer and professional engineer.
C. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining con- struction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by the ab- sence of, the installation of, or the performance of excavation support and protection sys- tems.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or oth- ers unless permitted in writing by Engineer and then only after arranging to provide tem- porary utility services according to requirements indicated. GCPS: Southern High School EXCAVATION SUPPORT 31 50 00 - 1 Façade Renovations & Repairs B. Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of ge- otechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by geotechnical engineer. Owner will not be responsible for inter- pretations or conclusions drawn from this data. 1. The geotechnical report is included elsewhere in the Project Manual.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that could develop during excavation support and protection system operations. 1. Shore, support, and protect utilities encountered.
B. Install excavation support and protection systems to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facili- ties without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Contrac- tor shall present to the Owner a maintenance-of-traffic plan and shall provide pe- riodic updates as necessary. In the event that access roads or other entries are closed or otherwise blocked, then the Contractor shall also notify the Local Fire Department and Civil Defense.
C. Locate excavation support and protection systems clear of permanent construction so that forming and finishing of concrete surfaces is not impeded.
D. Monitor excavation support and protection systems daily during excavation progress and for as long as excavation remains open. Promptly correct bulges, breakage, or other evi- dence of movement to ensure that excavation support and protection systems remain sta- ble. 1. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by installing excavation support and protection systems. tic pressures.
3.2 REMOVAL AND REPAIRS
A. Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed sufficiently to support excavation and bear soil and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to avoid disturbing underlying soils or damaging structures, pavements, facilities, and utilities. 1. Remove excavation support and protection systems to a minimum depth of 60 inches below overlying construction and abandon remainder. 2. Repair or replace, as approved by Engineer, adjacent work damaged or displaced by removing excavation support and protection systems.
END OF SECTION
31 50 00-2 EXCAVATION SUPPORT GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs DIVISION 32
EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
BUSHEY FEIGHT MORIN ARCHITECTS INC. 473 NORTH POTOMAC STREET HAGERSTOWN, MARYLAND 21740 301-733-5600 FAX: 301-733-5612
SECTION 32 12 16 – HOT MIX ASPHALT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Maryland State Highway Administration “Standard Specifications for Construction and Materials” current edition.
C. Supplemental Specifications and Special Provision Inserts to Maryland State Highway Administration “Standard Specifications for Construction and Materials” current addition. as available on the State Highway Administration’s website, http://www.sha.state.md.us/
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hot mix asphalt paving. 2. Pavement marking paint.
1.3 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Quality control per MDOT Specifications.
1.4 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
A. General Line Striping 1. NONTOXIC LEAD-FREE WATERBORNE PAVEMENT MARKINGS: Materials shall be a ready-mixed, pigmented binder emulsified in water and capable of anchoring reflective beads that are applied separately. The paint shall not contain any hazardous material listed in the Environmental Protection Agency Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 40, Section 261.24, Table 1. 2. Viscosity. Viscosity shall be 80 ± 10 KU when tested in conformance with D 562 at 77 F. 3. Directional Reflectance. Directional reflectance when determined without beads, shall be a minimum of 80 percent for white and 50 percent for yellow when tested in conformance with E 97. 4. Color. a. Production. The color of the dry paint film of the production sample shall essentially match Federal Standard 595, color chips Nos. 37886 (white) or 33538 (yellow), when compared instrumentally.
B. Directional Arrows and Cross Walks 1. HEAT APPLIED PERMANENT PREFORMED THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKING MATERIAL. The material shall be highly durable retroreflective polymeric materials designed for use as transverse lines, numbers, legends, symbols and arrow markings subjected to high traffic volumes and severe wear conditions such as shear action from crossover or encroachment. 2. The applied material shall adhere to hot mix asphalt (HMA), open-grade friction courses (OGFC), stone matrix asphalt (SMA), portland cement concrete (PCC), and any existing pavement markings when applied using normal heat from a propane fueled heat gun in conformance with manufacturer’s recommendations. GCPS: Southern High School HOT MIX ASPHALT 32 12 16 - 1 Façade Renovations & Repairs 3. The applied material shall be capable of conforming to pavement contours, breaks and faults, shall not be affected by weather conditions, and shall remain in place on pavement surfaces without being displaced by traffic. 4. The material shall have a minimum shelf life of one year. 5. The material shall conform to the requirements of the MUTCD and the following: a. Composition. The material shall consist of polymeric materials, pigments, binders and glass beads distributed throughout the entire cross- sectional area. The thermoplastic material shall conform to M 249 with the exception of the relevant differences for the material being supplied in the preformed state. b. Restrictions. The combined total of lead, cadmium, mercury and hexavalent chromium shall not exceed 100 ppm when tested by X-ray diffraction, ICP, or comparable method capable of this level of detection. Nonleachable lead based pigments will not be permitted. Diarylide type pigments shall only be used when the manufacture or pavement marking material application temperature does not exceed 392 F. c. Color. Preformed markings shall consist of film with pigments selected and blended to match Federal Standard 595 color chip Nos. 17778 and 13538 for white and yellow respectively. d. Frictional Resistance. The surface of the applied material shall provide a minimum average skid resistance value of 50 BPN when tested in conformance with E 303. e. Patchability. The material shall be capable of use for patching worn areas of the same type in conformance with manufacturer’s recommendations. f. Thickness. The minimum thickness, without adhesive, shall be 120 mils. g. Adhesion. The material shall retain a minimum of 65 percent adhesive bond after 100 cycles of freeze-thaw when tested in conformance with C 666, Method B.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
A. At least 30 days prior to the start of constructing the base course, the Contractor shall submit the proposed plants, equipment, and material sources to the Engineer for approval. The Contractor shall protect the subgrade and base against damage from all causes. Any part of the subgrade or base that is damaged shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor in a manner acceptable to the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Weather Restrictions 1. Temperature and Surface Conditions. Graded aggregate stabilized with portland cement shall be placed only when the ambient air and surface temperature is at least 40 F and rising. 2. Graded aggregate, bank run gravel and sand aggregate base shall be placed only when the ambient air and surface temperature is at least 32 F and rising. Placing material on a frozen subgrade is prohibited. 3. Cold Weather Protection. The plant mixed graded aggregate stabilized base shall be protected from freezing during the seven day curing period. (c) Precipitation. Construction during precipitation is prohibited. 4. When precipitation has occurred during the previous 24 hours, the Engineer will determine if the subgrade is sufficiently dry. Any material en route from the plant to the job site may be placed at the Contractor's risk.
32 12 16-2 HOT MIX ASPHALT GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs C. Subgrade Preparation. The approved subgrade set to final line and grade shall be completed at least 500 ft ahead of the base course or as directed by the Engineer before the base course construction begins. The foundation shall be constructed as specified in Maryland State Highway Administration Sections 204 and 208, the Contract Documents, and as approved by the Engineer. If traffic, including construction equipment, is allowed to use the subgrade foundation or preceding layer, it shall be distributed over the entire width of the course to aid in obtaining uniform and thorough compaction. If ruts are formed, they shall be removed by reshaping and recompacting the affected area as specified in Section 204.
D. Spreading. The base material shall be uniformly spread without segregating the coarse and fine particles, in layers of approximately equal thickness, to provide the specified planned depth. Shoulders or berms not less than 2 ft wide shall be built up on each side of the base to the top elevation of each uncompacted layer unless the base is placed against concrete curbs or gutters.
E. Grade or Finished Surface Control. The surface of the base material shall be shaped to the required lines, grades and cross section specified in the Contract Documents. Grades shall be set longitudinally and transversely with fixed controls having a maximum spacing of 25 ft. The surface material shall be compacted and smoothed over its full width using a smooth faced steel wheeled roller or, if rolling is not feasible, by mechanical tampers and vibratory compactors as approved by the Engineer. The finished grade shall not deviate more than 1/2 in. from the established grade.
F. Compaction. Immediately after placement, the base material shall be compacted to the required density. During compaction operations, the moisture content of the material shall be maintained within 2 percent of the material’s optimum moisture. The optimum moisture content and maximum dry density shall be determined as follows: 1. Graded Aggregate Base and Graded Stabilized Aggregate Base: MSMT 321 2. Graded aggregate for base shall be compacted to a minimum density of 97 percent of the maximum dry density. 3. Compaction operations, except on superelevated curves, shall begin at the sides of the course, overlap the shoulder or berm at least 1 ft and progress toward the center parallel to the center line of the roadway. Superelevated curve compaction shall begin at the low side of the superelevation and progress toward the high side. The compaction operation shall continue until all compaction marks are eliminated.
G. Moisture and Dust Control Agents. When specified in the Contract Documents or as directed by the Engineer, calcium or magnesium chloride shall be added at the plant or applied to the surface of the graded aggregate, bank run gravel, or sand aggregate base at the project site. Calcium chloride shall be applied at the rate of 1 lb/yd2. Magnesium chloride shall be applied at the rate of 1 lb/yd2 or as a solution at the rate of 1/2 gal/yd2. 501.03.13 Maintenance.
H. During construction and after completion of the base course, the base shall be maintained by the Contractor until the surface course is placed. Unacceptable work that cannot be repaired shall be replaced for the full depth of the base at no additional cost to the Owner.
2.2 HOT MIX ASPHALT
A. Equipment. All equipment, including the production plant and paving equipment, shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. The plant shall be ready for inspection by the Engineer at least 48 hours prior to the start of construction operations. 1. Hauling Units. Refer to 915.02(f). Due regard shall be given to the safety and convenience of the public while applying and maintaining the tack coat. GCPS: Southern High School HOT MIX ASPHALT 32 12 16 - 3 Façade Renovations & Repairs Provisions shall be made to minimize hauling trucks from tracking tack coat onto the adjacent pavement. 2. Pavers. Pavers will be inspected and approved by the Engineer based upon the manufacturer's specification manual (copy to be provided by the Contractor). The paver shall be a self-contained, self-propelled unit capable of spreading the mixture true to line, grade and cross slope. The paver shall be equipped with a screed or strike off assembly that will produce a finished surface of the required smoothness and texture without tearing, shoving or gouging the mixture. The paver shall have automatic controls for transverse slope and grade. Controls shall be capable of sensing grade from an outside reference line or ski and sensing the transverse slope of the screed to maintain the required grade and transverse slope within plus or minus 0.1 of the required slope percentage. Manual operation will be permitted in the construction of irregularly shaped and minor areas, or where directed by the Engineer. Whenever a breakdown or malfunction of any automatic control occurs, the equipment may be operated manually for the remainder of the workday as directed by the Engineer. Reference lines or other suitable markings to control the horizontal alignment shall be provided by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the Engineer. 3. Rollers. Rollers shall be self-propelled, reversible, and steel wheeled or pneumatic tired. Rollers may be vibratory or nonvibratory, and they may be operated in the vibratory mode as long as the Engineer determines that the roller is not cracking or damaging the aggregate in the mix. Rollers shall not be used in the vibratory mode on bridge decks. Pneumatic tire rollers shall have multiple tires of equal size with smooth tread. Wheels shall be arranged to oscillate in pairs, or they may be individually sprung. Tires shall be uniformly inflated at the operating pressure approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a manufacturer's table showing this data. The difference in tire pressure between any two tires shall not be greater than 5 psi. The Contractor shall provide a means for checking the tire pressure on the job at all times.
B. Weather Restrictions. HMA material shall only be placed on roadway surfaces when the ambient air and surface temperature is at least 40 F and rising for surface mixes and at least 32 F and rising for base mixes. The pavement surfaces shall be clean and dry and approved by the Engineer before HMA paving begins. Placing HMA material on a frozen graded aggregate base is prohibited. When weather conditions differ from these limits, material en route from the plant to the job site may be used at the Contractor's risk. If placement of the material is stopped by the Engineer, all material en route shall be wasted at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Foundation Preparation. Prior to placement of paving material, the foundation shall be constructed as specified in the Contract Documents and approved by the Engineer. When paving over existing pavement, all excess crack filling or patch material shall be removed and all spalls and potholes shall be cleaned, tack coated, filled and tamped with HMA before placement. Manholes, valve boxes, inlets, and other appurtenances within the area to be paved shall be adjusted to grade as directed by the Engineer.
D. Tack Coat. Prior to application of the tack coat, the surface shall be cleaned of all loose and foreign materials. The tack coat shall be uniformly applied to the surface by full circulation spray bars that are laterally and vertically adjustable and provide triple fanning and overlapping action so that the resulting coating shall be residual asphalt applied at a rate of 0.01 to 0.05 gal/yd2 as directed by the Engineer.
E. Hot Mix Asphalt Placement. HMA shall be placed by the paver. Delivery of the mixture by the hauling units and placement shall be continuous. The temperature of the mixture shall be a minimum of 225 F at the time of placement. Broadcasting of loose mixture over the new surface is prohibited. 32 12 16-4 HOT MIX ASPHALT GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs F. Immediately following placement of the HMA mixture, the mixture shall be compacted by rolling to an in place density as specified in 504.03.10. The in place compaction shall be completed before the mixture cools below 185 F, as determined by a probe type surface thermometer, supplied by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. Price adjustment due to noncompliance with the required density will be as specified in 504.04.02. The probe type surface thermometer shall remain the property of the Contractor at the completion of the project. 1. Rolling shall consist of six separate operations in the following sequence: a. Transverse joint. b. Longitudinal joint. c. Edges. d. Initial breakdown rolling. e. Second or intermediate rolling. f. Finish rolling. 2. Steel wheel rollers shall be used for the first rolling of all joints and edges, the initial breakdown rolling, and the finish rolling. 3. Rollers shall start at the sides and proceed longitudinally toward the center of the pavement, except on superelevated curves. The rolling shall begin at the low side and progress toward the high side. Successive trips of the roller shall overlap by at least half the width of the roller, and alternate trips shall not end at the same point. When base widening is too narrow to permit the use of conventional rollers, a power-driven trench roller shall be used. When the trench must be excavated wider than the proposed width of the widening, an earth berm or shoulder shall be formed against the loose HMA as soon as it is placed. The two materials shall be rolled and compacted simultaneously. Roller marks shall not be visible after rolling operations.
G. Both longitudinal and transverse joints in successive courses shall be staggered so that one is not above the other. Transverse joints shall be staggered by the length of the paver. Longitudinal joints shall be staggered a minimum of 6 in. and shall be arranged so that the longitudinal joint in the top course shall be within 6 in. of the line dividing the traffic lanes. Joints shall be constructed to provide a continuous bond between the old and new surfaces. Joints shall be coated with tack coat as directed by the Engineer. When placing a surface course, the edge of the existing pavement shall be cut back for its full depth at transverse joints to expose a fresh surface which shall be coated with tack coat material as directed by the Engineer. Before placing the mixture against curbs, gutters, headers, manholes, etc., all contact surfaces shall be coated with tack coat. Where HMA paving is being applied to highways carrying traffic, all pavement courses exceeding 2-1/2 in. in depth shall be matched with the abutting lane or shoulder on the same working day. Where pavement courses of 2-1/2 in. or less are placed, the Contractor shall have the option of paving the abutting lane or shoulder on alternate days. The abutting lane or shoulder shall be paved regardless of the depth of pavement course prior to weekends and temporary shutdowns. When uneven pavement joints exist, the Contractor shall provide advance warning traffic control devices in conformance with the Contract Documents.
H. Where HMA paving is being applied to the traveled way carrying traffic, the Contractor shall construct a temporary tie-in a minimum of 4 ft in length for each 1 in. of pavement depth before traffic is allowed to cross the transverse joint. The final tie-in shall include the removal of a transverse portion of the existing pavement to a depth so the design thickness of the final surface course is maintained. The length of the final tie-in shall be equal to the posted speed per 1 in. depth of the design thickness of the final course with a minimum length of 25 ft per 1 in. depth and a maximum length of 50 ft per 1 in. depth.
I. Where permanent curbs, gutters, edges, and other supports are planned, they shall be constructed and backfilled prior to placing the HMA, which shall then be placed and compacted against them. GCPS: Southern High School HOT MIX ASPHALT 32 12 16 - 5 Façade Renovations & Repairs 2.3 LINE STRIPING
A. Cleaning Pavement Surfaces. Pavement surfaces shall be dry and free of oil, dirt, grease, and other contaminants prior to application of pavement markings. Surfaces not in conformance shall be cleaned by the Contractor to a width 4 to 6 in. wider than the marking to be applied. Existing pavement markings that conflict with new or altered traffic patterns shall be completely removed by the Contractor. The method used by the Contractor for removal shall not damage the pavement surface and shall be approved by the Engineer. Any pavement damaged shall be repaired or replaced as determined by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Application. Before any pavement marking work is begun, a schedule of operations shall be submitted to and approved by the Engineer. All pavement markings shall be applied in conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. When permanent pavement markings are applied under traffic, the Contractor shall provide all traffic control necessary to maintain and protect traffic in conformance with the MUTCD and the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall secure the pavement marking operations and protect the markings until they are thoroughly set. All longitudinal pavement markings shall be applied in the direction of traffic. Placing pavement marking material over longitudinal joints is prohibited.
C. Widths. The traveled way lane widths and the width of longitudinal lines shall be as specified in the Contract Documents. Lane widths shall be measured from the center of the line to the center of the line once a control line is established for the lane configuration of the roadway. When measurements are taken from existing longitudinal lines, the point of reference shall be the center of the single line or the center of the space between dual lines. The traveled way lane widths shall be in compliance when they have an acceptable appearance and do not deviate more than 2 in. from the proposed lane width.
D. Alignment. Markings shall be placed in a straight and uniform manner. Lane lines shall be in compliance when they have an acceptable appearance, and are visually in alignment, with no more than a 3/8 in. variation in any 40 ft section of traveled way. Longitudinal alignment shall be maintained through all intersections and breaks, even though the lines themselves may discontinue.
E. Layout Markings. Any layout markings that detract from the overall appearance or function of the final markings as determined by the Engineer shall be removed at no additional cost to the Owner.
F. Although this specification incorporates MD SHA guidelines for the installation of asphalt, it does not transfer nor imply any relationship with Measurement and Payment. The Owner will not accept requests for additional costs based on Asphalt Index.
END OF SECTION
32 12 16-6 HOT MIX ASPHALT GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
SECTION 32 13 13 – CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements 2. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements 3. Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals 4. Section 31 23 23.23 – Backfilling 5. Section 31 25 00 – Sediment and Erosion Control
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following: 1. Driveways. 2. Curbs and gutters. 3. Walkways.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, expansive hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
B. Design Mixes: For each concrete pavement mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.
C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current materials:
D. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials complies with requirements: 1. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Admixtures. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Applied finish materials. 7. Bonding agent or adhesive. 8. Joint fillers.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed pavement work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. GCPS: Southern High School CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 1 Façade Renovations & Repairs B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the Maryland State Highway Administration.
C. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents.
D. Concrete Testing Service: Contractor shall engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.
E. Mockups: Cast mockups of full-size sections of concrete pavement to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, color, and standard of workmanship. 1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Engineer. 2. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting construction. 4. Maintain approved mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed pavement. 5. Demolish and remove approved mockups from the site when directed by Engineer. 6. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMS
A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. 1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a radius 100 feet (30.5 m) or less.
B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Recycled Content: Provide steel with minimum 90 percent total recycled content, including at least 60 percent post-consumer recycled content.
B. Regional Materials: Provide steel manufactured and of primary raw materials extracted or recovered within 500 mile radius of Project Site.
C. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.
D. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.
E. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420). Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.
32 13 13-2 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs F. Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6), internally and externally threaded. Design hook-bolt joint assembly to hold coupling against pavement form and in position during concreting operations, and to permit removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt.
G. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcement bars, welded wire fabric, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. General: Use the same brand and type of cementitious material from the same manufacturer throughout the Project. Mix shall be in accordance with current Maryland State Highway Administation standards.
2.4 CURING MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) dry.
B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap- polyethylene sheet.
C. Water: Potable.
D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.
2.5 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.
2.6 CONCRETE MIXES
A. Use Maryland State Highway Administration approved mix designs.
B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the trial batch method. 1. Do not use Owner's field quality-control testing agency as the independent testing agency.
2.7 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116. 1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
GCPS: Southern High School CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 3 Façade Renovations & Repairs PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and verify need for additional compaction. Proceed with pavement only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement.
B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.
3.2 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.
3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating reinforcement and with recommendations in CRSI's "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting reinforcement.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.
C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.
D. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.
E. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch (50-mm) overlap to adjacent mats.
3.4 JOINTS
A. General: Construct construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated. 1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour, unless pavement terminates at isolation joints. 1. Provide preformed galvanized steel or plastic keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete.
32 13 13-4 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 2. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated. 4. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 5. Use epoxy bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated. 1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 25 feet, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 3. Terminate joint filler less than 1/2 inch (12 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated. 4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. 5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint-filler sections together. 6. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.
D. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt- coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
E. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with groover tool to the following radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces. a. Radius: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks.
F. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to the following radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. 1. Radius: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcement steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.
B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.
C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required finish elevation and alignment.
GCPS: Southern High School CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 5 Façade Renovations & Repairs D. Comply with requirements and with recommendations in ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.
E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.
F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.
G. Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concrete according to recommendations in ACI 309R. 1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices.
H. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading dry-shake surface treatments.
I. Curbs and Gutters: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not approved, remove and replace with formed concrete.
J. Slip-Form Pavers: When automatic machine placement is used for pavement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce pavement to required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as required for formed pavement. 1. Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of paver machine during operations.
K. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28-day compressive strength.
L. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.
M. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover reinforcement steel with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
32 13 13-6 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 3. Fog-spray forms, reinforcement steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. General: Wetting of concrete surfaces during screeding, initial floating, or finishing operations is prohibited.
B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 1. Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across float-finished concrete, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, gritty texture. 2. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float- finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture. 3. Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating float-finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch (1.6 to 3 mm) deep with a stiff- bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic.
3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and follow recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.
D. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture- retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
3.8 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES
A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows: GCPS: Southern High School CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 7 Façade Renovations & Repairs 1. Elevation: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch (9 mm), minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- (3-m-) long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch (6 mm). 4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch (25 mm). 5. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 6. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2 inch (13 mm). 7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: Length of dowel 1/4 inch per 12 inches (6 mm per 300 mm). 8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches (75 mm). 9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus. 10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), no minus.
3.9 PAVEMENT MARKING
A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Engineer.
B. Allow concrete pavement to cure for 28 days and be dry before starting pavement marking.
C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings of dimensions indicated with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils (0.4 mm). 1. Broadcast glass spheres uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal. (0.72 kg/L).
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspection agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include those specified in this Article.
B. Testing Services: Testing shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: Representative samples of fresh concrete shall be obtained according to ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each compressive- strength test, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete. Additional tests will be required when concrete consistency changes. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each compressive- strength test, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of air- entrained concrete. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set of compressive-strength specimens. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise indicated. Cylinders shall be molded and stored for laboratory-cured test specimens unless field-cured test specimens are required. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each concrete class exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m). One specimen shall be tested at 7 days and two specimens at 28 days; one specimen shall be retained in reserve for later testing if required.
32 13 13-8 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 7. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for a given class of concrete, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 8. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m), Engineer may waive compressive-strength testing if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. 9. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, current operations shall be evaluated and corrective procedures shall be provided for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 10. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive compressive-strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual compressive-strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).
C. Test results shall be reported in writing to Engineer, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing agency, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in pavement, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.
D. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Engineer but will not be used as the sole basis for approval or rejection.
E. Additional Tests: Testing agency shall make additional tests of the concrete when test results indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Engineer. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.
3.11 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet requirements in this Section.
B. Drill test cores where directed by Engineer when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive.
C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.
END OF SECTION
GCPS: Southern High School CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 9 Façade Renovations & Repairs SECTION 32 92 19 - SEEDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Permanent seeding, mulching and fertilizer for playing fields and green areas around buildings.
B. Maintenance
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 31 25 00- Sediment and Erosion Control.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. FS O-F-241 - Fertilizers, Mixed, Commercial.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Weeds: Include Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Will, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass.
1.5 MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00 - Submittals.
B. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance instructions, cutting method and maximum grass height; types, application frequency, and recommended coverage of fertilizer.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide seed mixture in containers showing percentage of seed mix, year of production, net weight, date of packaging, and location of packaging.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer and herbicide composition.
B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of seed mixture.
C. Provide soils analysis report per Article 2.03.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 50 00.
B. Deliver grass seed mixture in sealed containers. Seed in damaged packaging is not acceptable.
GCPS: Southern High School SEEDING 32 92 19 - 1 Façade Renovations & Repairs C. Deliver fertilized in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis, and name of manufacturer.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 50 00.
1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintain seeded areas immediately after placement until grass is well established and exhibits a vigorous growing condition and until contract completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SEED MIXTURE
A. Refer to Erosion and Sediment Control Sheets.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Mulching Material: Oat or wheat straw, free from weeds, foreign matter detrimental to plant life, and dry. Hay or chopped cornstalks are not acceptable.
B. Fertilizer: FS O-F-241, Type recommended for grass, with fifty percent of the elements derived from organic sources; of proportion necessary to eliminate any deficiencies of topsoil, as indicated in analysis.
C. Water: Clean, fresh and free of substances or matter which could inhibit vigorous growth of grass.
D. Erosion Fabric: Jute matting, open weave.
E. Herbicide: As approved by seeding manufacturer.
F. Stakes: Softwood lumber, chisel pointed.
G. String: Inorganic fiber.
2.3 TESTS
A. Provide analysis of any topsoil under provisions of Section 01400.
B. Analyze to ascertain percentage of nitrogen, phosphorus, potash, soluble salt content, organic matter content, and pH value.
C. Submit minimum 10 oz sample of imported topsoil proposed. Forward sample to approved testing laboratory in sealed containers to prevent contamination.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that prepared soil base is ready to receive the work of this Section.
32 92 19 - 2 SEEDING GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs 3.2 FERTILIZING
A. Apply fertilizer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply after smooth raking of topsoil and prior to roller compaction.
C. Do not apply fertilizer at same time or with same machine as will be used to apply seed.
D. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of topsoil.
E. Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer.
3.3 SEEDING
A. Apply seed at a rate as indicated on the plans. Rake in lightly.
B. Do not seed areas in excess of that which can be mulched on same day.
C. Planting Season: August 1 to Oct. 1, or March 1 to August 1.
D. Do not sow immediately following rain, when ground is too dry, or during windy periods.
E. Roll seeded area with roller not exceeding 112 lbs.
F. Immediately following seeding and compacting, apply mulch to a thickness of 1/8 in. Maintain clear of shrubs and trees.
G. Apply water with a fine spray immediately after each area has been mulched. Saturate to 4 inches of soil.
H. Hydroseeding is an approved alternate application method.
3.4 SEED PROTECTION
A. Identify seeded areas with stakes and string around area periphery. Set string height to 36 inches. Space stakes at 96 inches.
3.5 MAINTENANCE
A. Mow grass at regular intervals to maintain at a maximum height of 2-1/2 inches. Do not cut more than 1/3 of grass blade at any one mowing. Maintain maintenance throughout the construction contract.
B. Neatly trim edges and hand clip where necessary.
C. Immediately remove clippings after mowing and trimming.
D. Water to prevent grass and soil from drying out.
E. Roll surfaces to remove minor depressions or irregularities.
F. Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remedy damage resulting from improper use of herbicides.
G. Immediately re-seed areas which show bare spots.
GCPS: Southern High School SEEDING 32 92 19 - 3 Façade Renovations & Repairs H. Protect seeded areas with warning signs during maintenance period.
I. Provide minimum one each fall, winter, and spring fertilizing utilizing products approved by the Owner and application rates as required from soil analysis.
J. Maintain grass until substantial completion and until substantial completion and until stand of grass is full and acceptable to the Owner/Architect.
END OF SECTION
32 92 19 - 4 SEEDING GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs DIVISION 33
UTILITIES
BUSHEY FEIGHT MORIN ARCHITECTS INC. 473 NORTH POTOMAC STREET HAGERSTOWN, MARYLAND 21740 301-733-5600 FAX: 301-733-5612
SECTION 33 41 00 – STORM DRAINAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes storm drainage outside the building and stormwater structures.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
B. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
C. RCCP: Reinforced circular concrete pipe.
D. HDPE: High Density Polyethylene pipe.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments for the following: 1. Precast concrete manholes stormwater basins, and other structures, including frames, covers, and grates. 2. Cast-in-place concrete manholes and other structures, including frames, covers, and grates. 3. Polyethylene manholes and drains, including frames covers and grates. 4. Trench Drains including sectional layout and grates. 5. Piping.
B. Coordination Drawings: Show manholes and other structures, pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Include details of underground structures and connections. Show other piping in same trench and clearances from sewerage system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate structures.
C. Design Mix Reports and Calculations: For each class of cast-in-place concrete.
D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.
E. Bioretention Soil Mix: Provide certification from independent lab for compliance with plans. GCPS: Southern High School STORM DRAINAGE 33 41 00 - 1 Façade Renovations & Repairs 2 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store plastic structures, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.
B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.
C. Handle precast concrete manholes and other structures according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Site Information: Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations.
B. Locate existing structures and piping to be closed and abandoned.
C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting materials.
2.2 PIPES AND FITTINGS
A. Corrugated PE Drainage Tubing and Fittings: AASHTO M 252, Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints. 1. Silttight Couplings: PE sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2 gasket material that mates with tube and fittings to form silttight joints.
B. Corrugated PE Pipe and Fittings: AASHTO M 294, Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints. 1. Silttight Couplings: PE sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2 gasket material that mates with pipe and fittings to form silttight joints.
C. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: According to the following: 1. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 (DN375) and Smaller: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, for solvent-cemented or gasketed joints. a. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.
33 41 00 - 2 STORM DRAINAGE GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
D. Reinforced-Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76 (ASTM C 76M) , Class IV, Wall B, for gasketed joints. 1. Gaskets: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M) , rubber.
E. Reinforced Concrete Low-head Pressure Pipe for Principle Spillway 1. Pipe: ASTM C361 with watertight joints in size indicated on the plans. 2. Joints: Push-on with rubber gasket seal.
2.3 MANHOLES
A. Manholes, both precast and cast-in-place concrete, shall be constructed as per current Maryland State Highway Administration standards.
B. Manhole Frames and Covers: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile-iron castings designed for heavy-duty service. Include indented top design with lettering "STORM SEWER" cast into cover.
2.4 CATCH BASINS
A. Catch Basins, both precast and cast-in-place concrete, shall be constructed as per current Maryland State Highway Administration standards.
B. Frames and Grates: constructed as per current Maryland State Highway Administration standards.
2.5 STORMWATER INLETS
A. Curb Inlets: Made with vertical curb opening, of materials and dimensions according to current Maryland State Highway Administration standards.
B. Gutter Inlets: Made with horizontal gutter opening, of materials and according to current Maryland State Highway Administration standards. Include heavy-duty frames and grates.
C. Combination Inlets: Made with vertical curb and horizontal gutter openings, of materials and dimensions according to current Maryland State Highway Administration standards. Include heavy-duty frames and grates.
D. Frames and Grates: Heavy-duty frames and grates according to current Maryland State Highway Administration standards.
2.6 CONCRETE 1. General: Cast-in-place sitework concrete according to current Maryland State Highway Administration standards.
2.7 PVC INLINE DRAINS AND DRAINAGE BASINS
A. PVC surface drainage inlets shall be of the inline drain type as indicated on the contract drawing and referenced within the contract specifications. The ductile iron grates (12” and 15” frames are cast iron) for each of these fittings are to be
GCPS: Southern High School STORM DRAINAGE 33 41 00 - 3 Façade Renovations & Repairs 4 considered an integral part of the surface drainage inlet and shall be furnished by the same manufacturer.
B. The inline drain required for this contract shall be manufactured from PVC pipe stock, utilizing a thermo-molding process to reform the pipe stock to the furnished configuration. The drainage pipe connection stubs shall be manufactured from PVC pipe stock and formed to provide a watertight connection with the specified pipe system. This joint tightness shall conform to ASTM D3212 for joints for drain and sewer plastic pipe using flexible elastomeric seals. The pipe bell spigot shall be joined to the inline drain body by use of a swage mechanical joint. The pipe stock used to manufacture the inline drain body and pipe bell spigot of the surface drainage inlets shall meet the mechanical property requirements for fabricated fittings as described by ASTM D3034, Standard for Sewer PVC Pipe and Fittings; ASTM F1336, Standard for PVC Gasketed Sewer Fittings.
C. The grates furnished for all surface drainage inlets shall be ductile iron grates for sizes 8”, 10”, 12”, 15”, 18”, 24” and 30” (12” and 15” frames are cast iron) shall be made specifically for each fitting so as to provide a round bottom flange that closely matches the diameter of the surface drainage inlet. Grates for inline drains shall be capable of supporting H-25 wheel loading for heavy-duty traffic or H-10 loading for pedestrian traffic. 12” and 15” will be hinged to the frame using pins. Metal used in the manufacture of the castings shall conform to ASTM A536 grade 70-50-05 for ductile iron and ASTM A-48-83 Class 30B for 12” and 15” cast iron frames. Grates shall be provided painted black.
2.8 TRENCH DRAIN
A. The surface drainage system shall be polymer concrete S300K channel system with ductile iron rail and grate as manufactured by ACO Polymer Products, Inc., Chardon, Oh.
B. Channels will be manufactured from polyester resin polymer concrete with an integrally cast in ductile iron rail and supplied with ductile iron grates.
C. The system shall be 12 inches (300mm) nominal inside width with a 14.1 in. (360mm) overall width and a built-in slope of 0.6%. All channels shall be interlocking with a male/female joint. Each channel shall have a 6 in. (171mm) and 8 in. (218mm) schedule 40 drill-out on the bottom for vertical connection with underground piping.
D. The complete drainage system shall be by ACO Polymer Products, Inc. Any deviation or partial system design and/or improper installation will void any and all warranties provided by ACO Polymer Products, Inc.
E. The channel system shall be independently certified to withstand loadings to load class F (DIN19580).
F. Grates shall be secured using 'Powerlok' Boltless locking system. Grate and Locking system shall be fully removable from channel.
33 41 00 - 4 STORM DRAINAGE GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
G. Polymer Concrete shall have material properties of: compressive strength range between 14,000-14,500 psi; flexural strength between 3600-4500 psi; tensile strength of 1500 psi. The material water absorption rate shall not exceed 0.1% by weight and shall be resistant to prolonged salt exposure, repetitive frost cycles and chemically resistant to dilute acids and alkalis.
2.9 TRACK PERIMETER DRAIN
A. Provide prefabricated sectional perimeter drain, installed at inside perimeter of running track, in concrete cradle, per manufacturer’s recommendation, and as detailed. Utilize ACO Sport System #4020 at track perimeter and Sport System #2000 at ‘D’ Areas, as manufactured by Sports Field Specialties, Delhi, N.Y. 13753, (607) 746-8911; Pro Channel Drain #SE426 at track perimeter and ‘XT’ slot drain at ‘D’ Areas as manufactured by Sports Edge, ABT, Inc., Troutman, N.C. (800) 334-6057; or approved equivalent. Drain shall be furnished with (8) catch basin/drop buckets installed where shown on plans and connected into the existing collector drain system.
2.10 BIORETENTION POND
A. Planting Soil Media Must meet MD MDE standards. 1. PH Range: 5.2 to 7.0 2. Organic Matter: 1.5 to 4.0 % by weight 3. Magnesium: 35 lbs per acre, minimum 4. Phosphorus (Phosphate P2O5): 75 lbs per acre, minimum 5. Potassium (Potash K 2O): 85 lbs per acre, minimum 6. Soluble salts: <500 ppm 7. Clay: 10% max 8. Silt: 30 to 55% 9. Sand: 25 to 60%
B. Sand: ASTM C-33
C. Mulch: Shredded hardwood mulch. Dye free.
D. Filter fabric: AASHTO M288 Class 2 non-woven filter fabric, SHA grade SD
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31.
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. General: Include watertight, silttight, or soiltight joints, unless watertight or silttight joints are indicated.
GCPS: Southern High School STORM DRAINAGE 33 41 00 - 5 Façade Renovations & Repairs 6 B. Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fitting products listed below. Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods according to applications indicated.
C. Gravity-Flow Piping: Use the following: 1. NPS 3 (DN80) : ABS, SDR 35, sewer pipe and fittings; solvent-cemented joints; or gaskets and gasketed joints. 2. NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN100 and DN150) : Corrugated PE drainage tubing and fittings, soiltight couplings, and coupled joints. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN100 and DN150) : Corrugated PE drainage tubing and fittings, silttight couplings, and coupled joints. 4. NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN100 and DN150) : Cellular-core PVC pipe, PVC sewer pipe fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 5. NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN100 and DN150) : PVC sewer pipe and fittings, solvent-cemented joints, or gaskets and gasketed joints. 6. NPS 8 to NPS 15 (DN200 to DN375) : Corrugated PE drainage tubing and fittings, soiltight couplings, and coupled joints in NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN200 and DN250) . Use corrugated PE pipe and fittings, soiltight couplings, and coupled joints in NPS 12 and NPS 15 (DN300 and DN375) . 7. NPS 8 to NPS 15 (DN200 to DN375) : Corrugated PE drainage tubing and fittings, silttight couplings, and coupled joints in NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN200 and DN250) . Use corrugated PE pipe and fittings, silttight couplings, and coupled joints in NPS 12 and NPS 15 (DN300 and DN375) . 8. NPS 8 to NPS 15 (DN200 to DN375) : PVC sewer pipe and fittings, solvent- cemented joints, or gaskets and gasketed joints. 9. NPS 8 to NPS 15 (DN200 to DN375) : NPS 12 and NPS 15 (DN300 and DN375) reinforced-concrete sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. Do not use nonreinforced pipe instead of reinforced concrete pipe in NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN200 and DN250) .
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical.
B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line, and pull past each joint as it is completed.
C. Use manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections, unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.
D. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
33 41 00 - 6 STORM DRAINAGE GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
E. Install gravity-flow piping and connect to building's storm drains, of sizes and in locations indicated. Terminate piping as indicated. 1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 1 percent, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Extend storm drainage piping and connect to building's storm drains, of sizes and in locations indicated. Terminate piping as indicated.
G. Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed by tunneling, jacking, or a combination of both.
3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION
A. General: Join and install pipe and fittings according to installations indicated.
B. PE Pipe and Fittings: As follows: 1. Join pipe, tubing, and fittings with couplings for soiltight joints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Install according to ASTM D 2321 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Install corrugated piping according to the Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association's "Recommended Installation Practices for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings."
C. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: As follows: 1. Join pipe and gasketed fittings with gaskets according to ASTM D 2321. 2. Install according to ASTM D 2321.
D. Concrete Pipe and Fittings: Install according to ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual." Use the following seals: 1. Round Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M) , rubber gaskets.
E. System Piping Joints: Make joints using system manufacturer's couplings, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Join piping made of different materials or dimensions with couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and that fit both systems' materials and dimensions.
3.5 MANHOLE INSTALLATION
A. General: As per current Maryland State Highway Administration standards.
3.6 CATCH-BASIN INSTALLATION
A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated.
B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated.
C. Frames shall be set on brick and grout. For pre-cast concrete structures, top of precast shall be low enough to allow for field adjustment of frames. GCPS: Southern High School STORM DRAINAGE 33 41 00 - 7 Façade Renovations & Repairs 8 3.7 STORM DRAINAGE INLET AND OUTLET INSTALLATION
A. Construct inlet head walls, aprons, and sides of reinforced concrete, as indicated.
B. Install outlets that spill onto grade, anchored with concrete, where indicated.
C. Install outlets that spill onto grade, with flared end sections that match pipe, where indicated.
D. Construct energy dissipators at outlets, as indicated.
3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318 and ACI 350R.
3.9 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION
A. Install cleanouts and riser extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at grade. Use cast-iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.
B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches (450 by 450 by 300 mm) deep. Set with tops 1 inch (25 mm) above surrounding earth grade.
C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface.
3.10 DRAIN INSTALLATION
A. Install type of drains in locations indicated.
B. Embed drains in 4-inch (100-mm) minimum depth of concrete around bottom and sides.
C. Fasten grates to drains if indicated.
D. Set drain frames and covers with tops flush with pavement surface.
3.11 PVC Inline Drains and Drainage Basins
A. The specified PVC surface drainage inlet shall be installed using conventional flexible pipe backfill materials and procedures. The backfill material shall be crushed stone or other granular material meeting the requirements of class 1 or 2 material as defined in ASTM D2321. The surface drainage inlets shall be bedded and back-filled uniformly in accordance with ASTM D2321. For H-25 Load rated installations, an 8” to 10” thick concrete ring will be poured under the grate and frame as recommended by details provided to the manufacturer.
33 41 00 - 8 STORM DRAINAGE GCPS: Southern High School Façade Renovations & Repairs
3.12 TAP CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to existing piping and underground structures so finished Work complies as nearly as practical with requirements specified for new Work.
B. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye fitting, plus 6-inch (150-mm) overlap, with not less than 6 inches (150 mm) of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) .
C. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 4 to NPS 20 (DN100 to DN500) . Remove section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye with not less than 6 inches (150 mm) of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) .
D. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 21 (DN525) or larger, or to underground structures by cutting opening into existing unit large enough to allow 3 inches (76 mm) of concrete to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall, unless otherwise indicated. On outside of pipe or structure wall, encase entering connection in 6 inches (150 mm) of concrete for minimum length of 12 inches (300 mm) to provide additional support of collar from connection to undisturbed ground. 1. Use concrete that will attain minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) , unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use epoxy-bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete and piping materials.
E. Protect existing piping and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate.
3.13 CLOSING ABANDONED STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below: 1. Close open ends of piping with at least 8-inch- (200-mm-) thick, brick masonry bulkheads. 2. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs.
B. Abandoned Structures: Excavate around structure as required and use one procedure below: 1. Remove structure and close open ends of remaining piping. 2. Remove top of structure down to at least 36 inches (1000 mm) below final grade. Fill to within 12 inches (300 mm) of top with stone, rubble, gravel, or compacted dirt. Fill to top with concrete. GCPS: Southern High School STORM DRAINAGE 33 41 00 - 9 Façade Renovations & Repairs 10 3. Backfill to grade according to Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3.14 Trench drains
A. The system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
3.15 TRACK PERIMETER DRAINS
A. Construct drain per manufacturer’s instruction, and as detailed, exercising caution to provide a precision fit into existing bituminous surface.
B. Verify position of drain at edge of track along straight and in the two radius sections. Drain position and elevation must be accepted by the Owner and Engineer prior to making the installation.
3.16 BIORETENTION POND
A. Excavate area for pond to depth of underdrain.
B. Perform percolation tests in accordance with Appendix D.1 of the MDE 2000 Stormwater Design Manual. Report test results to engineer.
C. Install underdrain and gravel. Daylight underdrain pipe- field verify location.
D. Install fabric
E. After upstream area has been stabilized, install sand and planting soil. Do not compact sand or planting soils.
F. Flush system with water.
3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed. 1. In large, accessible piping, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning. 2. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops. 3. Flush piping between manholes and other structures to remove collected debris, if required by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches (600 mm) of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project. 1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following: a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.
33 41 00 - 10 STORM DRAINAGE GCPS: So Façade Renovations & Repairs
b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping. 3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified. 4. Re-inspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
END OF SECTION
GCPS: Southern High School STORM DRAINAGE 33 41 00 - 11 Façade Renovations & Repairs